Qatar Highway Design Manual

QATAR GENERAL PETROLEUM CORPORATION
)lii)1U-l
tl,jJl9 w
1
Llh
Introduction by H.E. Minister for Municipal Affairs and Agriculture
The State of Qatar is witnessing rapid

development and the road construction
sector is most closely connected with this
development. It is highly important when
designing roads to take into consideration
the latest international standards and
specifications which in turn conform to
environmental requirements and the fbture
need to link the road network with the
development programme.
I
I
Therefore, the initiative of the Civil

Engineering Department in the Ministry of
Municipal Affairs and Agricultural to update the Qatar Highway Design Manual,
which was published for the first time in
1989. is the best evidence of its desire to
keep up with the progress that this country
is witnessing and emphasises the
determination of this Ministry that its
achievements are proof of its work.
We ask God to guide our steps to the
righteous path.
Z-&l
& GIk;
J
-
ji Jk
&,WJl-&&
ALI %IN SAEED AL KflAYAREEN
&13jl19 1-
a9@l
j,
MINISTER OF MUNICIPAL AFFAIRS AND AGRICULTURE
;LJljJlj
&l&
dj@l l j l j j J & j / t t Y
Introduction by H.E. the Undersecretary of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs

and Agriculture
The Road Network represents the arteries j

4
&+
6 9 1
iL] t j u l j . SJM
-I
U J ~ I
for traffic movement in the modern state. ue
Streets are not just for pedestrian and a U ) e l l uPJ & G
1traffic movement but contain electricity d
4
~3-j
:
.el LL-?
and telephone cables, and sewerage h 3 d Ju
i
)
networks.
(. .. ~ j - 1 ~ 64j+u1
Q
Therefore, "the information that should be

available for the road designer should not
be confined to population density, the
nature of land and its topography only.
The designer has to coordinate with
service authorities and study the
development progress of the area, its
environment and the effects of road
construction and the movement of traffic.
The publication of the Qatar Highway
Design Manual, in a new issue by the Civil
Engineering Depanment, is undoubtedly a
step in the right path, and is the fastest
way to reach our objective.
God is behind our purpose and will guide
us on the right path.
LJ$I
;JIJ! j ! h ! i)!
6 9 1 >bll)uG L I J j l l J $41dJ@I
j
yi 9 L
9 ;+dl +b j
(9
2
S j l j~ - d l
1 &9lje
J!!IF$
. &dl
~ l g !J
,+-dl
&,&
&Jl
t r l
GIjJ(jl hlJ
ddl-$?&
ALI BIN SAAD AL KWARI
;Ll j g l j L&13
j
'
d
1i j ljj J&
UNDERSECRETARY
OF THE MINISTRY
OF MUNICIPAL AFFAIRS
AND AGRICULTURE
1-
?+
JjM )*L.1 4 1 ;41L.
1-
Introduction by the Director of Civil Engineering Department
This is the second issue of the Qatar + U S

Highway Design Manual we present to Lpu
engineers working in the roads and j
jJ-l
construction sector in the State of Qatar.
The first issue was published in December
1989 and we have been eager that this
issue should contain more details of the
methods and ideas which have developed
during this period regarding the design and
construction of roads, especially those
adopted in the USA, UK and other
countries in the last few years.
Whilst it is the intention of this Manual to
be used in the road construction sector,
never the less, it should not be considered
the only source; it is only a guide to
highway engineers. The engineer needs to
research, review and be assisted by other
scientific sources. The Manual does not
cover the area of traffic engineering and
related matters such as planning and
transportation studies and issues of general
policy. We will welcome any observations,
suggestion or additions for future issues.
QUI
'J>
iL.w
j&Wl &
J&
C rj
GY;J
&L
3-
a&
,,
-.MI a i r
j
jJ&l
v
d
4
U,J
&JJU
p 3, . ir\ 9 A 9
& I+* 1-
++LAY
I
&Li;ll
O&
L& G I $1
21-
-+JAY
+ILA
2 2 :Y
@A+J
JGJI
eyi-YIJ
:x
. &+i
i .-)a,
J+
d
6
-2
LL, 6 6 9 1 GU!,
l; d l
j
& d l & b*,
('3
JU~I,
9j&A1
$1
id1=IJ
. i&l &l+l
&&
~ 4
i! &J
J
J Glr:Y
~
1
U
Yb
+ M2
I I&
J.A'u,
10,
a141& L I J J ,
. LiiG
1. L W ! -1
, 1
&Gt;Pi,
! G L I J ~ i,I
+
j,&l
L:L
~31
dJG>
&&
o&i;-
\ ,PI"z
C.
d l &L+
The Civil Engineering Department while

&d @ J G d I
iJI J d!
working earnestly to benefit from new 14
uC
&+
S J L Y I &=
engineering developments to keep up with d 6 d l ?-c
;
r 4 . j-IJ
the times, requests all those specialisiny in 6 $a5 UJJ
4L W I 5 9 1e
road design in the State of Qatar to p-UdlJ
c j L l d l
&
. + W l I& L+& +I
implement the specifications and standards
contained in this Manual.
May god gives us the fortune to carry out Q UU-Js
the trust we bear and to do what benefits
the Country
&hLl
.1- '~
*UJi~b4bL
ALI BIN NASSER RL THAN1

;LIJl
L u r l l Jjl~l*
DIRECTOR OF"CI\IILE N C ~ I N E E R I ~ B
QI UJ
G \ ~ Y
DEPARTMENT
QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL
DOCUMENT HISTORY
DOCUMENT HISTORY
The purpose of the Document History is to record changes to the Qatar Highway Design Manual. In the
event of a revision to the manual, CEO will issue the amended pages and re-issue the Document
History.
The Document History pages should contain a description of the change, the issue reference and the
date of issue as noted below. The updated Document History should replace the superseded history
and the revised pages of the manual should be placed in the appropriate position in the manual.
Description
Issue
Date
Qatar Highway Design Manual
Original Issue
December 1989
Qatar Highway Design Manual
2nd Edition (Rev 0 )
January 1997
January 1997
Page DHM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
'The Qatar Highway Design Manual draws on technical input and experience from a number of
recognised international sources and applies these to the road system requirements for Qatar. Within,
the text there are references to publications where the engineer may seek further information on a
specific topic. The main reference sources are acknowledged below:
Qatar Construction Specification
Qatar Traffic Manual
Design Manual for Road and Bridgeworks British Government Highway Agency
Policy on Geometric Design of Highways - American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials.
Road Design Manual National Association of Australian State Road Authorities.
Designing for Deliveries Freight Transport Association.
Section 6 Copyright Acknowledgement

Section 6 of this manual contains text and diagrams which are based on material contained within the British Government's
Highways Agency publicationthe 'Design Manual for Road and Bridges Volume 6 Section 2.
Crown copyright material has been adapted with the permission of the controller of Her Majesty's ~tatione4Office and the
Highways Agency who do not accept any responsibilityfor the accuracy or comprehensiveness of the contents this Manual.
January 1997
Page AW1
COWENTS
CONTENTS
Page No
...
..........................................................
ROAD SYSTEM IN QATAR ............ ;.................................
GLOSSARY
G/l
RSal
The Highway Network

Primary Routes
Secondary Routes
Tertiary Routes
The Route Classification
Qatar Area Zones
SECTION 1
Clause 1.1
Clause 1.2
Clause 1.3
Clause 1.4
Clause 1.5
Clause 1.6
Clause 1.7
Clause 1.8
Ciause 1.9
SECTION 2
Clause2.1
Clause 2.2
Clause 2.3
Clause 2.4
Clause 2.5
Clause 2.6
ECTION 3
ause 3.1
ause 3.2
ause 3.3
ause 3.4
lause 3.5
lause 3.6
lause 3.7
lause 3.8
DESIGN SPEED
General
Design Speed Related Parameters
Selection of Design Speed
Posted Speed
Changeover of Design Speed
Changeover t o Existing Roads
Selection of Parameter Values
Relaxations and Departures
Special Considerations
.................................................
..........................
..................................
...........................................
..............................
.............................
..............................
...............................
...................................
SIGHT DISTANCE
General
Stopping Sight Distance
Full overtaking sight Distance
:
Obstructions to Sight Distance
Effect of Horizontal Curves on Sight Distance
.................................................
..................................
............. ...............
.............................
................
...................................
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
General
Minimum Curvature
Transition Curves
Camber and Superelevation
Widening on Curves
Harmonising the Alignment
Horizontal Clearances
.................................................
......................................
........................................
...............................
......................................
................................
....................................
...................................
SECTION 4
Clause 4.1
Clause 4.2
Clause 4.3
Clause 4.4
Clause 4.5
Clause 4.6
Clause 4.7
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
General Controls
Maximum and Mlnimum Grades
VerticalCurves
Harmonising the Vertical Alignment
Phasing Horizontal and Vertical Alignment
Vertical Clearances
SECTION 5
Clause 5.1
Clause 5.2
Clause 5.3
Clause 5.4
Clause 5.5
Clause5.6
CROSS SECTIONAL ELEMENTS

Road Resewatlons
:
Lane Width6
Lane Capacity
Shoulders
Edge Strips and Shy Distances
Medians ................................... ;
.........................................
............................
..........................................
.........................
...................
........................................
....................................
........................................ 511 .
.............*................................ 5111
........................................... 5112
............................................... 5112
............................. 5113
............ 5113
Januarv 1997
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/2
2/2
a2
Pase C/1
9TAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL
..
.....
Clause 6.2
Clause 6.3
Clause 6.4
Clause 6.5
Clause 6.6
Clause 6.7
CofwENTS
Verges .................................................
5/14
5/15
Parking Bays and Lanes..
Side Slopes .............................................
5M6
Auxiliary Lanes ..........................................
5M7
Service Roads
5M7
Pedestrian Facilities
5118
Utilities .................................................
5/19
UseofKerbs
5/19
Safety Fences ............................................5/20
Crash Cushions
5/26
Fencing
5/27
Road Closure
5/27
Landscaping
5/30
ause5.7
ause 5.8
ause 5.9
ause 5.10
ause 5.1 1
lause 5.12
ause 5.13
lause5.14
ause 5.15
lause 5.1 6
lause 5.17
lause 5.1 8
lause5.19
SECTION 6
Clause 6.1
................................
...........................................
......................................
.............................................
..........................................
.................................................
............................................
............................................
JUNCTIONS
General .................................................
6.1.I
Junction Spacing
. 6.1.2
Traffic Flows
6.1.3
Design Vehicles
6.1.4
Siting of Junctions
Types of Junction
6.2.1
T-Junction
6.2.2
Simple Crossroads
6.2.3
Staggered Junction
6.2.4
Skew or Y-Junction
6.2.5
Roundabout
6.2.6
Grade Separated Interchange
6.2.7
Traffic Signals
Junction Selection .......................................
6.3.1
Status of Intersecting Roads
6.3.2
Continuity of Standard
6.3.3
Junction Capacity
Major/Minor Junctions General
Safety At MajorlMinor Junctions
MajorNinor Junction Types ...............................
6.6.1
The Simple T-Junction
T-Junction with Ghost Island .
6.6.2
T-Junction with Single Lane Dualling
6.6.3
T-Junction on a Dual Carriageway with Median
6.6.4
Opening (Signalized)
T-Junction on a Dual Carriageway with Carriageway
6.6.5
separation
6.6.6
Crossroads
6.6.7
Staggered Junction
Right and Left Hand Skew Junction
6.6.8
MajorIMinor Junction Elements
6.7.1
General
6.7.2
Design Speed
6.7.3
Visibility
6.7.4
Corner Radii
6.7.5
Carriageway Widths
Central Islands Major Road
6.7.6
6.7.7
Central Island Tapers
6.7.8
Turning Length in Median
6.7.9
Direct Taper Length
6.7.10
Left Turning Lanes
6.7.1 1
Median Openings
6.7.12
Traffic Islands '
Nearside Diverging Tapers and Auxiliary Lanes
6.7.13
6.7.14
Merging Tapers
.........................................
611
616
6ff
............................
............................
619
619
6/9
............................
6/14
January 1997
Page C/2
. .
:.
Clause 6.8
Clause 6.9
Clause 6.1 0
Clause 6.1 1
Clause 6.1 2
Clause 6.13
Clause 6.1 4
Clause 6.1 5
Clause 6.1 6
January 1997
CONIENTS
6.7.1 5
Stagger Distances6.7.1 6
Skew Junctions
6.7.17
T-Junction with Carriageway Separation
Channelizing Islands
6.7.1 8
SplitterIRight Turn Islands
6.7.1 9
6.7.20
Drainage and Crossfall
6.7.21
Traffic Signs and Road Markings
6.7.22
Road Lighting
Roundabouts General .. :
6.8.1
General Principles
6.8.2
Types of Roundabout
Safety at Roundabouts.
6.9.1
General
6.9.2
Two Wheeled Vehicles
6.9.3
Large Goods Vehicles
Roundabout Elements
6.1 0.1
Definitions
6.1 0.2
Entries
6.1 0.3
Entry Width
6.10.4
Flare Design at Entry
6.1 0.5
Entry Angle
6.1 0.6
Entry Radius
6.1 0.7
Entry Kerbing
6.1 0.8
Entry Deflection
6.1 0.9
Achieving Entry Deflection
Visibility
6.1 0.1 0
6.1 0.1 1
Circulatory Carriageway
Inscribed Circle Diameter (ICD)
6.1 0.1 2
6.1 0.1 3
Exits
Crossfall and Longitudinal Gradient
6.1 0.1 4
Segiegated Right Turning Lanes
6.1 0.1 5
6.1 0.1 6
Road Markings
U-Turns General
Safety At U-Turns ........................................
U-Turn Elements
6.1 3.1
General
6.1 3.2
Direct Taper Length
Width of Physical Islands in the Median
6.1 3.3
6.1 3.4
Left Turn Lane
6.1 3.5
Median Openings
6.1 3.6
StorageIQueuing length
6.1 3.7
Merging Length
6.1 3.8
Pavement Construction
6.1 3.9
Road Lighting
6.1 3.1 0
Drainage and Crossfall
6.1 3.1 1
Urban Road Service Road DivergeMerge
6.1 5.1
Residential Areas
6.1 5.2
Older Residential Areas
6.15.3
Other Road Users
Signalized Junctions
6.16.1
Introduction
,
6.1 6.2
Basic Requirements
6.1 6.3
Typical Layout Features
................................
....................................
....................................
........................................
.........................................
...................
...................................
.....................................
Page C/3
c o r n .

.
SECTION,7
Clause 7.1
Clause 7.2
Clause 7.3
Clause 7.4
Clause 7.5
,-
INTERCHANGES
Introduction
Types of Interchange.
General
7.2.1
7.2.2
Full Interchange
7.2.3
Compact Interchange
..
..
.............................................
....................................
711
711
c-
1 -
...............................
Selection of Junction Type.

7.3,1
General
Traffic Flows and Design Year
7.3.2
Junction Spacing within the Network
7.3.3
Initial Information Requirements and Decisions
7.3.4
Types of Interchange for Preliminary Design
7.3.5
7.3.6
Preliminary Designs
Design Elemen,ts
7.4.1
Definitions
7.4.2
Design Speed
7.4.3
Lane Provision and Capacity
Hard Shoulders and Edge Strips
:7.4.4
Merges and Diverges at Interchanges
7.4.5
7.4.6
Slip Roads
7.4.7
Link Roads
7.4.8
Loop Roads
7.4.9
Weaving Sections
Other Design Considerations
7.5.1
Clearance and Headroom
7.5.2
Superelevation
7.5.3
Safety Fencing
7.5.4
Signing
7.5.5
Lighting
7.5.6
Utilities
7.5.7
Emergency Vehicles
7.5.8
Maintenance Provisions
7.5.9
Environmental Issues
SECTION 8
Clause 8.1
Clause 8.2
Clause 8.3
Clause 8.4
Clause 8.5
January 1997
.........................................
..............................
DRAINAGE
Introduction . ;............................................
Functions of Highway Drainage
8.1 .I
8.1.2
Minor and Major Systems
Design Criteria ...........................................
8.2.1
Hydrological Data
8.2.2
Design Return Period
8.2.3
Design Method
Urban Drainage. .........................................
8.3.1
Introduction
8.3.2
Urban Catchment
8.3.3
Positive Drainage
8.3.4
Drainage of the Carriageway
Drainage of Medians, Footways and Verges
8.3.5
8.3.6
Emergency Flood Area (EFA)
8.3.7
Maintenance Strategy
Rural Drainage. ..........................................
8.4.1 - .. Introduction
8.4.2
Rural Catchment
8.4.3
Drainage of Medians and Verges
8.4.4
8.4.5
Natural Surface Drainage
JunctionDrainage
8.5.1
Introduction
8.5.2
Drainage at Junctions
........................................
. Page Cl4.
......................................
Clause 8.6
Subsurface Drainage
8.6.1
Introduction
8.6.2
Subsurface Drainage Methods
SECTION 9
Clause 9.1
PAVEMENT
Clause 9.2
Clause 9.3
8125
....................................
Introduction ....... ;.
9.1.1
General
9.1.2
Typical Pavement Structures
9.1.3
Road ~eteriordiori
Variability in Materials and Road Performance
9.1.4
TrafficAssessment .......................................
9.2.1
Introduction
9.2.2
Design Life
9.2.3
Traffic Forecasting
9.2.4
Traffic Counts
9.2.5
Standard Axles
Deterrrrination of Cumulative Standard Axles
9.2.6
9.2.7
Design Traffic Classes
Pavement Materials
9.3.1
Qatar Construction Specification (QCS)
9.3.2
Subgrade
Granular Material for Sub-base and Roadbase
9.3.3
9.3.4
Roadbase Asphalt Concrete
9.3.5
Cement Bound Material
9.3.6
Wearing Course
9.3.7
Concrete for Rigid Pavements
9.3.8
Precast Paving Blocks
Design Charts. ..........................................
9.4.1
General
9.4.2
Asptialt Concrete Roadbase
9.4.3
Asphalt and Granular Roadbase
9.4.4
Flexible-Composite Roadbase
9.4.5
Reinforced Jointed Concrete Slabs
9.4.6
Precast Block Paving
Special Pavement Sections
Staged Construction (Single Layer Construction)
9.5.1
Pavement Evaluation .....................................
9.6.1
Introduction
9.6.2
Routine Monitoring
9.6.3
Detailed survey'
9.6.4
Detailed Investigation
Interpretation and Design of Remedial Works
9.6.5
References
Basis of the Design Method for Asphalt Roadbase.
9A. 1
Design Methods
9A.2
Design Strategy
9A.3
Applicable Methods
9A.4
Specific Method for Qatar
9A.5
Weak Subgrades
9A.6
References
......................................
Clause 9.4
................................
Clause 9.5
Clause 9.6
..............................................
...........
Clause 9.7
Annex 9A
SECTION 10
Clause 10.1
C ' -
.
.
.
,
-.
.............................................. 1011
................................
Clause 10.2
ROADWAY LIGHTING
Introduction
10.1.1
Reasons for Lighting
10.1.2
Justification
10.1.3
Scope
10.1.4
Complementary Standards
Performance Requirements
Summary of Road Classifications in Qatar
10.2.'1
10.2.2
Lighting Performance Recommendations
Limitation of Glare and "Light Pollutionn
10.2.3
.. .....
.
January 1997
.Z .(
1011
Page C15

:.
Clause 10.3
Clause 10.4
Clause 10.5
Clause 10.6
>
..
Recommended Practice ...................................

10.3.1
Decisions Prior to Design
10.3.2
Standard Lighting Geometries for Different ~ o a Profiles
d
10.3.3
Lighting Columns as Hazards
Typical Lighting Layouts at Junctions
10.3.4
Speclflcatlon of Equipment.
Electrical Distribution
10.5.1
SUPP~Y
10.5.2
Feeder Pillars 10.5.3
Cables
10.5.4
Ducts
10.5.5
Earthing Systems
10.5.6
Safety Standards
Maintenance and Operation
10.6.1
Design Implications
10.6.2
Quality of Equipment
Inventory and Fault Reports .
10.6.3
10.6.4
Cleaning and Lamp Replacement
: 10.6.5
Frequency of Inspections
10.6.6
Hours of Operation
APPENDIX A
Clause A1
Clause A2
c o r .n.
. . .
1012
...............................
......................................
1O f f
1Off
................................
1018
SURVEYS
Introduction
Survey i n Qatar.
Centre for GIs - Mapping and Positioning Services
A2.1
Land lnformation Centre General Survey Section (GSS)
A2.2
A2.3
Planning Department
A2.4
CED Survey Unit
Survey Work Procedures ..................................
A3.1
Topographical Surveys
A3.2
Services Surveys
A3.3
As-built Surveys
Approved Survey Companies
Specification for Topographical Survey
AS. 1
, ~eatures
to be Observed
A5.2
Preparation of Survey Data
A5.3
Specifications
A5.4
Checking and Verification
.............................................
.........................................
Clause A3
Clause A4
Ciause A5
..............................
.....................
APPENDIX B GUIDANCE NOTES TO PREPARE A BRIEF FOR GEOTECHNICAL

SITE INVESTIGATIONS
Introduction
BM
Clause B1
BM
Clause 8 2
Initial Considerations
BI2
Clause 8 3
Preparation of the Brief.
83.1
Geotechr~icalInvestigation Works
83.2
Field Tests
83.3
Laboratory Tests
Clause 8 4
Engineering Considerations
Bff
84.1
Methods of investigation
84.1 .I
Trial Pits
84.1.2
Boreholes
84.1.3
Samples
84.2
Testing
84.2.1
In Situ Testing
84.2.2
Laboratory Testing
84.3
Earthworks
84.4
Retaining Structures
84.5
Geo-synthetics
Clause 6 5
Sample Pro Forma for Quantifying Geotechnical Site lnvestlgatlons 8/14
..............................................
.....................................
..................................
................................
January 1997
. . . . ..
Page C/6
--
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED
AADT(Average Annual Daily Trafflc) Total

yearly two-way traffic volume divided by the
number of days in the year.
Acceleration Lane A speed change lane to

enable a vehicle entering a roadway to increase
its speed to merge with through traffic. .
Access Road - Road providing access to a
local area or individual properties from a
distributor road.
ADT (XX) (Average Daily Traffic) - The current
or projected average two-way daily traffic for the
year 19xx or 20xx used to define the traffic for
that year in the Gregorian Calender.
At-grade intersection - An intersection where
all carriageways join or cross at the same level.
Auxiliary Lane The portion of the carnageway

adjoining the travelled way for weaving; truck
climbing, speed change, or for other purposes
supplementary to through traffic movement.
Axle Load The total load transmitted by all

wheels on a single axle extending across the
full width of the vehicle. Tandem axles l m or
less apart shall be considered as a single axle.
Backslope - In cuts, the slope from the bottom
of the ditch to the top of the cut.
Berm (1) A raised and elongated area of earth

intended to direct a flow of water, screen
headlight glare. (2) Embankment widening to
provide lateral support for the roadway.
Braking Distance 'The distance required to

stop the vehicle from the instant brake
application begins.
Braking Reaction Distance - The distance
iraversed by the vehicle from the instant the
driver sights an object necessitating a stop, to
the instant the brakes are applied.
Bridge - Structure supporting road or
pedestrian walkway over an area to be crossed.
Broken Back Curve An arrangement of

curves in which a short tangent separates two
curves in the same direction.
January 1997
Buffer Zone (Buffer Strip) - Land adjacent to

a highway acquired by the highway authority for
the purpose of preventing development that
would be adversely affected by traffic noise, or
for erecting noise barriers.
Business Distrlct
That portion of a
municipality or an area within the influence of a
municipality in which the dominant land use is
offices, banks, hotels and government buildings
Callfornla Bearing Ratio (CBR) The ratio of

the force required to penetrate a soil mass with
a circular piston of 5cm diameter to the force
required to penetrate a mass of high quality
crushed stone with the same piston. The rate of
penetration in both cases is 1.27mm per
minute. Refer BS 1377.
Camber (1) A slight arch designed or built into

a structure to compensate for the natural
deflection after loading. (2) Slope on a single
carriageway road from the centre to the edges
to aid drainage.
Capillary Break Layer The layer of specified

or selected material placed on the subgrade to
break the capillary rise of water and salts.
Capplng Layer - Layer replacing existing
material under the pavement.
Carrlageway - The pa? of a highway, including
shoulders, for vehicular use.
Single
carriageway or dual carriageway.
Catchment Area feeding rainfall to a specific

point.
Centreline (1) For a two-lane highway the

centerline is the middle of the travelled way,
and for a divided highway the centreline may be
the centre of the median. For a divided
highway with independent roadways, each
roadway has its own centreline. (2) The defined
and surveyed line shown on the plans from
which the highway construction is controlled.
A four-leg
Cloverleaf Interchange
interchange with loops'for left turns, and other
connections for right turns. A full cloverleaf has
ramps for two turning movements in each
quadrant.
. . . .
Page GI1

Commercial Area - That portion of a
municipality or an area within the influence of a
shops and commercial business.
Crash Barrier See Safety Fence

Crest Vertlcal Curve - A vertical curve having
a convex shape in profile.
Crossfall
(1) A pavement superelevated
toward the right or left shoulder on appreciable
curves. (2) On divided highways on straights
or flat curves, each one-way pavement may
have a unidirectional slope across the entire
width of pavement, usually downward toward
the outer edge.
Culvert A closed conduit, other than a bridge,

which conveys water carried in a natural
channel or waterway from one side of a
highway to the other side. Culverts may be
prefabricated pipes of concrete, steel,'or vitrified
clay; or they may be cast-in-place structures of
reinforced concrete, such a box culverts or arch
culverts.
Cuwe Widening - The widening of the highway
travelled way on sharp curves to compensate
for the fact that the rear wheels of a vehicle do
not follow exactly in the tracks of the front
wheels.
Deceleration Lane - A speed-change lane that
enables a vehicle to slow to a safe exit speed
when making an exit turn.
Desert Road - A graded track to access a farm
or small group of properties.
Deslgn Hour Volume (DHV) - The future twoway hourly traffic volume for use in design,
usually the 30th highest hourly volume of the
design year (30 HV).
Deslgn Lane - The lane on which the greatest
slumber of equivalent 8-tonne, standard axle
loads is expected. Normally, this will be either
lane of a two-lane highway (single carriageway)
or the outside lane of a multilane highway (dual
carriageway).
Deslgn Life - The number of years of intended
service life of a facility before the first major
rehabilitation.
Deslgn Speed - A speed selected for purposes
of design and correlation of the geometric
features of a highway and a measure of the
quality of service offered by the highway. It is
January 1997
GLOSSARY
the highest continuous speed where individual
vehicles can travel with safety upon a highway
when weather conditions are favourable, traffic
density is low and the geometric design
features of the highway are the governing
conditions for safe speed.
Design Vehicles - Selected motor vehicles with
the weight, dimensions, and operating
characteristics used to establish highway design
controls for accommodating vehicles of
designated classes.
Design Year - The future year used to estimate
the probable traffic volume for which a highway
is designed. A time 10 to 20 years from the
start of construction is usually used.
Diamond Interchange A four-leg interchange

with a single one-way ramp in each quadrant.
All left turns are made directly on the minor
roadway.
Distributor Road - A type of road serving two'
distinct functions. It provides a traffic service
between primaries, arterial-collectors, other
local roads, a town, village, industrial or
commercial development, or a recreational
area. It also provides direct vehicular access to
privately owned properties. and service is the
first consideration, but traffic service may have
more than incidental significance.
Ditch - A trench dug in the earth for drainage
purposes.
Diverging - The dividing of a single stream of
traffic into separate streams.
Dual Carriageway - A highway with separated
carriageways for traffic in opposite directions.
Eighty-fifth Percentile Speed - The speed at
or below which 85 percent of the vehicles are
being operated.
Elevated Hlghway - A highway on fill or
structure above the level of the adjacent
ground.
Embankment A raised earth structure on

which the road is placed.
Emergency Vehicle - A vehicle belonging .to
the armed forces, civil defence, police, fire
service or ambulance service, or other
designated vehicle used for answering
emergency calls for assistance.
Page GI2
.
. .
Emergency Flood Area (EFA) - Area set aside

to store flood water during heavy rainfall.
ESA (Equlvalent Standard Axle) The effect

on pavement performance of any combination
of axle loads of varying magnitude, equated to
the number of reference single-axle loads
required to produce an equivalent number of
. .
repetitions of an 8-tonne single axle.
Exit -The point where traffic leaves to travel to
an intersecting road.
Fencing Item placed next to the road to define

the edge of reservation or restrict animal
access.
GLOSSARY
Gutter - A paved and generally shallow

waterway provided for carrying surface
drainage.
Headwall A vertical or inclined wall at the end

of a culvert to prevent earth from spilling into
the channel.
Hlerarchy Classlflcatlon - The grouping of
individual highways in a highway system,
according to their purpose or function, the type
of traffic they serve, and their maintenance
requirements. The main functional classes are
Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary, though
subclasses are'also used.
Hlghway see Road.
Foreslope - The slope from the edge of the

surfaced shoulaer to the top of the subgrade, or
the bottom of the ditch in cuts.
Horizontal Alignment - Horizontal geometry of

the highway.
Formation - Graded surface above subgrade or

capping layer on which the pavement structure
is laid.
Horizontal Curve - A circular curve or transition

by means of which a highway can change
direction to the right er left.
Formation Drain - Porous or perforated pipe,

or graded aggregate installed under a roadway
or shoulder to provide subsurface drainage.
Independent Alignments - Each carriageway

of a dual carriageway is designed and located
to take full advantage of the terrain. .The
median need not be of uniform width, and the
two carriageways need not b e at the same
level.
Footpath - That portion of a street or highway

between the kerb line or edge of the roadway,
and the adjacent edge of reservation
constructed specifically for pedestrians
(sometimes referred to as sidewalk).
Full Overtaking Sight Dlstance (FOSD) The

minimum sight distance that must be available
to enable a driver of one vehicle to pass
another vehicle safely without interfering with
the speed of an oncoming vehicle travelling at
the design speed.
Gantry - Signal or sign support above a
carriageway.
Ghost Island Painted or hatched marking on

the road surface to guide traffic.
Gradlent - The profile of the centre of the
carriageway, or its rate of ascent or descent.
Grade To shape or reshape earth by means of

cutting or filling.
Grade Separation - A structure that provides
for highway traffic to pass over or under another
highway.
Gully Collection and distribution point for

surface water along a gutter.
January 1997
Industrial Area - 'That portion within a

light or heavy industry.
the first lane of a dual

Inside Lane
carnageway, commonly referred to as the slow
lane or nearside lane.
Interchange - A system of interconnecting
roads in conjunction with one or more grade
'separations, providing for the movement of
traffic between two or more roads on different
levels.
lntersectlon The connection of two o; more

roads is called a intersection.
lntervisibility - The requirement of a vehicle
driver to see approaching'vehicles and also for
his vehicle to be seen by approaching vehicles.
Junction -Treatment of the intersection of two
roads.
Kerb - A structure with a vertical, horizontal or
sloping face placed along the edge of a
pavement or shoulder forming part of a gutter,
and strengthening or protecting the edge. '
Paae GI3
Lane A portion of the'travelled way providing

for a single line of traffic in one direction.
Left Lane On a two-lane, two-way road, the

traffic lane that is to the left of the centreline and
normally used by traffic moving in the opposite
direction; or on a multilane road, the extreme
left traffic lane of those available for traffic
travelling in the same direction, ie: adjacent to
the median.
Left-Turn Lane A traffic lane within the normal

surfaced width of a roadway or an auxiliary lane
adjacent to or within a median, reserved for leftturning vehicles at an intersection.
Median 'The portion of a divided highway

separating the travelled ways of traffic travelling
in opposite dirdctions.
Medlan Barrier A longitudinal system used to

prevent an errant vehicle from crossing the
median of a dual carriageway.
Median Opening A gap in a median provided

for crossing and turning traffic.
Merging The converging of separate streams

of traffic into a single stream.
Moisture content The percentage, by weight,

of water contained in soil or other material,
usually based on the dryweight.
Motorway
A multilane, dual carriageway
designed to move large volumes of traffic at
high speeds under free-flow conditions.
Motorways have full control of access with
interchanges incorporating grade separation
and junctions.
GLOSSARY
Overpass A grade separation where the

highway passes over an intersecting highway.
Parking Lanes Additional width outside the

travelled way of a highway or street that is
designated for the temporary storage of
vehicles.
Pavement Structure on which vehicles travel.
Pedestrian Crossing Any portion of a road at

an intersection or elsewhere distinctly indicated
for pedestrian crossing by signs, lights and by
lines or other markings on the road surface.
Perception Time The time required by a

driver to perceive that he must change speed or
stop.
- Principle road within the
Primary Road
network.
Profile A longitudinal section of a highway,

drainage course, etc.
Ramp A short carriageway, usually one way,

to accomplish transfer movements within an
interchange from the arterial highway or
motorway to the minor road. Commonly
referred to as a slip road.
Reaction Time The time required for a driver

to apply foot pressure to the brake after he
perceived that he must stop.
Refuge Island An island in a wide intersection

to provide refuge for pedestrians.
Network A group of roads of varled hierarchy

in a defined area.
Residential Area
That portion of a
municipality, or an area within the influence of a
residential development, but where small
business areas may be included.
Noise Barrier - A barrier of earth, stone,

concrete, or wood placed adjacent to the
highway to reduce the noise level on abutting
ProPertY-
Rest Area - A roadside area with parking

facilities separated from the carnageway
providing motorists with opportunities to stop
and rest for short periods.
One-way Highway A highway or roadway

having one or more lanes on which all vehicular
traffic must go in the same direction.
Outer Separator - A separator between , a
service road and the carriageway of a highway
or major street.
Reverse Curve A curve consisting of two arcs

of the same or different radii curving in opposite
directions and having a common tangent or
transition curve at their point of junction.
Right-Turn Lane
An auxiliary lane or
designated lane provided at intersections for
right-turn movements.
Outside Lane 'The lane nearest the median on

a dual carriageway, commonly referred to as
the fast lane or off-side lane.
January 1997
.-
Page G/4

Ring Road - An arterial highway for carrying
traffic around an urban area or portion thereof.
Road (Highway) A general term denoting a

public way for purposes of vehicular travel
including the entire area within the reservation.
Roadbase - The layer of specified or selected
material placed on a sub-base or formation.
Road Hump .(sleeping policeman) Raised

portion of the carriageway designed to slow
passing vehicles.
A traffic control device

Road Markings
consisting of lines, patterns, works, symbols, or
colours on the pavement, or adjacent to the
.. .
road.
Road Sign A traffic control device mounted on

a support above the level of the roadway that
conveys a specific message by mean's of words
or symbols.
Road Stud Reflective or nonreflective stud on

the road surface to define road markings and
traffic positioning.
Rumble Strip - A rough textured surface,
constructed for the purpose of causing the tyres
of a motor vehicle driven over it to vibrate
audibly as a warning to the driver.
Safety Fence A protective cable, beam or wall

device placed along the carriageway edge for
the purpose of redirecting vehicles that have left
the roadway at a point of hazard.
Sag Vertical Curve - A vertical curve having a
concave shape in profile.
Screening - The use of trees, shrubs, fences,
or other materials to obscure an objectionable
view or to reduce an objectionable sound.
Secondary Road - A highway of less national
significance than a Primary road, but a highway
that is intended to move large volumes of traffic
at high speeds. Military installations and
seaports not served by a Primary road are
reached via Secondary roads.
Traffic
movement is the primary consideration, but this
type of road may also provide some land
service function.
GLOSSARY
Separator - An area or a device located
longitudinally between two carriageways so as
to separate traffic flowing in the same or
opposite directions, and so designed as to
discourage or prevent passage by vehicles from
the traffic lanes on one side of the separator to
those on the other.
Shoulder - The portion of carriageway
contiguous with the travelled way for
accommodation of stopped vehicles for
emergency use, and for lateral support of base
and surface courses.
Shy Distance The portion of carriageway

contiguous with the travelled way which
separates the face of the kerb from the travelled
way.
Sight Distance - The length of roadway ahead,
visible to the driver.
'.
Standard Axle - Single axle load of 8,167 kg.

Stopping Sight Distance (SSD) - The distance
required by a driver of a vehicle, travelling at a
given speed, to bring his vehicle to a stop after
an object on the roadway becomes visible. It
includes the distance travelled during the
perception and reaction times, as well as the
vehicle braking distance.
Storm Drain (sewer) - A system of catch
basins and underground conduits collecting,
concentrating, and conveying water to a
disposal point.
Street See Road.

Sub-base - The layer or layers of specified or
selected material of designed thickness placed
on the subgrade to support the roadbase.
Subgrade - (1) The top 300mm layer of
embankments or excavated areas on which the
pavement structure including shoulders is
constructed. (2) The top of a capping layer
upon which the pavement structure and
shoulders areconstructed.
Superelevation - The elevating of the outside
edge of a curve to partially offset the centrifugal
force generated when a vehicle rounds the
curve.
Superelevation Runoff (application) The

transition distance between normal crown and
fully superelevated roadway.
Januarv 1997
Paae 615
An application of bituminous
Tack Coat
material to an existing surface to provide bond
with a superimposed course.
Time of Concentration The time required for

storm runoff to flow from the most remote point
of a drainage catchment area to the point under
consideration. It is usually associated with the
design storm.
Toe of Slope
The intersection of an
embankment side slope with the original ground
surface.
Topsoil (Rodah soil) Surface soil, usually

containing organic matter.
Trafflc Barriers Roadside barriers, median

barriars, cras~cushions,and bridge parapets
intended to guide or protect traffic from roadside
hazards, including collision with other vehicles.
Traffic Island An island provided in the road

to separate or direct streams of traffic; includes
both divisional and channelizing islands.
Trafflc Lane That portion of the travelled way

for the movement of a single line of vehicles.
Traffic Signal Lights used to direct and stop

and start traffic.
GLOSSARY
Underpass A grade separation where the

highway passes under an intersecting highway.
Can be a pedestrian or animal underpass which
crosses under the main highway.
Verge -The portion of the highway reservation
that is next to the road and is unpaved.
Vertical Curve A curve on the longitudinal

profile of a road to provide a change of gradient.
.
Visibility The distance at which an object can

be just perceived by the eye.'
Visibility Splay The area required for driver

visibility to the left and right on the approach
to a junction from the minor arm.
Wearing Course The top layer of a pavement

which resists skidding, traffic abrasion and the
disintegrating effects of climate.
Weaving The crossing of traffic streams

moving in the same general direction
accomplished by merging and diverging.
Weavlng Sections Highway segments where

the pattern of traffic entering and leaving at
contiguous points of access results in vehicle
paths crossing each other.
Transition A section of variable pavement

width required when changing from one width of
travelled way to a greater or lesser width.
Transition Curve (Spiral) A curve of variable

radius intended to effect a smooth transition
from straight to curved alignment.
Travelled Way
- The portion of the
carriageway for the movement of vehicles,
exclusive of .shoulders, hard strips, shy
distances and auxiliary lanes.
Turning Lanes Auxiliary lanes provided at at'grade intersections for right and left turning
movements.
Turning Track Width The radial distance

between the turning paths of the outside of the
outer front tyre and the outside of the rear tyre
that is nearest the center of the turn.
Typical Cross Section - A transverse section
of a proposed highway showing the lateral
dimensions and functional and structural
elements cf the highway.
'
January 1997
Page GI6
ROAD SYSTEM IN QATAR

The Highway Network
Secondary and Tertiary Route Numbers follow

a branching system based on the Primary
Route Numbers.
Roads within the State of Qatar each fulfil

certain functions within the overall network. A
hierarchy exists which defines their various
roles. Table 1 shows the status of road types
within the hierarchy.
Qatar Area Zones
Primary Routes
Activities such as planning, street names, Road

Network Plans and Hierarchy Plans are
generally referenced against the area zones.
These zones are illustrated in Figure 3 and
Figure 4.
These are 'routes of strategic significance

whose purpose is to act as the principal
distribution routes between the City of Doha, the
main regional centres and the national border.
They are generally dual carriageway roads, built
to high geometric
standards.
.. .
For ease of communication and coordination

between Government bodies Qatar has been
divided into reference Zones.
The present system of Primary Routes is

illustrated in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Secondary Routes
Secondary Routes serves as area distributors
by linking Primary Routes either to each other
or by feeding traffic into the Tertiary Route
network. They are generally dual Carriageway
but in rural areas may be single carriageway.
The major Secondary Routes are also shown in
Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Tertiary Routes
District distributors, local distributors and access
roads are classified as Tertiary Routes. District
distributors are urban dual carriageway roads
providing high capacity routes between districts.
Local distributor roads link access roads to
either the Secondary Route network or, in urban
areas, the district distributors. Both local
distributors
and
access
roads are
characteristically low design speed, single
carriageway roads.
The Route Classification
The Route numbering system is centred on the
city of Doha. As shown in Figure 2, the origin of
the Primary Route network is the D-Ring Road,
this being designated Route No.1. The Primary
Routes Nos. 1 to 7 extend radially outwards
from the D-Ring Road. With the exception of
Route No. 59, linking Route N0.5 to the national
border, all Primary Routes have single digit
numbers.
. .
..
January 1997
...
. ..
..
.. .
. .. . ,
..
. .
Paae RSQ/l
Route Classification
Class
Ref
Function
Carriageways
General
Corridor
Wldth
(m)
Dual 2-3 lane
64
Roundabouts, minor T or gradeseparated junctions. Some Uturns on rural routes
T-junctions, with double U-turns

on dual carriageway, staggered
junctions on single carriageway
Design
PRIMARY RQUZE
Rural
PI
A major road linking towns, or a

bypass
Urban
P2
A major urban road
Rural
S1
A rural road linking settlements

to the primary networks.
Significant traffic flow or use by
goods vehicles
Dual 2-3 lane

Single 2-lane
64/40
S2
A major urban road for through

traffic
Dual 2-3 lane
64/40132
Rural Local Road
TR1
A rural road linking settlements
Single 2-lane
40132
T-junctions
District Distributor
TR2
An urban road linking districts
Dual 2-3 lane

wide single or
single 2-lane
64/4W32
Roundabouts, slip-onlsllp-off or
signalised junctions. No U-turns.
Limited access from existing
properties. New properties to
provide rear access. Parallel
parking in bays
Local Distributor
TR3
A road distributing traffic within

a district
Wide single or
single 2-lane
(some existing
routes may be
dual
carriageway)
40/32/24/
20
T-junctions or
Roundabouts.
signalised junctions. Offset Xroads.
Direct access from
properties. Parallel parking bays.
Access Road
TR4
A road giving direct access to

properties
residential major access
residential minor access
culde-sac serving a maximum
of 12 properties
Single 2-lane
24120116
Roundabouts or T-junctions.
Offset X-roads. Direct access
from properties. Parallel parking,
on street.
TRS
A road giving direct access to

properties and collecting minor
roads for entrylexit onto Dual
Carriageway.
Single 1-way
or 2-way
Scenic Routes
SR1
Roads with special functions as

dignitary routes or recreational
routes
varies
varies
Varies, emphasis on integrated

landscaping and architecture.
Lorry Routes (3)
SR2
Specially designated and

designed for heavy vehicles
varies
varies
Varies, emphasis on pavement

design, appropriate junction radii
etc.
.. Urban
--
Senrice Road
Mergeldiverge tapers onto dual

m y . Parallelallgnment to major
road way. T-Junction access for
Minor roads. Speed redudlon,
direct access from properties, onstreet parking, parallelor angle.
sPEClAL(2)
Notes
(1) The general road corridors are based on the MMAA's plan 'General guidance for road cross-sections and utility disjmsltions".
(2) These can be either primary, secondary or tertiary routes.
(3) The main Lorry Routes include the Regional Primary Roads and the Rural Distributors.
Table 1 Route Classification and Function
January 1997
Page RSW2
PRlNARY ROUTES
S E C O N D A R Y ROUTES
-TERTLARY ROUTE8
-LOCAL ROUTES
Figure 1
January 1997
Road Hierarchy - State of Qatar
Page RSW3
-PRIYARYRWTES
-SECONDARYROUTE8
-TERTIARY ROUTES
- LOCALRourEs
Figure 2
Road Hierarchy - Greater Doha
January 1997 .
Page RSW4
.
.
. .
. ?
ZONE BOUNDARY
65
Figure 3
January 1997
ZONE NUMBER
QARS Zones State of Qatar
Page RSW5
- ZONE BOUNDARY
68
Figure 4
January 1997
ZONE NUMBER
QARS Zones - Greater Doha
Page RSW6
. ..
January 1997
Page RSQn

*-
January 1997
95.
At Kharrara
96.
Abu S m r a
97.
Sawda Natheel
98.
Khor Al Adaid
Page RSW8
SECTION 1 DESIGN SPEED
SECTION 1
relaxations and departures and special

considerations
'
1.1
GENERAL
The speed of vehicles depends on the

capabilities of driver and vehicle and on other
general conditions such as the physical
characteristics of the highway and its roadsides,
the weather, the presence of other vehicles and
finally, the presence of speed limitations.
Although any one of these may govern, often
the effects are combined.
In Qatar the weather has an adverse effect on
the relationship between tyre and road surface
and hence design speed. The heat results in a
build-up of rubber deposit on the road surface
from tyres. This in turn decreases the skid
resistance of the road surface. Qatar is also
subject to intense rainfall at certain times of the
year. The addition of rainfall to a road surface
which has reduced skid resistance increases
the potential for accidents. This is particularly
valid on the approach to and at junctions where
turning and stopping movements are high.
Furthermore, water is often spilled from water
tankers at roundabouts and junctions. Bearing
this in mind, the selection of design speed and
hence stopping distance is extremely important.
The design speed of a highway may be defined
as the highest continuous speed at which any
vehicle can safely travel when given favourable
weather conditions and low traffic volumes, so
that the design features of the highway may
govern. Such design features may include
structures, or frequency of junctions. The
design speed is related to the posted speed
which represents the 8Sn percentile of the
design speed, that is the value at which 15%of
vehicles are expected to exceed the design
speed. Refer to Section 1.4 for posted speeds.
The road alignment shall be designed so as to
ensure that standards of alignment, visibility
and superelevation are consistent with the
selected design speed. This choice will
essentially be dependent on the provision of the
highway and its location, i.e. single or dual
carriageway or whether in a rural or urban area.
The visibility criteria are dealt with in Section 2
Sight Distance.
The design speed for various road
classifications are shown in Table 1.1. The
road classifications are defined in the front of
this manual, refer to Road System in Qatar.
The selection of design speed should be
approved by the Director of Civil Engineering
Department. Refer to Clause 1.8 and 1.9 for
January 1997
Class
Reference
Type of Highway
Design
Speed
(kph)
PI
P2
Primaw Routes
Rural
Urban
140
120
S1
S2
Secondarv Routes
Rural Distributors
Urban Distributors
140
100
Tertiarv Routes
Rural Local Road
Local Distributor
Major /Minor Access
Service Roads
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
Table 1 .I
100
100
70
60
60
Design Speed for Various

Road Classifications.
Design speeds for Special Roads (Class

Reference SR1 and SR2) require special
consideration and should be agreed with the
Director of Civil Engineering.
All reference to speed in-thismanual should be
taken as the design speed unless noted
otherwise.
1.2
DESIGN
SPEED
PARAMETERS
RELATED
The driver will vary his speed according to hib

impression of the road alignment and layout.
Table 1.2 details the main design speed related
parameters which are dealt with in greater
depth in their respective clauses in this manual.
Posted Speed
Clause 1.4
Stopping Sight
Clause 2.2
Table 2.2
Horizontal
Vertical Curvature
Clause 3.2
. Clause 4.3
Table 4.4.3
Traffic Calming
1 Clause 1.9
Table 1.2 Design Speed Related Parameters
Page 111
1.3
SELECTION OF DESIGN SPEED
The designer must select the appropriate

design speed based on his knowledge of the
class of highway planned, the character of
terrain, development density, traffic volumes
and economic considerations. Generally for
Qatar the design speed is selected using Table
1.1.
Design speeds shall also be selected with

reference to the posted speed limit envisaged
or that which is already in place for the road and
the Road Network Plan. An allowance shall be
made for a margin of safety for vehicles which
will travel in excess of the speed limit. Refer to
Section 1.4 below.
1.4
Posted Speed.is the mandatory speed limit

applied to a road. The speed limit is displayed
on the roadside and is enforceable. The posted
speed limits to be implemented in 'relation to
design speed are shown in Table 1.3 below.
Desi~;~E;eed
i0!
70
60'
1;
Speed
(kph)
Posted
50 or less'
Special consideration required for

lower class roads, see Clause 1.9
Table 1.3
Relationship between Design

Speed and Posted Speed
The above table allows for a margin of safety

appropriate to the selected design speed.
1.5
CHANGEOVER OF DESIGN SPEED
Transitions between roads (or sections of a

road) with different design speeds shall be
carefully implemented so as not to present the
driver with an abrupt change in standards. For
details of signing the speed reduction refer to
the Qatar Traffic Manual.
Where an alignment changes from a higher to
the next lower design speed, relaxations below
the desirable minimum radius and desirable
minimum stopping sight distance shall not be
used at the start of the lower design speed
section.
January 1997
1.6
CONNECTION TO EXISTING ROADS
Care shall be taken where an improved section

of road rejoins an existing road. The existing
standard of curvature and sight distance at the
interface shall be subject to the same
restrictions as would be relevant for the design
speed of the improvement.
Careful
consideration shall also be given for roads
passing between rural and urban areas, posted
speed step down and also dual to single
carriageways, although this latter case should
be limited to junction locations only.
In all cases it is important to emphasise the
need for clear signing at any location where
there is a speed reduction.
1.7
POSTED SPEED .
SECTION 1
SELECTION
VALUES
OF
PARAMETER
normal^.^
Designers should
aim to achieve the
desirable minimum values for stopping sight
distance, horizontal curvature and vertical crest
curvature. For sag curves, designers should
normally aim to achieve at least minimum
values.
1.8
RELAXATIONS AND DEPARTURES
Generally for Qatar the design speed is

In certain
selected using Table 1 .I.
circumstances it may be uneconomic to design
an alignment to the prescribed standards and
consequently a reduced standard may be used.
This is termed a "relaxation". In situations of
extreme difficulty where application of a
relaxation does not overcome the difficulty, it
may be possible to overcome them by adoption
of departures from standard.
Any such
relaxations or departures must be agreed in
writing with the Director of Civil Engineering.
Table 1.4 shows the allowable relaxation of
design speed for the different classes of roads
in Qatar.
The road classifications for Qatar and Doha are
described in the front of this manual. The
selection of a design speed is particularly
difficult for some of the roads in the older areas
of the city. These areas are not so easily
classified into land use and factors such as
access and parking need to be assessed in
determining the design speed.
Other
considerations are the number and spacing of
junctions on a particular section 'of road.
Relaxations and departures provide a means of
accommodating these areas.
Page 112
L.
'4.
Class
Reference
Type of Highway
Design
Speed (kph)
PI
P2
Primarv Routes
Rural
Urban
S1
S2
Secondarv Routes
Rural Distributors
Urban Distributors
140-120
100
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
Tertiaw Routes
Rural local Road
LocalDistributor
Major Access
Service Roads
100
100-70
80-60
60-50
60-30
Table 1.4
,t ,.
- .
140-120
120-100
Design Speeds for Various

Road Classifications.
Departures below minimum values may be

considered when cost or environmental savings
are considered to be significant, except in the
following circumstances:
., :
.. .. . . . .. .
SECTION 1
Traffic calming measures may be introduced on

existing roads to reduce traffic speed. This is
achievable by the use of narrow - lanes,
chicanes, width or height restrictions, speed
bumps or different textures or colours of
pavement.
Care shall be taken to ensure that traffic
calming .measures, being introduced do not
impede emergency service vehicles.
A typical speed bump may be 3.5m in length
with its profile reaching a maximum of 100mm.
'They should ideally be located at 100m
intervals. Much shorter intervals result in
inconvenience to the residents, whereas for
much longer intervals the overall speed control
is lost. For safety reasons speed bumps should
not be located near junctions or sharp bends.
For further details on traffic calming measures,

refer to the Qatar Traffic Manual.
immediately following an overtaking

section on single carriageway roads.
on the immediate approach to a
junction, other. than a roundabout,
where frequent turning traffic will occur.
1.9
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Special consideration is required for residential

and commercial areas.
The posted speed in residential areas is 50kph
for local roads and lower for access roads.
Lower speeds may be posted in special
circumstances such as residential cul-de-sacs
or in industrial areas where the -facilities are
designed to distribute vehicles to their ;firial
destination.. . .
The lower design speeds applied in residential
and urban areas do not require superelevation
on bends or other special dynamic related
considerations.
One-way roads may be used for local and
access roads usually in the form of discreet
loops.
One-way roads should be designed so as not to
encourage speeding. This may be achieved by
the use of narrow lanes and avoiding long
straight sections of road, and by implementing
any one or more of the traffic calming measures
listed below.
January 1997
Page 113
SECTION 2
SECTION 2 SIGHT DISTANCE
2.1
GENERAL
Sight distance is the continuous length of road

ahead, visible to the driver, assuming adequate
light, visual acuity and clear atmospheric
conditions. The arrangement of geometric
elements is crucial to ensure adequate sight
distance exists for safe and efficient operation.
There are two separate sight distances to be
considered:
a
Stopping Sight Distance (for all roads)
Full Overtaking Sight. Distance (for

single carriageways only)
Safe stopping distance must be provided

continuously on all highways. Safe overtaking
distance is applicable only on two-lane
highways, primarily in rural or outlying urban
areas.
2.2
STOPPING SIGHT DISTANCE
Stopping Sight Distance (SSD) is the distance

required by the driver of a vehicle travelling at a
given speed to bring his vehicle to a stop after
an object on the carriageway becomes visible.
SSD has three components; perception time,
reaction time and braking time. A combined
driver perception and reaction time of two
seconds has been allowed for in Table 2.1.
Design
Speed (kph)
Stopping
Sight Distance (m)
140
120
100
80
70
60
50
40
350
295
215
160
120
90
70
60
Table 2.1
Figure 2.1
Measurementof Stopping Sight

Distance (SSD)
2.3 FULL OVERTAKING SIGHT DISTANCE
Full Overtaking Sight Distance (FOSD) is the

minimum sight distance that must be available
to enable the driver of one vehicle to pass
another vehicle safely and comfortably, without
interfering with the speed of an oncoming
vehicle travelling at the design speed. In the
interests of safety and service, it is important to
ensure sufficient visibility for overtaking on as
much of the road as possible. FOSD influences
the average speed of the traffic especially when
a highway is near operating capacity.
Table 2.2 shows for each design speed the
FOSD required for overtakingvehicles using the
opposing traffic lane on single carriageway
roads. These are minimum values and
wherever possible, larger values should be
used.
Design Speed
(kph)
Full Overtaking
Sight Distance (rn)
Stopping Sight Distance SSD
Stopping Sight Distance is measured from a

driver's eye height of between 1.05 and 2.00m
to an object height of between 0.26 and 2.00 m,
above the road surface, refer Figure 2.1. It
shall be checked in both the horizontal and
vertical plane between two points in the centre
of the lanes on the inside of the curve (for each
lane in the case of dual carriageways).
January 1997
b) Horizontal Plane
Table 2.2
Full Overtaking Sight Distance

FOSD
FOSD shall be measured from a driver's eye

point between 1.05m and 2.00m above the
centre of the carnageway (for each lane in the
case of dual carriageways) as shown in Figure
2.2 and shall be checked in both the horizontal
and vertical planes.
Page 2/1
'
+*
w -
FOSD is considerably greater than SSD and

can normally only be economically provided in
relatively flat terrain where the combination of
horizontal and vertical alignment allows the
design of a flat and relatively straight road
alignment.
2.6
.. -
Measurement
of
Full
Overtaking Sight' Distance
(FOSD)
Where passible on a single carriageway it is

advisable to design sectior~sof road specifically
for overtaking. This will reduce the frequency of
serious accidents occurring on 'roads with
continuous large radius curves.
2.4
OBSTRUCTIONS
DISTANCE
central-offset required with varying horizontal

curvature, in order to maintain the design speed
related stopping sight distances. It can be seen
that extensive widening of verges and
structures, or medians with safety fence or
safety barriers, would be required to maintain
stopping sight distances on horizontal radii
below the minimum.
Figure 2.4 shows the maximum central offset
required with varying horizontal curvature, in
order to maintain the design speed related full
overtaking sight distance. It can be seen that
the higher requirements o f FOSD result in
extensive widening of verges for all but
relatively straight sections of road.
Envelope of visibility
Figure 2.2
TO
SECTION 2
SIGHT
It is vital that drivers on an access or minor road

should have adequate visibility on the approach
to a junction with a major road. The driver
should have sufficient visibility to judge when to
join the main carriageway. Furthermore, it is
important for the driver on the major road to be
aware of the vehicle approaching the junction
on the minor road.
The required visibility criteria for junctions is
given in Section 6 Junctions.
The required visibility criteria should also be
applied to private accesses and driveways
leading onto access roads.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no

substantial fixed objects obstruct the sightlines
including road furniture, bridge piers, buildings,
signs and cut slopes. However, isolated slim
objects such as lamp columns, sign supports, or
other slim objects of width 550mm or under can
be ignored.
Similarly, the effect of short
intermittent obstructions, such as bridge
parapets of minor roads under, can be ignored.
Lay-bys or parking lanes should, wherever
possible, be sited on straights or on the outside
of curves, where stationary vehicles will not
obstruct sightlines.
The visibility required on bends is shown in

Table 2.3 below.
Sigh,tlines should be checked where safety

fencing is installed.
Where there is likely to be increased pedestrian

traffic, care must be taken to ensure that
visibility is not impaired by pedestrians. This
could occur at the following residential and
commercial locations :
2.5
EFFECT OF HORIZONTAL CURVES

ON SIGHT DISTANCE
When a road is in a cutting or at bridge

crossings it will be necessary to widen verges
or increase bridge clearances to ensure that the
appropriate stopping sight distance is not
obstructed. Figure 2.3 shows the maximum
January 1997
Type of Road
Local Roads
Access Roads
Table 2.3
Visibility distance (m)

Absolute
Minimum
Desirable
Minimum
50
30
70
50
Required Visibility on Bends for

Residential Roads.
Pedestrian crossing points

Sikkas and alley-ways
Schools
Page 2f2
..
Shopping areas
Sports venues
SECTION 2
Cinemas
BUSstops
In existing residential or commercial

developments, it is important to review the
visibility on 90 degree bends. Where it is not
possible to achieve the required visibility,
consideration should be given to using a larger
radius or even locating a junction on the bend.
In new developmentswhere it is not possible to
avoid the use of a 90 degree bend, the following
should be considered:
... .
a
Avoid building6n corner plots
Use low landscaping
a
,
Avoid placing street furniture and

signing within the visibility splay.
Care should also be taken when locating

'parking areas as parked cars will impede
visibility at tight bends, junctions and driveway
locations. Refer to Section 5 for further details
on parking.
January 1997
Page 213
..
':
The values shown am maxima and apply
where SSD 3 cunre length. Land for
vblbmty should be checked from the plans.
CENTRAL
OFFSET
Xm
RADIUS Rm
\ '
Figure 2.4
January 1997
SECTION 2
Verge Widening for Full Overtaking Sight Distance
..
,
. Page 215
SECTION 3
SECTION 3 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT

3.1
provide adequate superelevation

crossover between the curves.
GENERAL
d)
Broken-back curves consist of two

curves in the same direction connected
with a short straight and should not be
used. This type of curve is unexpected
by drivers and is not pleasing in
appearance. An attempt should be
made to adopt one simple curve or
even a compound curve.
e)
~onzontalalignment and its associated

design speed should be consistent with
other design features and topography.
Co-ordination with vertical alignment is
discussed in Section 4.5.
f)
On dual roads, consideration may be

given to independent horizontal and
vertical
alignments
for
each
carriageway.
3.2
MINIMUM CURVATURE
The most important consideration in determining

the horizontal alignment of a road is the
provision of safe and continuous operation at a
uniform design speed for substantial lengths of
road way. The major aspects influencing the
horizontal alignment are; safety, design speed,
topography, costs, vertical alignment and road
classification.
All of these factors must be balanced to produce
an alignment that is safe, economical, and in
keeping with the natural contour of the land and
the adjacent land use. Poor design will result in
lower speeds and a reduction in the capacity of
the road and safety.
The design of a road on straight alignment
requires consideration of grades, sight distance,
pavement, reservation cross section, etc. When
horizontal curves are introduced; additional
items including radii, transition lengths,
pavement widening and superelevation require
special attention.
The minimum curvature without the need for

adverse camber, superelevation or transitions
is shown in Table 3.1 below.
In addition to the specific guidance given in this

section, there are a number of general
considerations which are important in producing
a safe and economic design. These practices,
as outlined below, are particularly applicable to
high speed situations.
a)
b)
c)
Flatter curves for a certain design speed

should be, used where possible,
retaining the most conservative
standards as possible for the most
critical conditions.
Compound curves consist of two or
more consecutive curve alignments.
They should be used with caution and
should be avoided where conditions
permit the use of a simple curve.
Where compound curves are used, the
radius of the flatter curve should not be
more than 50 percent greater than the
radius of the sharper curve for rural and
urban conditions. On this basis, a
several step compound curve may be
used as a form of transition to sharp
curves or a spiral, transitioning from one
radius to the next. This condition can
be relaxed for lower speeds at junctions
and roundabouts.
Reverse curves on high speed roads
should include an intervening tangent or
transition section of sufficient length to
January 1997
Design
Speed
(kph)
Minimum Radius
without Adverse
Camber,
Superelevation or
Transitions
(m)
140
120
100
80
70
60
50
3800
2880
2040
1300
1020
720
510
Table 3.1 Minimum Radii without transitions

Where the radius of curvature is less than the
value indicated in Table 3.1, transition curves
should be used.
-
3.3
TRANSITION CURVES
.. .
'The adopted form of transition between a

straight and a horizontal curve is a clothoid,
also known as transition curve. It provides a
useful and logical section of the alignment for
the development of superelevation and is the
most common method adopted.
Where it is not possible to adhere to the values
of curvature given in Table 3.1, a transition
curve should be used.
Page 311
QATAR HIGHWAY DESlGN MANUAL
. . . .
The length of transition depends on the radius of

the circular curve and the design speed. The
basic length of the transition is given by the
formula:
L=
V=
9=
Where:
length of transition (m)

design speed (kph)
rate of increase of
centripetal acceleration
(rn/sec3)
radius of curve (m)
R=
Normally, q should not exceed 0.3 mfsec3.

However, in particularly onerous cases, it may
be necessary to increase the value up to 0.6
mfsec3. On bends the length of transition should
normally be limited to J(24FI) metres. For quick
reference some common transition lengths are
given in Table 3.2.
The elements for circular and transition curves
are shown in Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2.
Superelevation or elimination of adverse camber
shall generally be applied on or within the length
of the transition curve from the arc end. The
basic transition appropriate to the design speed
however will often result in insufficient transition
length to accommodate superelevation turnover,
and it will therefore be necessary to provide
longer transitions to match the superelevation
.
design.
Transitions are not necessary in urban low
speed areas such as junctions and service
roads. !
Radius
Design Speed (kph)'
2400
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000 ,
800
600
400
200
140
120
82
89
98
109
122
140
163'
196'
51
56
62
69
88
103
123'
154'
100
80
70
60
4"
..I
'SECTION 3
CAMBER AND SUPERELEVATION
3.4
On sections of road with radii greater than that

shown in Table 3.1 for the given design speed,
the crossfall or camber should be 2% from the
centre of single carriageways, or from the
central median of dual carriageways to the
outer channels. At junctions other than
roundabouts, the cross-section of the major
road shall be retained across the junction, and
the side road graded into the channel line of the
major road. On horizontal curves, adverse
camber shall be replaced by favourable
crossfall of 2% when the radius for the given
design speed is less than that shown in Table
3.1. However, it may be necessary to eliminate
adverse camber on larger radii for aesthetic or
drainage reasons. Provision of camber and
superelevation in low speed areas such as
commercial or residential areas has a tendency
to encourage drivers to drive faster and should
be avoided. Refer to Clause 3.8 for special
considerations relating to low speed areas.
The following superelevation and minimum
curves are recommended (Table 3.3).
Minimum Radius (m) for
Desig
n
Speed
(kph)
(a)
Normal
Camber
(b)
Adverse
Camber
EUrninated
(c) Superelevation
3.5%
5%
7%
140
3800
1020
2880
2040
1300
120
2880
2040
720
1020
1300
2040
100
1300
510
1020
720
80
1300
1020
360
720
510
70
1020
720
255
510
360
720
60
180
510
255
360
50
510
360
127
255
180
7% may be only used at special locations and must have th
permission of the Director of Civil Engineering Department prior t
its use.
Table 3.3
Minimum Radii with Camber

and Superelevation
.
36
On radii less than those shown in Table 3.1

superelevation shall be provided, such that:
40
45
51
59
71
89
119
30
37
46
61
91
24
31
41
61
122
26
39
77
' Refs Table 3.3 for restricted use of superelevation

Table 3.2 Basic Transition Lengths (m)
January 1997
50
22
45
Where:
S = Superelevation (%)
V= Design Speed (kph)
R = .Radius of Curve (m)
Page 312
SECTION 3
Superelevation shall not exceed 5%. Only in

special circumstances and with prior permission
'from the Director of Civil Engineering
Department will superelevation greater than 5%
be considered. Table 3.4 gives examples of
si~perelevationfor selected design speeds and
radii.
Radius
Design Speed (kph)
(m)
140
120
2.88
3.15
3.47
3.85
4.33
4.95
5.78'
6.93'
3.15
2.31
2.56
2.83
3.18
3.64
4.24
5.09'
6.36'
100
2.21
2.53
2.95
3.54
4.42
5.89'
80
70
2.26
2.83
3.77
5.66'
2.17
2.89
4.33
60
90
2.12
3.18
6.63'
2.21
4.42
Circumstances see abwe
Table 3.4 Superelevation of curves (%)

Progressive superelevation or removal of
adverse camber shall be achieved over or within
the length of the transition curve from the arc
end. On existing roads without transitions,
between % and 2h of the cant shall be
introduced on the approach straight and the
remainder at the beginning of the curve.
When expanded, this formula provides the

equation for the vertical reverse curve to be
used for the superelevation curve. This reverse
curve is shown in Figure 3.3
In some difficult areas, even the above
requirements can lead to drainage problems,
eg. where the superelevation is applied against
the longitudinal gradient. It may be necessary
to either modify the horizontal alignment to
move the superelevation area, increase the
variation in grade of the edge profile, or apply a
rolling crown. Areas susceptible to such
drainage problems should be identified at an
early stage in the design process, before the
horizontal alignment is fixed.
rJ+1.
w
Y = ~ s X ' A ' -2 sX'A'

where Y = offset
S = maximum offset
X = distance from start of application
L = length of application
Figure 3.3
Superelevation shall not be introduced, nor
adverse camber removed, so gradually as to
create large, almost flat areas of carriageway, to
cause driver discomfort or to kink the edges of
the carriageway. A satisfactory appearance can
usually be achieved by ensuring that the
camageway edge profile does not vary in grade
by more than about 0.5% from the line about
which the carriageway is pivoted, and by ample
smoothing of all changes in edge profile. It is
recommended to ensure that a minimum
longitudinal gradient of at least 0.5% is
maintained wherever superelevation is to be
applied or reversed. The distance to satisfy this
constraint is given by the equation:
keverse Curve Formula
Figure 3.4 shows typical methods of developing

superelevation by rotating about the edges and
the centre of the road. The designer should use
the most appropriate method to suit the
situation. For dual carriageways, greater
consideration of topography, cut and fill,
catchment and median drainage is required.
Where:
G=
S=
L=
rate of change of gradient

(0.5%)
change
in
channel
superelevation relative to the
line
about
which
the
carriageway is pivoted (m)
length
required
to
accommodate the change in
superelevation (m)
January 1997
- - Page 313
.
.
.
.. * w
.' SECTlON 3
Elements:
P I = Point of Tangent Intersection
BCC = Beginning of Clrcuiar Curve
ECC = E n d o f Clrcular Curve
AC = Deflectlon Angle o f Circular Curve
R
= Radius of Circular Curve
T
=Tangent
L C = Length of Curve
Clrcular Curve
Figure 3.1, Circular Curve Elements
Elements:
PI
= Polnt of Tangent Intersection
BTC = Beginning of Tnnsitlon Cunre
BCC = Beginning of Clrcuhr Cunre
ECC = End of Circular Curve
ETC = End of Transition Curve
A
= Total Deflectlon Angle
AT = Deflection Angle of Transition Cunre
bc = Deflectbn Angle of Clrcular Cunre
R
Radius of Circular Cunre
M T = Main Tangent
T K =ShortTangentofTransitionCuwe
TL = Long Tangent of Tranrltion Cunre
X M = Abscbsa of the Center of Radlus Polnt
A R = Circular Cunre Offset
X
= Abscissa of BCC or ECC
= Ordinate of B.CC or ECC
Y
L T = Length of Transition Cuwe
L c = Length of Clrculer Curve
Symmetrical Form of Transition to Clrcular Cunre
Figure 3.2 Transition and Circular Curve Elements
January 1997
Page 314
QATAR HIG~WAYDESIGN MANUAL. . . - .
'
SECTION 3
O l t s g e e d g ~ o f - t r a ~ e l l eway
d
---
4,
-,,~,
l n ~
d ~ e t ~d v gf l eedway
~
a q Profile control
\
Travelled way revolved about centreline
Tangent
Runout
Superelevation runoff
o
0 0
0 0
m w
IW
fde edgz of-traxeiled way
o
0
Im
Slope 1:400
Normal
crown -L.-
- = -I -
--D
Inside edge
Profile control
Travelled way revolved about inside edge

Tangent- Runout
Superelevation runoff
L,
2
m 'Li
Normal
crown
---- - - - a
0 0
0 0
----Normal c j r o f i l e grade
_
-Outside g g e of travelled way

-
----
lnslde edge of travelled way
Outside edge
1Profile control
Travelled way revolved about outside edge
Notes:
A = Normal crown
B = Level hlgh side normal crown low side
C = Superelevation at normal crown rate
D = Full superelevation
Figure 3.4 Development of Superelevation
......
. .,
" . . . . . . - . . . - . . * . . - . - " . L .
January 1997
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . .
. .
Page 315

. .. - .
.. cAs,-7- 'SECTION 3
. .
*.'
. .
WIDENING ON CURVES
3.5
The rear wheels of vehicles do not follow the

front wheels exactly on horizontal curves, and it
is more difficult to steer the vehicle on curves.
For these reasons it is recommended to
increase travelled way widths on curves.
Widening is required for carriageways of less
than standard width and for low radius curves-of
standard width to allow for the swept path of
long vehicles.
For carriageways of standard width, (3.65m.
7.3m and 11.0m for 1, 2 and 3 lanes
respectively) an increase of 0.3m shall be
allowed when the radius is between 90m and
150m. Two lane roads of width greater than
7.9m require no additional widening. Widening
of road widths when the radii is less than 90m is
covered in Section 6 Junction Design.
For carriageways less than the standard width,
widening shall be as shown in Table,3.5.
Radius
Lane Width
Additional
WMth(m)
Width
Radlw less than 90m refer to

Section 6
Standard
Width
Radius between 90m and

1SOm
0.3
Standard
Width
Radius greater than 150m
None
Less than
Standard
Width
Radius less than 90m refer to

Sectlon 6
Less than
Standard
Width

1SOm subject to maximum
carriageway widths d 7.9m
and 11.9m (for 2 and 3 lanes
respectively)
0.6
Less than
Standard
Width

300m subject to maximum
carriagewaywidths of 7.3m
and 11.Om (for 2 and 3 lanes
respectively)
0.5
Less than
Standard
WMth

400m subject to maximum
carriageway widths of 7.3m
and 11.Om (for 2 and 3 lanes
mpecthfely)
0.3
Standard
Table 3.5
Application of Additional Lane

Width
January.1997
rr
. . Page
.
316
. .
Avoid reserve curve
Transition curve may be widened on inside and outside
Simple curve may be widened on inside only
--,.
Figure 3.5 Widening of Pavement on Curves

January1997
Page 3/1

.
. 3.6
HARMONlSlNG THE ALIGNMENT
The choice and arrangement of the linear

elements are crucial factors in ensuring that the
road will look right in its surroundings and will
be pleasing to the driver of the vehicle. The
design shall also provide a safe route, with the
necessary stopping sight distances.
The aim of flowing alignment is to combine the
various components in a manner which results
in the road being experienced by the road user
as a free-flowing, harmonious form without
visual discontinuities. Such a design results in
better integration of the road into the landscape
and helps to make 'the road a construction
which is visually pleasing from the viewpoint
both of its users and those outside the road
reservation.
.. The principles df flowing alignment are closely
linked with the way in which the driver sees the
road line and in particular the shape of the road
edges.
. . . . . .
. . . .
SECTION 3
tJ,
....
viewpoint is at the same distance from the start

of the curve then an improvement is not
achieved, in fact the kink will appear to be
rather more pronounced.
Figure 3.7
Improved View with Larger

Radius
Figure 3.6 Example of Kink
Even with a large radius curve, it is not possible

to avoid the illusion of a sharp change in
direction if the approach straights are
sufficiently long, refer Figure 3.8. The best
results are likely to be achieved with the flowing
alignment when straights can be dispensed
with. This of course is not always possible or in
fact desirable. For example, in roads which are
not dual carriageways, the sight lines on
stretches of road where overtaking is permitted
must be based on passing sight distance and
not stopping sight distance. Straight lengths
may then be required to achieve these sight
distances. Also, it should be borne in mind that
such effects will not necessarily be significant in
the total view for any particular case. Each
design should be considered in its landscape
context. This is true of many aspects of internal
harmony, although the greater the design
speed, the less the external features modify the
internal views. This occurs because vegetation
and buildings are further back from the road
edge, the carriageways are wider, sight lines
longer and the roadworks generally constructed
to a larger scale.
In all cases, when additional width is required,

the extra width should be applied uniformly
along the transition curve. . Where existing
alignments are to be improved the widening
should take place on the inside of curves. This
is shown in Figure 3.5.
Abrupt changes in direction can be

unsatisfactory on access roads as well as
highways. In Figure 3.9 the straights have been
joined without the use of a horizontal cunre.
The appearance is quite different when a
horizontal curve is added, refer Figure 3.10.
It is advisable to avoid small changes in

direction in a flowing alignment. These are
likely to appear unsatisfactory from the vehicle.
Furthermore, small transverse displacements
can present a confusing prospect for the driver.
) fl
Straight
cuwe
shofl
Straight
When two straights are connected, the use of a

short horizontal curve is likely to cause the
appearance of a kink, refer Figure 3.6. In such
cases the impression can be improved by
employing a larger radius, but an improvement
orlly results provided the views being compared
are taken from the same distance from the
vertex of the curve, refer Figure 3.7. If the
January 1997,
.........
. .
Page 318
.*
QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL '
# r C
SECTION 3
...
Figure 3.8 .Illusion of a Sharp Bend with Long Straights
Figure 3.9 Angular Geometry
January 1997
~ i ~ u3.10
re
Curved Geometry
Page 319
Short straight sections of road should not be

interposed between horizontal curves of
opposite sense since the appearance of a kink
is likely to result, refer Figure 3.1 1. A possible
solution is the use of a pair of transition curves
refer Figure 3.12. When designing for slower
speeds or in the case of very large radii it may
be feasible to join the two curves directly as
shown in Figure 3.1 3. This could be done with
care since here also an impression of lack of
t
flow may result.
x
_
_
...
.. .
~~rcu~ar'
curve
Circular
curve
Straight
Figure 3.1 1 Short Straight Between curves
. . - SECTION 3
Similarly, in the case of two subsequent curves

in the same direction, the use of an intermediate
short straight, as shown in Figure 3.14, is likely
to produce an unsatisfactory visual effect. Here
there may be the possibility of replacing the two
curves and the straight with one circular curve,
refer Figure 3.15. Another possibility may be to
interpose one transition curve between the two
radii, refer Figure 3.1 6.
A series of reverse curves is likely to produce a
flowing alignment which is pleasing to the eye
and comfortable for the driver. This type of line
is ideal for integrating a route into an undulating
landscape.
Figure 3.17 summarises alignments to be
avoided and those to be attained where
possible.
3.7
HORIZONTAL CLEARANCES
Generally, no structures apart from roadside

furniture, such as signs and lighting columns,
are allowed to fall within the road resetvations.
The positioning of signs and other street
furniture should be in accordance with the Qatar
Traffic Manual. If it is not possible to position
structures outside the reservation, consideration
should be given to providing a safety barrier or
safety cushions, refer clauses 5.15 and 5.16
respectively. Setback of crash barriers is dealt
with in the clause referenced previously.
Structures should not be placed within 1.2m of

the edge of the hard shoulder, or 0.6m of a
kerbed road.
Clrcular
CU
we
Circular
Transltlon Transition
CUIW
It is important to ensure that sight distance is

not impaired, especially at junction and
driveway locations. Refer to Section 2 Sight
Distance.
Figure 3.1 2 Back to Back Transitions
C Ircu la r
curve
.Circular
CUTVB
Figure 3.13 Back to Back Circular Curves
January 1997
Page 311 0
QATAR H ~ G ~ W ADESIGN
YMANUAL
Clrcular
..
..
'
. .
'
SECTION 3
.
Circular
Figure 3.14 Two'SubsequentCurves in the Same ~irectiorr
[-\
Circular curve
Figure 3.16
~ i ~ u3.15
r e single Circular Curve
Transition
Circular
Single Transition Curve

Between Two Curves
To be avoided
1 Small change of direction

. . ..
..
2 Short horizontal curve between two straights

3 Short straights between horizontal curves of
opposite sense
4 Short straight between horizontal curves of

the same sense
5 Out of balance alignment

.
To be attained
1 Well-balanced alignment
2 Use of curves rather than straights where
feasible
Figure 3.1 7 Summary of Alignments to be avoided and those to be attained

.
. . .
January 1997
-.
.. . .
..
..
Page 3111

3.8
Residential roads serve or give access to

private dwellings'or properties. They should be
designed to serve the needs of the residents
and at the same time discourage through traffic
by ensuring that the roads are not used as a
short cut.
Case 1
Minimum recommended centre line radius

for local roads (TR3) is 130m and for
access roads (TR4) is 55rn
Case 2
Generally the design of roads in residential

areas and local street systems should consider
the following:
a
Local streets should be designed to

rninimise through traffic movements.
Street patterns should
excessive vehicle travel.
a
.*
Traffic generators within residential

areas such as schools, masques or
shopping
facilities
should
be
considered in the overall design.
The local street system should be

designed for a relatively uniform low
volume of traffic.
Local streets should be designed to

discourage excessive speeds.
Pedestrian - vehicular conflict should

be rninimised.
Parking requirements should be

provided without reducing visibility
requirements or the safe operation of
the road.
There should be a minimum of

intersections.
Local streets should be related to

topography from the standpoint of
drainage, economics and amenities.
The speeds on residential roads are

considerably lower than major, secondary and
primary roads. As the dynamic element is not
so critical, it is not normal to implement
transitions as part of the horizontal alignment,
nor to apply superelevation to a curve.
Normal 2% crossfall applied across the

full section, falling from the outer kerb
towards the inner kerb
for local roads (TR3) is 1OOm and for
access roads (TR4) is 45m
Case 3
minimise
The lo&l circulation should not have to

rely on extensive traffic regulations or
signs in order to function properly.
Standard cross section, carriageway falls

from centre-line at nominal 2%. To
continue this cross-section around a
cunre would introduce adverse camber.
4% crossfall applied across the full

section, falling from the outer kerb
towards the inner kerb

for local roads (TR3) is 90m and for
access roads (TR4) is 40m
Table 3.6
Possible Road Sections at

Bends
Table 3.6 identifies three possible road sections

at bends.
The introduction of curves to residential roads is
an effective form of speed control. However
bends of smaller radius than those given in
Table 3.6 exaggerate this effect and with
particularly sev,ere bends, induce the sharp
brakingfaccelerationbehaviour which has been
identified as undesirable.
In short cul-de-sac or loops, such as 60m or
less in length, where speeds are low the
desirable minimum inner kerb radius is 15m
with an absolute minimum of 1Om.
The minimum radii to be provided at junctions is
discussed in Section 6 Junction Design.
The typical driveway should be designed for
passenger-car operation only. For a 90 degree
turn, an inside radius of 5m and an outside
swept path of a 9m radius will comfortably
accommodate most drivers in all passenger
cars. Temporary encroachment on the wrong
side of a residential street while entering a
private driveway is generally considered
allowable. For higher traffic volumes expected
at the driveways of school or apartment car
parks, increased driveway widths are
recommended.
The visibility requirements for bends on

residential roads is detailed-inSection 2.
January 1997
- .
Page 3M2

SECTION 4 VERTICAL ALlGNMENT
GENERAL CONTROLS
4.1
Vertical alignment consists of a series of

gradients connected by vertical curves. It is
controlled by safety, topography, highway class,
design
speed,
horizontal
alignment,
construction costs, adjacent development,
drainage, vehicular characteristics and
aesthetics. The vertical alignment is usually
referred to as the profile.
A smooth prbfile with gradual changes,
consistent with the class of highway and the
character of the terrain, is preferable to a
vertical alignment with numerous sharp breaks
and short lengths of gradient.
A "roller coasternor "hidden dip" type of profile
should be avoided. A smoothly rolling profile,
rather than a straight profile can often result in
economy of construction, without sacrificing
operating'characteristics and aesthetics.
As the driver progresses along the profile with
increasing chainage, an increasing gradient is
denoted', as being positive (+ve) and a
decreasing gradient is denoted as being
negative (we).
A broken-back profile (two vertical curves in the
same direction separated by a short section of
tangent grade) is not desirable, particularly i n
sags where a full view of the profile is possible.
Where an' at-grade intersection occurs on a
highway with' moderate to steep grades, the
gradient through the intersection shall be
reduced if possible. This is beneficial for
vehicles making turns and stops, and serves to
reduce potential hazards.
A superelevation runoff occurring on a vertical
curve requires special attention in order to
ensure that the required minimum vertical
curvature is maintained across the pavement.
For example, the lane profile on the opposite
side of the road from the superelevation control
line may have sharper curvature due to the
change in superelevation rate required by the
superelevation runoff. It is therefore necessary
to check both edges profiles and adjust where
necessary in order to maintain the desired
minimum vertical curvature.
In flat terrain, the elevation of the profile is often
controlled by drainage. The vertical profile must
be positioned such that adequate drainage
structures can be constructed. In areas where
the surface water is above the ground level or
the groundwater table is immediately below the
.
SECTION 4
surface, the profile shall be established so that
the low edge of the finished shoulder is at least
0.5m above the temporary water level. If the
water table is permanent then the road formation
level should be at least 1.Om above the table
due to the possibility of capillary action. In areas
of rock, if practical, the profile should be
established so that the low edge of the finished
shoulder is at least 0.3m above the rock level.
This should avoid unnecessary rock excavation.
For aesthetic reasons the length of vertical
curves should be substantially longer than the
length required for stopping sight distance.
MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM GRADES
4.2
Generally gradients should be fixed to be

consistent with the topography through which the
highway passes in order to minimise excessive
unnecessary earthworks.
The maximum
gradients for design purposes shall be as shown
in Table 4.1.
Max. Grade
Route Classification
("/.I
4
Primary Route
Secondary Route
Tertiary Routes
LocaVDistrict Distributor
MajortMinor Access
Cul de Sac
Table 4.1
6
10
10
Maximum Gradients
In residential areas, where properties lie

adjacent to the road, the desirable maximum
gradient is 3.3%. Gradients approaching "Stopn
or "Give Way" junctions should be a maximum of
+/- 2% for a minimum of 15m before the "Stop"
or "Give Way" line. Refer Figure 4.1.
4 Major Road
Minor Road
1Sm min
tZ% max grade
L
'
Figure 4.1
Vertical Alignment at T-Junction

Approach
For drainage purposes, a desirable minimum

longitudinal gradient of 0.5% on kerbed roads
shall 'normally be adopted. The absolute
minimum longitudinal gradient for kerbed roads
shall be 0.3%. In flat areas careful consideration
should be given to drainage requirements.
--
January 1997
Page 411

-. . .
The use of over edge drainage may also be
considered in conjunction with surface channels
or ditches in rural areas. Refer to Section 8 for
further details on drainage.
4.3
VERTICAL CURVES
Vertical curves shall be provided at all changes

in gradient, except at junctions and on lower
classes of roads where the arithmetic change is
less than 0.5%. The curvature shall be large
enough to provide for comfort and where
appropriate, stopping sight distances for safe
stopping at the design speed. The use of the
permitted vertical curve parameters will normally
meet the requirements of visibility. However,
stopping sight distance should always be
checked because the horizontal alignment of the
road, presence of crossfall, superelevation or
verge treatment and features such as signs and
structures adjacent to the carriageway, will affect
the interaction between vertical curvature and
visibility.
A vertical curve is a curve on the longitudinal
profile of a road which allows for a change of
gradient.
A crest (summit) curve is a vertical curve which
is convex in shape. Generally the sign of the
gradient as the driver travels up chainage,
changes from +ve to zero to -ve.
A sag (valley) curve is a vertical curve which is
concave in shape. Generally the sign of the
gradient as the driver travels up chainage,
changes from -ve to zero to +ve.
t
A K-value is a constanf'telatedto the comfort of

the driver.
Vertical cuMe lengths can be determined by
multiplying the K-values given by the algebraic
change of gradient expressed as percentage, ie
+3% grade to -2% grade indicates a grade
change of 5%.
For dual carriageways curvature shall be derived
from the appropriate K-value in Table 4.2.
Design
Speed
(kph)
Absolute Minimum
K-value
Desirable
Minimum
K-value for
Crest
Crest
Sag
230
182
100
55
30
17
10
182
100
55
30
17
10
6.5
50
37
26
22
20
13
9
140
120
100
80
70
60
50
Table 4.2
,
. , .
. .. ..
. SECTION 4
. .
For single carriageways where the horizontal

alignment has been designed to allow
overtaking, full overtaking sight distance should
not be obstructed by crests. Conversely there is
no merit in providing an overtaking crest if the
horizontal curve does not permit overtaking.
K-values for vertical curvature on single
carriageways are given in Table.4.3
There are two prime factors that affect the
choice of crest curvature, visibility and comfort.
At design speeds of 50 kph and above, a crest in
the road will restrict forward visibility to the
minimum stopping sight distance before
minimum comfort criteria are approached, and
consequently desirable minimum crest curves
are based upon visibility criteria. . This is
discussed further in Section 2 Sight Distance.
Design
Speed
(kph)
100
80
70
60
50
Table 4.3
Minimum
K-value for
Overtaking
Crest
Avoid
Crest
K-values
in this
Range
400
285
200
142
100
400 100
285 55
200-30
142-17
100-10
an
Absolute
Minimum
K-value
Crest
Sag
55
30
17
10
6.5
26
20
20
13
9
K-values
for
Carriageways
Single
Particular attention is needed on dual

carriageways to check any restriction to visibility
caused by safety fences, median kerbs, bridge
piers, etc. especially at combined horizontal and
vertical curvature.
Visibility at sag curves is usually not obstructed
unless overbridges, signs or other features are
present. For these curves, comfort criteria apply.
The maximum rate of vertical acceleration is to
be taken as 0.3m/sec*. However for design
speeds of 70 kph and below, in unlit areas,
flatter sag curves are necessary to ensure that
headlamps illuminate the road surface for at
least the required stopping sight distance. Sag
curves should normally be designed not less
than the absolute minimum K-values in Table
4.3.
Where, at crests, the sight line is across the
verge, consideration shall be given to the design
of a lower verge profile in order to allow for a
maximum overall height of landscaping of 0.5m
More generous sag curves may be required
under bridges and through underpasses etc. in
order to maintain the envelope of required sight
distances.
K-values for Dual Carriageways

-
January 1997
Page 412
QATAR HIG~WAYDESIGN MANUAL
The choice of vertical profile is fixed mainly by

the geometric standards but is also influenced by
the nature of material in the cuttings and the total
earthworks. Ideally a balance should be
achieved between cut and fill, and the
calculations should include compaction factors
for shrink and swell and allowance for suitable
and unsuitable material.
radius must be sufficiently large for the

appearance of a kink to be avoided, refer
Figures 4.2 and 4.3. Even large radii will give
the appearance of an abrupt change in direction
if the viewpoint is sufficiently far from the curve,
but this is unimportant since, at great distances,
it will not be found disturbing. Drivers do not tend
to become aware of an approaching valley curve
until they are about 500m from the start.
Due to the topography of Qatar, it is unlikely that

steep gradients would be implemented which
would require a climbing lane. However, if a
scheme including a climbing lane was to be
considered, reference should be made to the UK
Department of Transport publication, Design
Manual for Roads and Bridges, Volume 6,
Section 1, Highway Link Design (TO 9/93).
4.4
HARMONlSlNG
ALIGNMENT
THE
VERTICAL
This section should be read in conjunction with

Clause 3.6, harrnonising the horizontal alignment
and Clause 4.5, combining the horizontal and
vertical alignment.
The valley curve plays an important part in
achieving internal harmony in the alignment,
especially since it can often be viewed along its
whole length at one time. This is not normally
possible in the case of .crest curves but for this
reason particular attention must be paid to
ensuring that visual continuity is maintained.
This leads to the avoidance of short summit
curves even though they may satisfy visibility
requirements.
O radient
Figure 4.4
Tangents, especially short ones, between two
valley curves can result in an awkward looking
line, refer Figures 4.4 and 4.5.
Figure 4.5
A vertical curve is seen as a hyperbola..
Whether or not the junction of a tangent and a
vertical curve presents the appearance of a kink
depends on the curvature of the sharpest bend
of the hyperbola and its location in relation to the
end of the tangent. It is desirable that the
hyperbola does not start at the position of its,
smallest radius. In critical cases it is advisable
to examine perspective drawings of the line. An
indication of the effect of small and large radius.
vertical curves on the drivers view are shown in
Figures 4.6 and 4.7 respectively.
Gradient
curve
Figure 4.2
Gradient Valley curve Gradient

-
4:
Figure 4.3
As is the case with horizontal curves and

straights, when a valley curve is used to join two
gradients, or a gradient and a level length, the
January 1997
Figure 4.6
-
Page 413
.-...
, .-
. SECTION 4
Summit
Figure 4.7
Figure 4.1 0
A level' length of road containing a short low

summit curve can cause a visual discontinuity
since the distant length of road, diminished in
size by perspective, can be seen over the crest,
refer Figure 4.8.
. . .
When a terrace is created by a sequence of

summit and valley curves, whether or not there
are tangents between the curves, it is likely to
result in an unsatisfactory view if two summits
can be seen at the same time. An example is
shown in Figure 4.1 2.
Figure 4.1 1
Figure 4.8
..
--
Similarly the use of a reverse curve in the

longitudinal section, causing a small change in
level, can result in a visual discontinuity duelo
the road surface disappearing from view and
then reappearing. An example of the effect
when a reverse vertical curve is used in
conjunction with level straight lengths is .shownin
.Figure 4.9. A view of this type can occur with a
double reverse curve, refer Figure 4.1 0. In the
case illustrated, the line'can be improved by
increasing the length of the valley curve and
decreasing .those of the summit curves, refer
Figure 4.1 1.
The lower the terrace is placed and the shorter

its length the more disturbing it is likely to
appear, since it can be viewed from a shorter
distance.
All terraces tend to appear
unsatisfactory when seen from the top. As with
the horizontal alignment, the ideal solution for
the vertical alignment. is a series of well
modulated vertical curves proportioned so that
they avoid the problems discussed. Such a
solution can, of course, only be used when the
land form and other controlling factors make it
possible.
Figure 4.9
January 1997
Figure 4.12
Page 414
QATAR HIGHWAY. DESIGN MANUAL
Table 4.4 summarises the type of vertical

alignment to be avoided and that to be attained.
L,
..
SECTION 4
Short summit curves

between gradients
Longitudinal section
Short vailey curves
between gndiants
Figure 4.1 3
Short tangent between

summit curves
Short tangent between

valley curvas
, X
Reverse verticai curve

causing small change in
level, on r level length
or gradient
If the out of phase lengths are small this is not

likely to be significant. In fact it is probably
advantageous to have overlap. This may be
considered to contribute to the integration of the
two aspects of the line. When an overlap is
used it should normally be small in comparison
with the len.gth of the element. Yet there are
exceptions to this:' the plan and profile
combination of the type shown in Figure 4.1 4 will
probably produce awkward looking perspectives. .
In this arrangement, the horizontal curve ends at
the same point as the vertical curve begins.
'
'
1-1
r l - ' = l I
A level length or gradient

containing r low valley
curve
A level length or gradient

containing a low summit
curve
Terracing on which two
summits can be seen at
one time
Well balanced alignment
,/
Table 4.4
Use of curves rather than

straights or gradients
where feasible
Summary
of
desirable/
undesirable combinations of
vertical alignment
- .
Figure 4.14
4.5
PHASING OF HORIZONTAL AND

VERTICAL ALlGNMENT
To obtain a satisfactory alignment it is important

to integrate the vertical and horizontal aspects of
the line. In order to accomplish this, the engineer
should consider the road as a three-dimensional
unit. The elements of the horizontal and vertical
alignment should be in phase wherever possible.
In other words, the corresponding elements in
the horizontal and vertical planes should start at
approximately the same points, and end at
approximately the same points, refer Figure 4.1 3.
January3 997
If prevailing conditions prevent using longer,'

coincident curves, it is possible to achieve
significant improvement if longer overlapping
curves are implemented as shown in Figure
4.1 5.
Page 4/5
.:,..
. ..., ,
I:
. . i . ! ~*j.;:a,*SECTION4 ,..,
. .
Figure 4.15
The best results would be obtained if coordinated curves of longer radius could be used,
refer Figure 4.1 6. The following combinations of
horizontal and vertical alignment are some
additional examples of those which are likely to
result in an awkward appearance. A summary of
desirable/undesirablecombinations of alignment
is shown in Table 4.5.
Figure 4.16
Table 4.5
Summary of desirablelundesirable combinations of alignment
Figure
Notes
4.17
A short valley curve within a

horizontal curve. This is similar to the
case of a short valley curve occurring
along a strdght, but the impression of
discontinuity will probably be even
more pronounced.
I-/
A
Summll
W W
LOVO~
VmUoy
CUNO
1 .
January 1997
--
Summlt
W N O
bVd
. . : Page 416
4.18
Horhontal curve
Low summit curve within a horizontal

curve. Here too the discontinuous
appearance is liable to be even more
pronounced than with the low summit
curve on a straight.
x
e
t
4.19
Horhonbl ounm
A short vertical curve connecting

gradients in a long horizontal curve.
This arrangement is liable to result In
the
alignment.
between
illusion
tangents
ofSmall
a pronounced
are
changes
as undesirable
in
kink
direction
in the
in
ondbnt
Vtz
the vertical plane as they are in the

horizontal plane.
Ondbnt
4.20
stnlght
Horizontal
CUWO
I-
A horizontal curve foll&kinga straight

and starting on a valley curve which
follows a gradient. This combination
tends to give the horizontal curve the
appearance of a sharp bend.
Valley Curve
Omdbnt
I
---+==-
4.21
a Valley curves joined by a level length

or gradient and occurring along a
straight followed by a horizontal curve.
1e
b
l
Valley
undesirable
curvesinjoined
themselves
by a tangent
but when
are
combinedwith a horizontal curve in this
way they can produce the results
show-
Ondknt o u n e Lwml cuwo Omdknt
.January..1997
.
'.. .
I-
.,..
. . . ,..
Page 417

. ..
SECTlON 4
I
4.22
--
Valv
summn
Omdtmnt
C.W.
CUW.
nfdmnt
A summit curve followed by a valley

curve occurring along a straight
followed by a horizontal curve. A
disjointed effect is liable to result when
the beginning of a vertical curve is
hidden from the driver by an
intervening summit while the
continuation of the curve is visible In
the distance beyond.
Hokenld
4.23
Stnight
CUN~
2
-I
Vatmv
ouwm
...
4.24
Oradbnt
c
HoNonlal
Summl
aunm
A tangent length between a vertical

curve and a compound curve.
Wherever possible such a tangent a-b
should not be used. Instead the
vertical alignment should be so
arranged that the curves can be joined
directly.
A short horizontal curve within a long

valley curve. This combination can
result in the appearance of a kink.
.--
Horkontal
4.25
Horizontal
4.26
eunm
-.
-1
Hortronlal
oun. _
A short horizontalcurve occurring on

a short summit curve. This can be
dangerous since the driver is unable to
see the continuation of the curved
horizontal alignment. An even more
unsatisfactory case would be if the
horizontal curve started immediately
over the summit.
A reverse horizontal curve with the

change in cwature situated at the top
of a sharp summit curve. This also is
a dangerous arrangement since the
driver is not able to anticipate the
change in curvature.
- -
Table 4.5
January 1997
. ..
.
Summary of desirable/undesirablecombinations of alignment
..
.
.
. Page418
QATAR HIGHWAYDESIGN MANUAL
Table 4.6 shows a summary of. ,the,

combinations of horizontal and vertical
alignment to be avoided and that which is to be
attained.
Horizontal cuwe
containing a low valley
curve within its length
Horizontal curve
containing a loW summit
cuwe within its length
Short vertical curve

batwean gradients in a
horkontal cuwe
cuwe foilowing
7 aHorizontal
straight and starting
,
u)(
on a valley curve which

follows a gradient
Valley c u w e Joined by a
level length or gradlent
and occurring along a
straight followed by a
horlzontal cuwe
Summit curve followed by
a valley cuwe occurring
aiong P straight followed
by a horkontal curve
7 A tangent length between
a vertical curve and a

compound curve
Short horizontal curve

within a long valley curve
n
X
X
dllb X
w
January 1997
Short horizontal cuwe

occurring on a short
summit cuwe
Reverse horizontal curve
with the change in
curvature situated at the
top of a sharp summit
cu w e
Out of phase alignment
--\
BJ
Table 4.6
4.6
. .
SEC~ON
4
Horizontal and vertical

curves in phase (the
visual continuity can often
be improved by having
the horizontal elements
slightly leading the
vertical ones)
Where possible use threedimensionable curves and

avo. the use of straights
Use a well balanced three

dimensional alignment
Summary
of
desirable/
undesirable combinations of
horizontal
and
vertical
alignment
VERTICAL CLEARANCES
The minimum vertical clearances are specified

to prevent vehicles or their loads from coming
into contact with any structure or roadside
furniture.
The minimum clearance over the carriageway
is 5.5m. This is to be provided across all
trafficked lanes including and shoulder or edge
strips. The figure of 5.5m allows for 200mm of
pavement construction which may be applied
during the maintenance of the road.
Minimum clearance shall be provided to a.ll
structures or roadside furniture that overhangs'
the carriageway. These include any bridge or
building structure, sign gantry, overhead cables.
or suspended lighting.
Where a public utility specifies a minimum,
vertical clearance to its plant then the greater of.
the clearances must be provided for. Protective
measures may be required at overhead cable
crossings such as guardwires. Guidance may,
be sought from the Ministry of Electricity and:
Water when planning works in the vicinity of
their installations.
Where a road passing underneath a bridge ison a sag curve, the headroom given above.
shall be increased in accordance with Table
4.7. The sag radius is measured along thecarriageway over a 25m chord.
a
.
Badly balanced
arrangement
Page 419

Sag Radius
(m)
Additional
Clearance
(mm)
1000
1200
1500
2000
3000
6000
>6000
80
70
55
45
25
15
nil
. .
..
':
. ::'-:.
'-
SECnON 4
Maximum driveway gradients

properties shall be 1 in 15.
a
to
Low retaining walls/planters may be

used to assist in matching road levels
to existing plot boundaries. However,
they shall n i t be allowed present a
hazard to vehicle or pedestrian traffic.
Industrial
. ..
Table 4.7
4.7
Sag Radius Compensation
Special considerations for vertical alignment are

required in many areas, one of the greatest
concerns to the engineer in Qatar being the
flatness of many areas and subsequent surface
water drainage difficulties. Section 8 details the
recommended minimum gradients and
comments on the importance of drainage in
nearly level areas.
Below are listed a number of vertical alignment
considerations specific to certain conditions that
the engineer should be aware of:
Maximum' gradients to be 1 in 20 due

to road usage by heavy vehicles.
After long or steep down gradients,

heavy vehicles may require additional
level areas for braking distance or
emergency run-off lanes.
On long or steep up gradients, heavy

vehicles may require climbing lanes to
allow faster vehicles to pass.
Change in transverse or longitudinal

grade should not be significant so as to
cause loss of load.
Residential and Commercial

a
Need to match threshold levels in areas

of existing development
Preferred maximum slope across

housing plots is 1 in 30
Valley points where water may collect

should be kept away from residential
accesses
Road alignment should preferably be

kept below adjacent property level
Minimum length of vertical cutve should

be 30m due to construction tolerances
Vertical alignment changes where

abrupt or repetitive (such as in flat
areas) can be disguised by being made
at the horizontal bends
Levels of existing utilities require

consideration regarding the vertical
alignment of new roads
Footpath maximum longitudinalgradient

to be 1 in 10. Steps may be used to
overcome worse gradients but are not
preferred as they limit access by
wheelchairs
January 1997
Page 4110

SECTION 5 CROSS SECTIONAL ELEMENTS
5.1
ROAD RESERVATIONS
In general the different road reservations are

intended to provide drivers with adequate sight
distances and allow the public utilities sufficient
space for existing and proposed plant. Where
space for utilities is limited, 'way leaves"
outside the road reservation may be obtained
by contacting the relevant planning authority.
Figures 5.1 to 5.9 show cross sections depicting
the essential elements in typical sections for
two way single carriageways and dual
carriageways for urban and rural roads. Each
of the different elements comprising the cross
sections is discussed in detail in the following
clauses. The cross sections shown are typical
and the final layout of the reservation should be
agreed with the Director of the Civil Engineering
Department.
The recommended reservation details for rural
roads are similar to those for urban roads but
reflect the reduced access and drainage
requirements of the rural situation. Generally
for the rural situation the near side of the
carriageway would not be kerbed although flush
kerbing may be considered at certain locations.
Raised kerbing to the median of rural dual
carriageways should only be provided at
specific locations eg. bridges, U-turns. In all
cases an edge strip shall be provided between
the kerb and lane edge. Verges shall be
designed to fall away from the carriageway in
the rural situation and thus water will drain to
surrounding ground.
SECTION 5
proposed land use require carriageways to be

offset to one side then approval from the
Director of the Civil Engineering Dept must be
.
.
sought.
In the case of road centrelines being offset from
the reservation. The utilities layout shall be
revised to suit the specific road cross section
proposed, the revised utility locations to be to
the approval of the Utility Authorities.
If the engineer is unable to utilise
recommendations from the typical crosssections because of existing buildings, building
usage or land ownership problems, for example,
then advice should be sought from the Director
of Civil Engineering Department before
proceeding.
Certain special routes, such as abnormal or

exceptional load routes or. scenic routes, may
require individual reservations to satisfy their
performance criteria, eg. the Corniche. In these
cases, consultation should be sought with the
Director of Civil Engineering Department.
In many areas of existing development, road
corridor widths or alignment may be restricted
by property ownerships or old planning. In
many cases, 12m reservation widths were once
the norm. In these situations the designer must
pay particular attention to many factors
including sight distances, clearance at junctions,
utility location, reduced carriageway widths,
restricted access and road closure.
Shoulders are not normally required on rural

single carriageway roads but, generally, edge
strips would be included in the design. Edge
strips may also be considered as an alternative
to full hard shoulder construction on rural and
urban dual carriageways for economic reasons.
A standard lane width of 3.65m has been used
on all typical cross sections illustrated.
Exceptions are permitted where it is necessary
to maintain continuity with the remainder of an
existing route, and in new development areas
such as Salwa Industrial Area and the New
District of Doha.
In order to provide adequate drainage, a
standard crossfall of 2% has been applied for
carriageways and medians.
Generally the centreline of the main
carriageway shall be located on the reservation
centreline.
However, should existing or
January 1997
Page 511

..
Figure 5.1
January 1997
SECTION
5
.
'-
Typical Urban 16m Reservation
..
..
. . .
..
Page 512
QATAR HIGHWAN DESIGN MANUAL
Figure 5.2
January 1997
Typical Urban 2Om Resenration
,.
., .. ., . . ...-. - .,. I..., ... SECTION 5 :
., .
. . , -... -,..
"
"
'
Page 513
Figure 5.3
January 1997
.. .. , .-.,SECTION 5
Page 514
. ,;6ibQ18k
.- 6
QATAR H~GHWAVDESIGN MANUAL.
Figure 5.4
Typical Urban 32m Reservation (Wide Single Carriageway)

...
January 1997
-.
.-
Page 515

..
Figure 5.5
January 1997
..
SECTION 5
Typical Urban 32m Reservation (Dual Carriageway)
..
..
Page 516
..
SECTION 5
Figure 5.6
January 1997
Page 5l7
January 1997
SECTION5
Page 518
Figure 5.8
Januarjr 1997
*
1
'
I
.SECTION
5'.
Typical Rural Single Carriageway
"
Page 519

. :2- - .-'..- . -
Figure 5.9
January 1997
. SECTION 5
I - .
..
.-..
Typical Rural Dual Carriageway
Page
5/10
-

5.2
LANE WIDTHS
..
. - .
.:.
SECTION 5
The use of 4.0m lane widths may be permitted

in particular situations to maintain continuity with
the remainder of an existing route. If the length
of new road concerned is significant,
consideration should be given to adopting a tiein for economic reasons. Where an existing
road with 4.0m wide lane widths is to be
redesigned, the lane widths should be
redesigned as 3.65m wide.
Lane widths have a great influence on the

safety and comfort of driving. It has been
shown that undesirable conditions are
generated on two-lane, two-way, rural roads,
carrying moderate traffic, with road widths less
than 6.5m. Furthermore, it has been shown
that narrow widths severely affect the capacity
of a road.
,
In general, the road width to be provided

should be 7.3m, based on a lane width of
3.65m. This provides adequate clearance
between passing commercial vehicles. In
certain circumstances it may be necessary to
increase the road width to 11.3m. This may be
considered on local distributor roads to facilitate
future improvements to turning movements as
the traffic volume increases. This 11.3m width
comprises two 3.65m wide lanes with an
additional 4.0m to facilitate the turning lane.
Generally lane markings should be allowed for

as Figure 5.1 0.
Edge lines line provided within the edge strip.

Lane lines -included within the carriageway
width.
'The width of turning lanes is discussed in

Clause 5.1 0.
Where. the road edge is kerbed, the
carriageway should be increased in accordance
with Clause 5.5.
I
Edge
Stdp
iI
Lane Wdth
Lone Width
- Edge
Stdp
I
I
Edge
~lne
,,
' '
w
$++E
I
, Edge
LI~O
m
I
I
I
I
Figure 5.1 0
..
January 1997
Lane Line / Lane Width Relationship
Page 511 1

5.3
LANE CAPACITY
The capacity of .a highway is affected by the

composition and the habits and desires of the
traffic using the road system and the controls
that the designer imparts onto the traffic. These
include:
Commercial vehicles
Lane distribution
Variations in traffic flow
Traffic interruptions.
Under ideal conditions, vehicles can follow one

another at average minimum headways of
about 1.8 seconds, giving a maximum flow rate
of about 2,000 vehicles per hour. A line of
vehicles can start up with an average minimum
headway of about 2 seconds giving a maximum
starting-up rate of approximately 1,800 vehicles
per hour. These maximum rates are reduced
by many prevailing road and traffic conditions.
When two or more lanes are available for traffic
in a single direction, the distribution in lane-use
will vary widely. 'The lane distribution will
depend on traffic regulations, traffic
composition, speed and volume, number and
location of access points, origin-destination
patterns of drivers, development, environment,
and local driver habits.
Due to the above factors, there are no typical
lane distributions. The recommendation for
1,600 vehicles per lane per hour recognises
that flow in some individual lanes will be higher
.
and in others lower. Refer Table 5.1.
At the planning stage, major routes should be
planned and designed as multi-lane, divided,
controlled access facilities even though they
may be developed by staged construction. In
the plans for each stage of development,
January 1997
-. - .; .
.'
SECTION 5
provision sh'ould be made for

improvements to existing sections.
In addition to strategic importance and safety,

the desired characteristics of traffic flow will
generally determine the class of a road. For
example, high volumes of traffic are generally
associated with urban Primary Routes, where
as low volumes are associated with Tertiary
Routes.
In most urban situations, the capacity of
intersections on a particular network will govern
the capacity of the network as a whole.
Uninterrupted flow only takes place when the
influence of at-grade intersections can be
neglected. This is rarely the case on most urban
road systems.
. . .
further
Lane Provision
Road Capacity
(vehhour)
Single Lane
2-Lane Dualling
3-Lane Dualling
1,600
3,200
4,800
Table 5.1.
Recommended Road Capacity
For detailed assessment of highway capacity

and level of service for different roads, refer to
The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of
Communications, Highway Design Manual,
Volume 2, Design of Roadways, Section 1.03.
5.4
SHOULDERS
The addition-ofa shoulder to the nearside edge

of a road has many advantages. Shoulders
provide structural support for the pavement
edges, emergency parking space for stopped
vehicles and also provide side clearance
between moving vehicles and stationary objects.
They also provide additional running lanes for
diversions and road maintenance. Shoulders
are not usually required on urban single and
urban dual carnageways as structura.l support is
provided by the kerbs and channels and
stopped vehicles can find a safe place to rest in
driveways and side streets. The shoulder may
be paved to the same standard as the
carriageway or of lesser construction such as to
road base construction. The merits of using a
lesser construction should be considered
accordingly for each particular situation.
Where there is a high traffic volume, narrow
shoulders give very poor service. There is a
greater number of accidents and they incur
more frequent and costly maintenance.
In deciding whether to include a shoulder, the
engineer should consider the following:
a)
Additional width provides a place for

safe stopping because of mechanical
difficulty, flat tyre or any other
emergency.
This also minimises
disruption to traffic flow.
b)
Additional width provides space for

increased mobility to escape potential
accidents or reduce their severity.
C)
Stormwater drainage is improved as the

water can be discharged further from
the running carriageway.
.-
Page 5112
d)
Additional width 'increases sight

distance in cuttings and improves
lateral clearance to signs and safety
fences.
e)
The apparent openness of the inside

lane reduces driver stress.
f)
A cost benefit analysis should be

carried out at the initial scheme
assessment phase.
Where shoulders are provided a width of 3.0m

should be used at a standard crossfall of 2
percent or as an extension of the crossfall of
the carriageway.
5.5
EDGE STRIPS AND SHY DISTANCES
Edge Strip Edge strips provide a safer carriageway, with

improved drainage and more space to move in
case of an emergency. Edge strips keep
roadside debris away from the running width of
an outside lane and prevent edge loss on the
running lane.
Edge strips are to be provided on all roads
which are not kerbed.
A width of 0.5m is deemed sufficient for an edge
strip width for a median edge on a dual
carriageway. The edge strip width shall be
allowed for within the standard median width
and shall not reduce the lane width. Refer
Table 5.2.
SECTION 5
strip there is no need to provide a shy distance.

It is recommended that a shy distance of 0.5m
should be added to the road width for each
kerbed road edge on roads with a design speed
greater than 80kph.
On kerbed dual
carriageway roads of design speed less than or
equal to 80kph, a shy distance of 0.35m shall
be added to the outside edge as a gutter. Refer
Figures 5.1 5.7. The shy distance is an
additional pavement width and the lane width
shall not be reduced. Shy distance at junctions
is discussed further in Section 6.
5.6
MEDIANS
Medians are used to separate opposing traffic

lanes on dual highways.
They provide
protection from interference by opposing traffic,
minimise headlight glare, provide space for
utilities and future lane width, provide additional
space for crossing and turning vehicles at atgrade junctions, and a,llow pedestrian refuge in
urban areas.
A median may vary in composition from say a
1.2m width with a pedestrian barrier to a 20m
wide median with street lighting, drainage and
landscaped areas. Medians are dependant on
the width of reservation available and the
functional requirements of the median. Often,
consultation with the relevant planning authority
is required prior to agreement of the width and
function of the median. Preferred standard
median widths are given in Table 5.3.
2.0
w
Single
Dual 2
Dual 3
0.35
Shoulder
Shoulder
Table 5.3
0.5
0.5
Kerb + 0.5
'Whilst awaiting services and kerbs to be installed, a
temporary edge strip 0.35m shall be added to give a
carriageway width of 8.0m.
Table 5.2
Edge Strips & Shy Distances
Shy Distance
Where a kerb is provided there is a tendency for
drivers to steer a distance away from the kerb,
this is termed "shy distance'. At slower speeds
the requirement for shy distance is reduced and
conversely, at higher speeds, an increased shy
distance is required. Where there is an edge
-
January 1997
Intermediate
Wide
6.0
12.0
Preferred Standard Median

Widths (m):
Narrow
Narrow medians are those in the range 1.2m to
less than 4.0m and are used in restricted
conditions. Medians 1.2m wide do not provide
a refuge area for pedestrians but do provide the
minimum space permitted for clearance of
opposing traffic provided the lane edge is
kerbed. Narrow medians are used where there
is a need to provide a divided road, but where
the available reservation does not permit a
greater median width. Narrow medians are not
wide enough to provide effective left turn lanes.
The minimum allowable median width to provide
a safe pedestrian refuge is 3.5m. Pedestrians
ability to cross at narrower medians shall be
controlled or actively discouraged by the
provision of barrierslhigh kerbs, continuous
planting and other features.
--
Page 5113
It is not recommended that narrow medians are

used on rural roads.
is possible to provide an intermediate or wide
median at that particular location. Acceptable
standards for the remaining cross section
elements should be maintained.
again, consideration should be given to the

provision of additional storage capacity or
outlets to allow for storm conditions. All
drainage inlets in the median should be
designed with the top flush with the ground, and
culvert ends provided with safety grates so they
will not be hazardous to out of control vehicles
that run off the road.
Intermediate
Intermediate width medians are those in the
range 4.0m to less than 8.0m and are generally
wide enough to provide for a left turn lane. A
width of 6.0m is the desirable minimum to
provide a left turn lane and a residual median,
and a width of 8.0m is the desirable minimum to
shelter a crossing vehicle undertaking a U-turn
manoeuvre.
It is common practice to landscape medians.

This is seen to provide a better environment and
reduce driver stress. Careful consideration
should be given to the choice of planting to
ensure that visibility and stopping distances are
not impaired. Furthermore, the upkeep of the
landscape and growth of the plants should be
designed for minimal maintenance and hence
less disturbance to the road user.
Wide
Medians 8.0m or greater in width provide space
for effective landscaping and may be used for
signing, services and drainage. Wide medians
may also be used to absorb level differences
across the road reserve. Rural medians should
be a minimum of 8.0m wide with a central safety
barrier.
Watering shall not require tankers to obstruct

the trafficked lanes at any time.
A narrow median should not be considered if it
--
SECTION 5
L'
L-
Where two abutting sections of highway have

different carriageway widths it is desirable that a
smooth transition should accommodate this
difference. The transition should be as long as
possible for aesthetic reasons and preferably
occur within a horizontal curve.
A disadvantage of wide medians occurs at

signalised junctions, where the increased time
for vehicles to cross 'the median may lead to
ineffective signal operation.
Wide medians should not be implemented at
the expense of reduced verge widths. Verge
widths are required for pedestrian walkways,
installation of services, traffic signs, drainage
channels, parking etc. Any significant reduction
in verge width may result in hazards in the
verge which negate the advantages of a wider
median.
It is recommended that urban medians should
be kerbed and that rural medians should be
provided with an edge strip and not kerbed. A
kerbed median is desirable where there is a
need to control left turn movements and is also
used when the median is to be landscaped. In
the rural situation, a depressed median is
preferred as this improves drainage of the road.
Special attention should be given to drainage of
medians. If the median is kerbed, the median
surface should be designed to have slopes of 2
percent, and should fall towards the centre of
the median if unpaved, or slope out if paved.
Depending on whether the median is paved or
open, or planted or not, the drainage should not
interfere with the operation of the highway.
Paved medians may require positive drainage
systems incorporating manholes, pipes etc.
Nonpaved medians may be self-draining, but
5.7
VERGES
The verge is a width of the reservation which

facilitates additional functions essential for the
operation of the road. As a minimum verges
must be able to accommodate highway signs,
structures, utility services such as water,
electricity, Q.TEL, drainage, and additionally
such items as traffic signals and street lighting.
Where a verge is adjacent to a development a
set back may be required. Verge widths may
vary from a desirable minimum of 3.0m up to the
limits of the reservation, which could be in
excess of 15.0m. Paved verges should be
designed with a 2% fall towards the carriageway
for diainage purposes. However, in larger
paved areas, falls shall be designed to specific
drainage collection points in the verge.
It is important to ensure that whatever is
installed in the verge (such as structures, signs
or landscaping) does not affect the sight
distances required for the particular design
speed of.the road. Additional care should also
be taken at traffic signals and junctions where
more signage is implemented.
Verges may be paved, landscaped or graded
depending on the intended use of the verge.
L-
.-
L
-
.L-
It may be necessary to increase the verge width

if soakaways are to be installed within the verge.
January
1997
. -
Page 5114
.-
Due investigation of utilities to be

accommodated shall be made at the design
stage.
5.8
PARKING BAYS AND LANES
The need for parking is determined by the

existing and future development of the
immediate surrounding area. Consultation will
be required with the Traffic Section and the
Planning Department to determine the future
development plans and the amount of on-street
and off-street parking required.
Where possible, parking shall be provided away
from the carriageway and in convenien,tly
located, specific lots or along service roads.
Parking should not be provided near junctions
or opposite access points as this is likely to
increase the probability of accidents and also
hinder sight distance.
Dimension
Stall widlh. parallel

to aisle
Stall depth to wall
Angle
On
Figure
5.9
45-
80.
75'
?om
4.25
3.50
3.25
3.00
'6.40
6.70
6.60
6.00
stall lmes
Stall depfh interlo$
5.30
5.95
620
6.00
ModJe, wall lo
interlock
18.20
17.65
19.90
20.00
Bumper overhang
(typiml)
0.60
0.70
0.75
0.75
'Dimensions for 3m by 6m stalls
Table 5.4
Parking Bay Dimensions (m)
Provision for parking is achievable by the

following methods.
Parking Lanes (parallel parklng)
Parking lanes may be provided adjacent to the
inside lane of the carriageway (ie. the slow
lane). The standard width required for a parking
lane is 2.5m, each bay being nominally 6.5m in
length. Care should be taken when providing a
parking lane to ensure that the design speed is
appropriate to allow a safe stopping distance, if
for example, a passenger were to accidentally
step into the carriageway whilst embarking or
disembarking a vehicle. It is recommendedthat
parking lanes should only be provided on single
carriageway roads, with posted speeds of 50
kph or less. The lane provision, design speed,
stopping sight distance and traffic volumes
should also be appropriate to allow minimal
interruptions to traffic flow when vehicles are
entering or leaving the parking lane.
Parklng Bays (angled parking)
If the width of available reservation allows,
considerationshould be given to the provision of
parking bays. Parking bays should not be
permitted on the main through carriageway of
dual carriageways. The perpendicular parking
bay should be made up of stalls 3.0m wide and
6.0m in length. The dimension requirements for
angled parking are shown in Table 5.4 and
Figure 5.9. Parking in bays requires greater
adjacent lane width to accommodate the turning
movement depending on the choice of parking
.
angle.
January 1997
Intarbck to Karb
Modulo
Modulo
Modulo
= Ct.1 not avmlbblo h 8art.b Imyouts
Figure 5.9
Parking Bay Dimensions for

,3.0m x 6.0m Stalls
Service Road Parking

If there is sufficient reservation width,
consideration should be given to the provision of
a service road to access either a parking lane,
parking bays or designated car park. This
results in a safer highway 'and fewer
interruptions to through traffic, and enables flow
to be maintained more easily. Refer to Clause
5.1 1 for service roads.
Parking on Access Roads
where residential development is dense and the
requirement for additional on-street parking is
likely, then the standard parking lane width of
2.5m shall be used. The minimum parking .lane
width is 2.2m. The designer should bear in mind
that the very low 'number of vehicles using,
access. .roads means occasional on-street
parking by visitors or delivery vehicles will not
cause congestion. In fact, their presence will
help to keep the speed of other vehicles low.
Page 5115
Parking Exclusions
Parking shall be excluded from the following
locations:
SECTION 5
Cut and fill dopes should be flattened as

appropriate with the topography and be
consistent with the overall type of highway. The
intersection of slope planes in the highway cross
section should be well rounded to simulate
natural earth forms. The rounding and flattening
of slopes minimises drifting and wash out of
loose material such as sand and hence reduces
maintenance costs.
Junctions; to provide space for

pedestrians to cross and to maintain
adequate visibility. See Figure 5.1 0
Bends; to maintain adequate forward

visibility for drivers
Pedestrian crossing points; to minimise

. crossing width and enable crossing
pedestrians to be seen clearly by
drivers
It is recommended to carry out an adequate

geotechnical investigation prior to specifying
slopes. The investigation will determine the
maximum slopes for cut and fill and the criteria
for benching or erosion protection if required.
Any other location where parking would

cause
... unsafe conditions.
-
Benches should ideally be 4.0m in width and

laid to falls of approximately 1 in 20 to avoid
ponding of water and consequential slip failure.
'In all cases parking must not encroach on visibility splays.
~ i ~ u r e ' 5 . 1 0 Typical
Parking
Lane
Treatment at T-Junctions.
5.9
SIDE SLOPES
Side slopes fall into two categories,

embankment and cutting. They serve two maln
functions; firstly they provide structural stability
to the road, secondly they provide a surface on
which out of control vehicles may travel and
recover, minimising the chance of overturning.
In rock cuttings it is recommended to include

ditches and a debris verge to provide a safe
landing and catchment area for possible rock
fall, and removal of surface water run off. This
additional width also provides a useful area for
rock face maintenance. It is becoming common
practice in the UK for rock outcroppings to be
left in place for reasons of economy or
aesthetics.
This may be considered for
application in Qatar. However in such situations
this may prove lethal if a vehicle were to collide
with the outcrop. It is recommended that at all
such locations a safety fence be provided.
Refer to Clause 5.1 5 for safety fences.
For details of sand slopes, wind blown sand and
dune control refer to the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia, Ministry of Communications, Highway
Design Manual, Book 2, Section 1.1 6, Sand
Dune Control.
Where possible the side slopes should fall away

from the verge at a slope of 1 in 5. It is usual to
consider the provision of a safety fence when
slopes are steeper than 1 in 5 and/or the height
of the slope is greater than 6m. Safety fencing
is discussed in Clause 5.15. Generally, it is
better to use flatter slopes, providing there is
adequate fall for drainage. Slopes in cutting
should not be steeper than 1 in 2 and preferably
should be 1 in 3 to allow mechanical
maintenance equipment to be used on the
slope. If there is insufficient width which would
require slopes steeper than 1 in 2, then partial
or full retaining walls should be used or some
method of slope stabilisation. Retaining walls
should- be set back from the carriageway to
avoid a constricting feeling and reduce stress
for the driver.
January 1997
Page 5116

5.1 0
SECTION 5
AUXILIARY LANES
Auxiliary lanes serve as speed change lanes,

storage lanes or a combination of the two. They
may also be either right turn or left turn facilities
at junctions (refer to Section 6 Junctions). A
speed change lane is primarily for the
acceleration or deceleration of vehicles entering
or leaving the through traffic lanes. A speed
change lane should be sufficient in length and
width to enable a driver to make the necessary
change between the speed of operation on the
through highway and the lower speed necessary
to turn, with minimal disruption to the speed of
following vehicles. Speed-change lanes can
have different layouts depending on the
alignment of the highway, frequency of
intersections and the distance required to effect
the necessary .change
of speed.
.
Refer to Section 6 Junctions for further details
on the following topics.
Deceleration Lanes
A deceleration lane consists of a taper and a full
lane width. The length of deceleration lanes
should be. determined according to the design
speed of the highway and the design speed
necessary to make the turn. The greater the
difference between these speeds the longer the
deceleration lane should be. Deceleration lanes
on approach to at-grade intersections can also
function as storage lanes for turning traffic.
Acceleration Lanes
Design considerations for acceleration lanes are
similar to those for deceleration lanes.
Acceleration lanes are provided to permit an
increase in speed before entering the throughtraffic lanes and also to serve as manoeuvring
space, so that a driver can take advantage of an
opening in the adjacent stream of through-traffic
and join it.
Left and Right Turn Lanes
The provision of separate left and right turning
lanes should be determined by a capacity
analysis for the junction under consideration.
Acceleration and deceleration tapers should be
used with these turning lanes. The length of
turning lanes shall depend upon the length
required for speed change and the number of
vehicles to be stored. Typically the storage
length is based on the number of vehicles that
are likely to accumulate in two minutes, as
determined by the capacity analysis, and is
calculated by the following formula:
January 1997
Where S =
N =
L =
Storage length (m)

Design volume of turning
vehicle (vehicles per hour)
Length in metres occupied by
each vehicle (7m for passenger
vehicles, 12m for trucks)
For further details of junction design and lane

capacity refer to Section 6 Junctions and the
Qatar Traffic Marrual.
5.11
SERVICE ROADS
Service roads are roads which run roughly

parallel with, and are connected to the main
through highway; They are generally of low
design speed and preferably restricted to oneway traffic.
Figure 5.7 shows a typical
reservation with a service road.
Service roads provide a number of functions
depending on the development of the
surrounding area. The provision of service
roads reduces the number of access points onto
the main highway and segregates the higher
speed through traffic from the lower speed local
traffic. This reduces interruption of traffic flow,
makes the best use of road capacity and results
in a safer road.
service roads may also provide an alternative
route if maintenance is required on the through
road or in case of an emergency.
The width of the service road is dependant on
the classification of traffic expected to use the
service road such as light vehicles, delivery
lorries or heavy goods vehicles. Further
consideration should be given to the turning
requirements of such vehicles, the type and
number of access points and type of street
parking, if required.
Service road connections to the main road
should be. designed as at-grade junctions in
accordance with the guidelines given in Section
6 Junctions.
Where one-way service roads'are to be installed
within the reservation the absolute minimum
width of outer median permitted is 1.2m
provided no signing is required. This distance
allows for the provision of a central pedestrian
barrier only. If traffic signs are required or other
street furniture the desirable minimum width is
2.lm. A wider outer median is preferred, but
this will depend on the width available within the
reservation. Wider outer medians give greater
scope for landscaping which enhances the
appearance of both highway and the
Page 5117
appearance of both highway and

development adjacent to the highway.
-.
the
Refer to HMSO publication, Designing for

Deliveries for detailed explanation and
guidelines of requirements for service
roadslareas, and turning movements for
different vehicle types.
5.1 2 .
PEDESTRlAN FACILITIES
Pedestrian facilities are generally found within

the verge and at road crossing points. The
provision of paved pedestrian areas is related to
the function of the roadside development. It is
often difficult to obtain reliable estimates of
pedestrian volumes and movements. For this
reason, studies should be carried out at the
concept and preliminary design stage. All urban
roads and junctions shall allow space for
footpaths unless the area strictly forbids
walking. A width of 2.0m should be provided
depending on pedestrian needs. The width of
paved pedestrian areas should be increased to
a minimum of 3.0m near schools, large sports
venues; commercial areas or other areas with
high pedestrian volumes. Footpaths may be
constructed of paving blocks or concrete and
laid to crossfalls of 2% towards the roadway to
permit drainage.
Where possible a separation area should be
included within the verge which acts as a buffer
between vehicular and pedestrian traffic. The
separation width should be designed to
discourage pedestrians from standing at the
kerbside. This is achievable by providing a
number of obstacles such as low planting,
raised blockwork or pedestrian barriers. A
minimum separation width of 1.2m is desirable.
A separation width is not required in commercial
areas with on street parking where wider
footpaths are usually provided.
Pedestrians should be actively discouraged
from 'crossing roads along the length of dual
carriageways.
Special pedestrian refuge
sections should be provided at selected points,
or ideally at junction locations.
It is
recommended that these refuge areas be a
minimum of 3.5m wide and should be staggered
so that pedestrians are not able to approach
and cross both carriageways in one line.
On roads with a posted speed of 60kph or less,
it is recommended to provide a pelican crossing
(signalized pedestrian crossing) or a zebra
crossing (pedestrian crossing defined by road
markings) as a crossing point for pedestrians.
These crossings should be located, signed and
marked in accordance with this manual and with
the Qatar Traffic Manual.
January 1997
- . .. . ..
SECTION 5
In areas with high volumes of pedestrian traffic,

footpaths should be provided on both sides of
the road. Some urban areas and most frontage
roads can be served with a footpath on one side
only. In these areas, footpaths must be
continuous for the full pedestrian route.
On rural roads, footpaths are not usually
required, except along sections of road where
there is substantial residential or commercial
development. In such situations, footpaths are
usually located between the bottom of the
embankment and the property line.
Pedestrlan Ramps
In order to provide adequate and reasonable
access for the safe and convenient movement of
pedestrian and handicapped persons, including
those in wheelchairs, kerb ramps should be
included at all pedestrian crossing points. Kerb
ramps should be at least 0.9m in width, sloped
at the rate of 1 in 12 or flatter, and located on
the pedestrian side of the kerb face.
The edge of the ramp facing the carriageway

shall be flat and set 25mm above the level of the
road pavement. Drainage equipment such as
gratings should not be placed in ramp areas
where they may caused a hindrance to
wheelchairs.
Structures for Pedestrlan Movements
The need for a pedestrian grade separated
structure such as a footbridge or underpass
must be investigated in some depth for each
particular situation. The investigation should
cover studies of pedestrian generating sources,
travelling patterns,
crossing volumes,
classification of road to be crossed, land use,
location of adjacent crossing facilities, and social
and cultural factors. The structure to be provided
must accommodate handicapped pedestrians
and those with wheelchairs. Ramps should be
provided to a preferred grade of 1 in 12.
However, a maximum grade of 1 in 10 may be
used in difficult locations. Level landing areas of
1.5m length should be installed such that no
individual ramp section is longer than 9.0m.
Handrails should be provided on all steps and
ramps. The width of the walkway should be a
minimum of 2.5m between walls or railings. It
may be necessary to install pedestrian barriers
in the vicinity of the structure to deter
pedestrians from crossing the road at-grade.
A pedestrian overstructure is preferred to an

underpass. An over structure should be
designed'to be in keeping with the surrounding
area in terms of geometry and architecture. The
required headroom clearance for overstructures
is detailed in Clause 4.6. Lighting and fencing
should be considered on a site by site basis.
Page 5118
pedestrian underpasses shall be well lit with

clear unobstructed visibility. A pavement or
ramp approaching an underpass should provide
a clear view through the underpass. The
desirable headroom clearance through the
underpass is 3.0m.
Specific consideration needs to be given to the
drainage of underpasses both for the removal of
rainwater and effects of high groundwater
levels.
5.14
UTILITIES
Road corridors are given in Figures 5.1-5.9.

These are intended to provide adequate space
for road cross section requirements and at the
same time allow the public utilities.sufficient
space for existing and proposed plant. Where
space for utilities is limited, "wayleavesnoutside
the road resenration may be obtained by
contacting the planning department.
The public and private utilities to be
accommodated include the following:
Telephone (Q.TEL)
Cable television
Electricity - distribution
Electricity - lighting
Electricity - transmission
..
Sewerage
Return effluent
-.
. ..
? ,
. ,
.
SECTION 5
'
USE OF KERBS
There are a number of types and combinations

of kerbs available, each with particular
applications. Some of the details in regular use
are listed below.
Raised kerb
Raised kerb with channel block
.
5.1 3
..
..
~ d 'kerb
~ e
Channel block
lush kerb
Dropper kerb
Dropped kerb
Vehicle barrier unit (VBU).
The standard kerb unit is available in a range of

sizes and shapes. The shape is varied to
enable kerbs to be installed on a range of radii.
It is recommended to check the availability and
dimensions of kerbs with the manufacturer as a
full range may not be available in Qatar.
Kerbs provide a number of functions which are:
to define and provide structural support to the
edge of carriageway; to control highway
drainage; to segregate vehicles and
pedestrians.
Kerbs are tobe used on all urban roads and"
only at special locations on rural roads, such as.
junctions where there is a need to give a clear
delineation of the road edge.
Surface water and land drainage

Water
Oil and gas.
Each utility has their own working procedures

and works specifications. These shall be
referred to when designing the road
construction and drainage facilities.
Where there is a need to install a safety fence

alongside a kerbed section of road, the fence
design, kerb design and drainage design should
be carried out together. The kerb may affect the
choice of safety fence type, and it is important to
ens.ure that the combined drainagekerb facility
does not reduce the safe operation of the safety
fence.
Particular consideration may be required to

position soakaways if the reservation width is
restricted. Refer to the typical cross sections
shown in Figures 5.1 to 5.7. Where space is
limited, soakaways may be lowered, by the
addition of rising sections, to allow shallow
utilities such as Q.TEL to pass above the
soakaway chamber. However, in new roads,
priority is to be given to road related utilities, eg.
drainage, lighting etc.
.
.
January 1997
Page 5119

5.15
SAFETY FENCES
General
A safety fence is a longitudinal barrier used to
shield motorists from natural or man-made
hazards located along a road. It may also be
used to protect bystanders, pedestrians and
cyclists from out of control vehicular traffic.
Safety fences may be located in the verge or
median depending on the particular
requirements and location. Refer to Figure 5.1 1
for the definition of terminology used in safety
barrier design.
The safety fence is designed to prevent an
errant vehicle from leaving the carriageway and
striking a fixed object or feature that is
considered more hazardous than the barrier
itself. This is accomplished by containing and
redirecting the-errant vehicle.
On a divided road, a safety fence is located in
the median to separate opposing traffic.
Safety fences should only be installed if they
reduce the severity of accidents. This may
appear subjective, but generally a barrier should
be provided if the consequences of a vehicle
striking a fixed object, or running off the road
are determined to be more serious than hitting
the safety fence itself. Other considerations are
trafric speed and traffic volumes and a cost
,analysis.
SECTION 5
. .
minimum radius a standard. size car can
negotiate without losing tyre contact. This is
dependant on approach angle and speed as
well as the characteristics of individual vehicles.
Roadside Obstacles
A safety fence should only be installed if it is
clear that the result of a vehicle striking the
barrier will be less severe than the accident
resulting from hitting the unprotected object.
Generally, if an object is greater than 1Om
from the travelled way, it does not requlre
protection.
Table 5.5 summarises of the various needs for
safety fencing.
Pedestrians
The most desirable solution to protect the
innocent bystander is to separate pedestrians
and vehicular traffic. If this is not achievable
then consideration of safety fencing should be
given at schools, busy commercial and retail
centres, sports venues and other locations
where high pedestrian movements are
anticipated or observed.
'The cost analysis is based on:
Removing or reducing the hazard so

that it no longer requires protecting
Installing an appropriate safety fence
Leaving the hazard unprotected.
Median safety fences are generally provided

where the median width is relatively narrow and
the traffic volumes and speeds are high. They
may also be provided where the separated
carriageways are at different levels, as the
likelihood of an accident increases the steeper
the slope between carriageways. It is important
to provide gaps in the median fencing for
emergency use and maintenance.
Embankments
Embankment height and side slope are factors
ih determining safety fence need. The provision
of safety fencing should be considered when
slopes are steeper than 1 in 5 and/or the height
of the slope is greater than 6m, refer to Figure
5.12. Rounding slopes reduces the chances of
an errant vehicle becoming airborne. The
optimum rounding may be defined as being the
January 1997
..
..
Page 5120
Figure 5.1 1 Definition of Safety Fence Elements

. .' .*.
January 1997
,
....
..
...
-.
Page 5/21

,
..
TRAVELLED WAY
SHOULDER
.
.
SECTIONS
. ,
/ FILL SECTON EMBANKMENT

R = ROUNDING
.
0
.Om
3m
6m
9m
Height (m)
12m
15m
18m
Barrier not Required for Embankment.

However, Check Barrier need for other
Roadside Hazards.
. .
Figure 5.1 2
January 1997
Requirement for Safety Fences on Embankments
Page 5/22
Types of Standard Sections of Safety Fence

Safety fencing is usually classified as flexible,
.semi-rigid or rigid.
Flexible systems are generally more forgiving
than other categories, as much of the impact
energy is dissipated by the deflection of the
barrier and lower impact forces are imparted on
the vehicle. There are two basic types of
flexible system:
The first is a cabled fence, normally comprising
4 strands of tensioned cable. Cable fences
redirect impacting vehicles after sufficient
tension is developed in the cable, with the posts .
in the impact area providing only slight
resistance. The cable fence returns to ,its
original position and damaged posts are easily
replaced.
.. .
The second type utilizes a standard steel beam
section mounted on relatively weak posts. This
system acts in a similar manner to the cable
It retains some degree of
safety ferrce;
effectiveness after minor collisions due to the
rigidity of the beam rail element. However, after
major collisions it requires full repair to remain
effective. As with the cable system, lateral
deflection can be reduced to some extent by
closer post spacing. This system, as with all
barriers having a relatively narrow restraining
width, is vulnerable to vaulting or vehicle underride caused by incorrect mounting height or
irregularities in the approach terrain.
Semi Rigid Systems work on the principle that
resistance is achieved through the combined
flexure and stiffness of the rail. Posts near the
point of impact are designed to break or tear
away, distributing the impact force to adjacent
posts. Deflection of this type of beam is up to
approximately 1.5m (test data; 26 degrees,
95kph, 1.8 Tonnes)
Strong post fences usually remain functional
after moderate collisions, thereby eliminating the
need for immediate repair. There are a number
of different types of semi rigid fence on the
market, each system having its own
performance requirements and capabilities. A
few examples are listed below:
Box Beam
Open Box Beam
W-Beam (corrugated type of fence)
Blocked Out W-Beam
Self-Restoring Safety Fence
January I997
. . .
..
- SECTION 5
The self-restoring safety fence is a high

performance fence designed to be
maintenance free for most impacts and capable
of containing and redirecting large vehicles.
The combination of high initial cost and high
performance makes this barrier more suited for
use at high accident frequency locations.
When traffic speeds are expected to be greater
than 50kph the semi rigid system should be
tensioned. Tensioned systems usually require
a minimum length to be effective and are
unable to be installed on sharp radii (typically
50m length and 150m minimum radii).
Individual barrier manufacturers specifications
should be adhered to.
Object
Comment
Bridge piers,
abutments and railing
ends
Protection generally
required
Culverts, pipes,
headwalls
Judgement required based

on size, shape and location
of hazard
Cut slopes (smooth)
Generally protection not

required
Cut slopes (rough)

on likelihood of impact
Ditches (transverse)
Generally protection
required, ditch profile to be
considered
Embankments

on height and slope
Retaining wall

on relative smoothness and
anticipated maximum angle
of impact
Signs and iuminaire

supports
Generally protection
required for non-breakaway
supPo@
Traffic signals
lsokited traffic slgnals on

high speed rural roads may
require protection
.
Trees and utility poles
Protection may be required

depending on site by site
conditions
Permanent bodies of
water

on depth of water and
likelihood of encroachment
Table 5.5
Consideration for the Provision

!
of Safety Fencing
Rigid Systems offer no deflection when hit by

a vehicle. The impact energy is absorbed by
the vehicle. For high angle and high speed
impacts, passenger size vehicles may become
partially airborne and in some cases may reach
the top of the barrier. For shallow angle
SECTION 5
impacts, the roll angle toward the barrier

imparted to high centre of gravity vehicles may
be enough to permit contact of the top portion of
the vehicle with objects on top of or immediately
behind the fence, eg. bridge piers. Commonly
used rigid systems are the New Jersey Barrier in
the USA, and the British Concrete Barrier in the
WK.
length should be 10 to 12 times the difference

in the lateral deflection of the two systems in
question eg. for a beam dellection of 1.5m the
transition should be around 15m.
Typically the system is relatively low cost, has

generally effective performance for passengersized vehicles and has maintenance-free
'characteristics.
The stiffness of the transition should increase

smoothly and continuously from the less rigid to
the more rigid system. This can be achieved
by decreasing the post spacing, increasing post
size or strengthening the rail element.
End Treatments
The untreated end of a safety fence is extremely
hazardous if hit, as the beam element can
penetrate the passenger compartment and will
generally stop the vehicle. A crashworthy end
treatment is therefore considered essential if the
safety fence terminates within 10m of the
travelled way andlor is in an area where it is
likely to be hit head-on by an errant vehicle. The
termination of the safety fence should not spear,
vault or roll a vehicle for head-on or angled
impacts. For impacts within the length of need,
the end treatment should have the same
redirectional characteristics as the standard
safety fence, which means that the end must be
also properly anchored.
GI-
Drainage features such as ditches should be

avoided at transition positions as they may
initiate vehicle instability.
\\,.
\.
Selectlon of Safety Fence

The selection process is not easily defined but
the most desirable system is one that offers the
required degree of protection at the lowest total
cost. Table 5.6 summarises the factors to be
considered.
- 4
I
There are a number of different types of end

treatments which work on a range of principles,
some of which are listed below:
Breakaway Terminals
'
Turned Down Terminals

Energy Absorption Systems
Special Anchorage for Cable Fence
Anchorage into Embankment
Further reference is essential to select the most

appropriate system for each particular situation.
Transitions
Transition sections of safety fence are
necessary to provide continuity of protection
when two different barriers join, when a barrier
joins another barrier system (such as. a bridge
rail) or when a roadside barrier is attached to a
rigid object (such as a bridge pier).
The transition section should be the same

strength or stronger than the two systems.
The transition should be long enough so that
significant changes in deflection do not occur
within a short distance. Generally the transition
January 1997
Page 5/24

Criteria
Comments
Performance
Capability
Fence mus! be structurally

able to contain and redirect
design vehicle
Deflection
Expected deflection of fence

should not exceed available
room to deflect
Site Conditions
Slope approaching the fence

and distance from travelld
way may preclude use of
some fence types
Compatibility
Fence must be compatible

with planned end anchor and
capable of transition to other
safety fence systems
Cost
Standard fence systems are

relatively consistent in cost,
but hlgh performance railings
can cost significantly more
...
6
a)
Maintenance:
Routine
b)
Collision
c)
Materials
Storage
Generally, flexible or semirigid

systems
require
significantly
more
maintenance after a collision
than rigid or high performance
fences
The fewer the different
systems used the fewer
inventory items and storage
space required
Simplicity
Simpler designs cost less and

are more iikely to be
reconstructed properly on site
Aesthetics
OccasionaHy safety fence

aesthetics are an important
consideration in its selection
Field
Experience
Table 5.6
SECTION 5 .
Placement
Lateral offset: As a rule, safety fences should
be placed as far from the travelled way as
conditions permit. This gives the errant driver
the best chance of regaining control of the
vehicle without having an accident. It also
provides better sight distance. Table 5.7 gives
suggested lateral offsets related to the design
speed. Other factors may override these
suggested figures.
Design Speed
Setback from Edge of

Pavement (m)
50
I
1.0
INote: Rigid system
I
is not recommended for design speeds
'
greater than 100kph

Few systems require a
significant amount of routine
maintenance
d)
The
performance and
maintenance requirements of
existing systems should be
monitored to identify problems
that could be lessened or
eliminated by using a different
fence type
Selection Criteria for Safety

Fences
Table 5.7
Desirable Lateral Clearance

for Safety Barriers from Edge.
of'Travelled Way.
The desirable minimum distance between back

of fence and rigid hazards should not be less
than the dynamic deflection of the safety fence
for impact by a vehicle at impact conditions of
approximately 25 degrees and 100kph.
Specific manufacturers requirements must be
followed.
However, as a guideline, the
clearances set out in Table 5.8 are typical.
Ba*erType
Clearance from Back of

Fence to Hazard (m)
Tensioned wire rope

Tensioned beam
Box beam
Rigid
O*
'Minimum clearance of oMects behind the barrier to
travelled way must be maintdined.
Table 5.8
Typical
Manufacturers
Clearance Requirements
On embankments care should be taken to

ensure that at full deflection of the fence the
wheels of the vehicle do not overhang the edge
of the slope.
The combined use of kerbs and flexible
safety fences together shotlld be avoided.
The use of kerbs and semi-rigid or rigid
safety fences shouid generally be avoided.
However, if the face of the safety fence is
within 22Smm of the kerb face, a vehlcle is
not likely to vault the fence.
January 1997
Page 5/25
'

.- .
A safety fence is considered flared when it is not
parallel with the carriageway. Flare is normally
used to locate the barrier terminal section further
from the carriageway, to minimise a driver's
reaction to a hazard near the road by gradually
introducinga parallel safety fence installation, to
connect a roadside barrier to a hazard nearer
the carriageway such as a bridge parapet or
railing, or to reduce the total length of rail
needed. Reference Figure 5.1 1.
'
Flare rates are a function of design speed and

safety fence type. Bearing this in mind, Table
5.9 shows typical flare rates.
Design
Speed
(kph)
flare Rate
for Fence
within
Flare Rate for Fence
1-:x
System
1:17
1:15
1:13
1:11
1:14
1:17
1:13
1:8
1:7
'Refer to manufacturers technical literature for special
conditions.
Table 5.9
,
SECTION 5
..
Typical Flare Rates
The length of safety fence required should be

such that it protects the vehicle for the full extent
of the hazard. This includes the length of the
approach flare, the length of the hazard and the
runout length beyond the hazard. The runout
length is particularly important on single
camageways where protection is required for
vehicles travelling in the opposite lane.
Underground Obstructions
Where there is a risk of driven posts or standard
concrete footings interfering with cables, ducts
and pipes and the alignment of the safety fence
cannot be adjusted to avoid the obstruction, or
the depth of pavement construction is such that
the standard driven post or concrete footing
would not penetrate into the subgrade, special
posts or footings shall be provided with the
approval of the Director of Civil Engineering
Department.
Existing Systems
With the development of technology and
understanding of this subject, it is a fact that
older installations are sub-standard and do not
always meet current recommendedperformance
levels. These deficiencies usually fall within two
categories, those that have structural
inadequacies and those that are improperly
designed or located.
January 1997
These installations will require upgrading to

current standards and each installation should
be considered on a site by site basis.
For further reference on the different types of
safety fencing refer to the British Department of
Transport document TD 19/85, Safety Fences
and Barriers, and the American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials
publication, Roadside Design Guide. For
details of specific safety fences the
manufacturers' technical literature should be
referred to.
5.16
CRASH CUSHIONS
Crash cushions or impact attenuators are

protective devices designed to prevent errant
vehicles from impacting fixed object hazards.
This is achieved by gradually slowing down a
vehicle to a safe stop (from possible head-on
impacts) or by redirecting a vehicle away from
the hazard (for side impacts). Crash cushions
are ideally suited for use at locations where
fixed objects cannot be removed, relocated or
made to breakaway, and cannot be adequately
protected by a normal safety fence.
Crash cushions primarily serve to lessen the
severity of accidents rather than to prevent
them from happening.
Crash cushions work on one of two principles,
either absorption of kinetic energy or transfer of
momentum. In the first instance the kinetic
energy of a moving vehicle is absorbed by
crushable materials. This can be achieved by
the use of water filled containers. Crash
cushions of this type require a rigid back stop to
resist the impact force of the vehicle. The second concept involves the transfer of
momentum of a moving vehicle to an
expendable mass of material or weights. This
may be sand filled containers. Devices of ,this
type require no rigid back stop.
The design procedure is relatively straight
fornard and basically relates to the number of
crash cushion units being able to slow down a
design vehicle, at a design speed under an
acceptable deceleration force.
Most
manufacturers have design charts to select an
appropriate layout.
The most common application of crash
cushions is at an exit ramp at an elevated or
depressed structure, ' where a bridge pier
requires protection. However, they may also
be used at temporary r o d works or used to
slow a vehicle down on a slope when the
brakes have failed. For optimum use, the
crash cushion should ideally be placed on a
relatively flat surface. Kerbs should also be
Page 5/26

avoided as this may cause the vehicle to
become airborne.
large sports complexes where crowds

may gather. The fencing controls the
movement of pedestrian traffic and
lowers the risk of a pedestrian
accidentally moving onto a live
carriageway.
The effective use of crash cushions is restricted

to cars travelling up to speeds of IOOkph, and
not applicable for large trucks and buses.
There are many different manufacturers of crash
cushion systems, each with there own particular
merits and applications. However, the engineer
in the selection process must consider the site
characteristics, cost, maintenance and the
structural and safety characteristics of the
different systems.
For further reference on the different types of
crash cushions refer to the American
Association
of
State
Highway
and
publication, Roadside
.
Transportation .Officials
Design Guide. For details of specific crash
cushions, manufacturers technical literature
should be referred to.
FENCING
5.17
There are many different types of fences used

within the road reservation, each type having
particular applications. The main types of
fencing are listed below:
Right of Way Fencing to delineate and
separate private property from the road
reservation
Safety Fencing erected where
considered necessary. Refer Clause
5.15
Animal Fencing prevents animals from
entering the highway reservation. The
size and type of fencing is dependant
on the type of animal the fencing is
intended to control, eg. camel or goat
Acoustic Fencing may be required in
sensitive locations such as residential
areas to lower the traffic noise level.
The' fence forms a barrier and the
sound is reflected away from the
sensitive area
Headlight
Barriers
may
be
implemented at locations where it is
desirable to minimise the glare of the
headlights of oncoming vehicles, such
as at unlit bends on rural roads
Pedestrian Access Fenclng .may be

required where there are significant
numbers of pedestrians such as on
commercial streets, outside schools or
.-
. . ..-.. ..
January 1997
1 .
.- .
.- .
SECTION 5
5.18
ROAD CLOSURE AND PARTIAL

CLOSURE
The main aims of full or partial road closure are

to:
Deter non-access traffic from using
residential roads as through routes
Limit the nurr~berof minor accesses
onto major routes
-'
Remove the crossroad type junction

which is generally considered unsafe.
Refer Section 6 Junctions
Although these aims are common to the design

of new roads, the approach here is different as
established route patterns, many having been
in u s e for years, have to be broken and
reformed elsewhere.
Provision of clear,'
concise warning andlor diversion signs are
advised during the first two to three months of
operation. This will help re-educate the driver
who wasfamiliar with the old road layout.
"
The most basic way to prevent traffic using a

particular route is to close the road, either at a
particular point or along a certain length. It is
usual to close a road at an existing junction,' ie.
at the end of a block of properties, unless the
block is very long, eg. 250-300m, in which case
"No Through Roadnsigns must be displayed at
the open end(s) of the road.
End of block closures could be made simply by
the use of "No Entry" signs, but these may
prove to be ineffective, particularly if drivers
approaching a closure can see traffic moving
beyond it. Hence it is preferable to provide a
physical barrier to prevent drivers violating the
restriction. This may be in the form of a traffic
island with a sign showing the direction that
vehicles must now follow. It is important to
ensure that the arrangement is in keeping with
the area and consideration shoi~ldbe given to
the provision of landscaping.
Where a closure is made at a mid-block
position,' provision must be made for large
vehicles, such as refuse vehicles to turn
around.
Typical turning heads are shown in Figure 5.1 3.
The choice of layout is dependant on the width
..
Page 5/27
'

:..
... : .-.
of carriageway available and the positions of
existing property accesses that have to be
accommodated by the closure.
. - -: . ,....-.,..-. ....:.. !!4;7..*.,*
Any barriers or turning heads shall be designed

in such a way as to ensure that emergency
vehicles are able to gain access. This is
achievable by the use of lockable barrier gates
or demountable bollards. Whichever is chosen,
it must be capable of preventing private vehicles
from passing through the restriction. For 'this
reason, solutions such as a route through a
landscaped area are not recommended as they
are open to abuse, particularly by drivers of four
wheel drive vehicles.
SECTION 5
L . * . . . & . . 4 . . 9 G
,.
..
. . ,. * < - -. ,- -.
- .
'
Whatever the designed restriction, adequate

access and parking shall be provided for
residents.
. .
,
Partial closure allows access into areas.

However, by the use of width restriction or
raised road humps it is made unattractive for
general road users.
Partial closure is often incorporated at
undesirable locations along the major road to
discourage use such as at accesses near to
major junctions. Where the minor road has to
remain open due to emergency vehicle access
requirements or limited access routes into the
development then partial closure is an easy way
to control general use.
January 1997
. . ..Page 5/28
..
. .
.-
SECTION 5
Fd3
l+l
P-I
All dimension in metres

Note :
A central island radius of 10 metres will
just allow the vehicle to turn about. In
view of the restricted area available, the
island may be reduced or omitted altogether.
Minimum Dimensions for Turnina Heads
in situations where larger vehicles have to be
accommodated, these dimensions should be increased to
take account of the larger turning radius and swept
path area.
Figure 5.1 3 Typical Turning Head Details
January 1997
Page 5/29
5.1 9
LANDSCAPING
Apart from the amenity benefits, the landscape

treatment of medians, junctions and verges can
have practical advantages. By ground
modelling, perhaps in conjunction with planting,
the layout of the road can be made more
obvious to traffic.
Landscaping can play an important part in aiding
drivers waiting to exit the minor road by
providing reference points or features by which
to judge the speed of drivers approaching on the
major road. 'This is particularly useful where a
major/minor junction is located in an open
landscape, where there is a lack of natural
reference points. Planting can also provide a
positive background to the road signs around
the junction, whilst visually uniting the various
component parts. It is important that a wider
view does not distract from the developing traffic
situation as the driver sees it.
pecialised planting, which might be more
ppropriate in an urban area, generally requires
reater maintenance effort if it is to be
uccessful. The preferred maintenance method
an automatic irrigation system connected to a
turn effluent main. Approval for any such
cheme must be sought from the Director of the
Civil Engineering Department and the Drainage
Division. If a return effluent main is unavailable,
care should be taken so that watering does not
require tankers to obstruct trafficked lanes at
any time.
. . ..
.-..
:.-..-
..
. .
SECTION 5
the opposite side of the roundabout to the point

of entry can, without restricting necessary
visibility, avoid distraction and confusion
caused by traffic movements of no concern to
a driver. Planting can provide a positive
background to chevron signs and direction
signs on the central island while visually uniting
the various vertical features and reducing any
appearance of clutter.
Generally the planting of roundabout central
islands less than 10m in diameter is
inappropriate as the need to provide driver
visibility leaves only a small central area
available. Such a restricted area of planting is
out of scale with the roundabout as a whole,
and becomes an incongruous "blob".
Recent experiments with a ring of black and
white paving laid in a chevron pattern inside the
central island perimeter at a gentle slope have
proved successful in improving the conspicuity
of central islands and they can be effective
from a safety point of view (Figure 5.1 4).
It is common to construct features such as
coffee pots etc. in roundabouts. They become
a focus for the traveller, and if designed and
positioned correctly will prove an asset to the
surroundings.
Lighting of central islands or any landscape
feature is important, though care should be
taken to avoid distraction or dazzle to drivers.
A well defined maintenance programme should

be developed if extensive planting is used to
ensure that such planting does not obscure
either opposing traffic or traff ic signs at any time.
In rural areas, planting should be restricted to
indigenous species and be related to the
surrounding landscape. In the desert, for
example, any planting of other than local
species would appear incongruous and
landscape treatment would normally be
restricted to ground modelling.
At roundabouts, the areas required for visibility
envelopes can be planted with species having a
low mature height, with higher and denser
species of bushes and trees towards the centre
of the island. Due allowance for the situation
that will develop with matured growth must be
made.
Sectlon X-X
Apart from the amenity benefits, the landscape

treatment' of roundabouts can have practical
advantages. By earth modelling, perhaps in
conjunction with planting, the presence of the
roundabout can be made more obvious to
approaching traffic. The screening of traffic on
January 1997
Figure 5.1 4
. - .....
Contrasting Chevron Markings

for Roundabouts
,..
Page 5/30

SECTION 6 JUNCTIONS
6.1
GENERAL
The scope of this section of 'the QHDM is to

identify the main types of majorlminor junction
which can be used in the design of new and the
improvement of existing roads.
- . . . .
SECTION 6
however, important to ensure that the minor

road traffic movements are still adequately
provided for. Spacing between consecutive
junctions is best considered in terms of the
minimum distance that allows traffic travelling
on the main road and traffic leaving it or joining
it, to do so in an easy, efficient and safe
manner.
Advice is given on the main factors which affect

the choice 'between different types of
majorlminor junction, on the siting of such
junctions and suitable types of layout.
In determining this distance, due consideration

must be given to:
To ensure a consistent approach to the design

of the majorlminor junctions, a series of
recommendations covering the geometric
design of the key elements of the junction, and
how these can. be best combined to produce a
good overall design, have also been included.
Weaving lengths for mergingldiverging

traffic flows .
Junctions are widely recognised as one of the

primary locations of accidents on #all roads.
Safety is therefore of paramount importance
during the development of any junction design.
A number of safety issues such as: visibility;
driver perception; signing and road markings;
traffic control and pedestrian access, need to
be considered as part of the design
development process. More detailed guidance
on these and other relevant factors is given
elsewhere in this section.
'
6.1.1 Junction Spacing
The frequency at which junctions are located on

a main. road .is usually a function of the
surrounding area and its current or future
development, i.e. rural or urban environment. In
general terms, urban environments are
characterised by a mixture of residential
properties, and commercial and industrial
developrnentsloutlets. There is usually a high
demand for through traffic and local traffic
movements. Consequently there is a high
demand for access across, onto and off of the
main road from the local road network.
In contrast, rural environments generally have
few residential properties that are interspersed
intermittently with industrial and commercial
developmentsioutlets.The demand on the main
road is for through traffic with local traffic
movements catered for chiefly by the local road
network. As demand for links with the main road
are lower than urban environments, junctions
occur much less frequently.
Design speeds
Horizontal and vertical geometry of the

main road for visibility
Provisions for turning traffic wishing to
cross, join or leave at the junction.
The minimum spacing between consecutive
simple T-junctions on access roads and service
roads is 80m, and across a staggered Tjunction 40ml Refer to Clause 6.7.15 for
additional information on stagger distance and
refer to Clause 7.4.9 for additional 'information
on weaving sections.
Consideration should also be given to the
spacing of the deceleration lanes and the
acceleration lanestof junctions along the main
carriageway.
Refer to Clause 6.14 for
information on divergelmerge distances. The
spacing of these junctions should relate to the
weaving characteristics of:
Traffic on the mainline
Traffic entering the mainline from the first
junction
Traffic leaving the main road to the
second junction.
When improving existing roads it may be
necessary to reduce the number of junctions on
the route. This may be achieved by:
. .
Provision of service roads to collect
minor roads .
~losure'ofminor roads and provision of
turning heads, refer to Section 5.
The spacing of junctions, particularly in urban

situations is critical to ensure that disruption to
traffic on the main road is rninirnised. It is
January 1997
Page 6/1
QATAR HlGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL
SECTION 6
.
6.1.2 Traffic Flows

An important factor that governs the choice of
junction type at a given location is the volume of
traffic that is currently using the main road and
side roads, and the predicted future traffic
demand. Before any detailed evaluation can be
made it is important to obtain the best estimate
of all the relevant traffic flows and turning
movements for the junction.
corner radii and lane widths that are likely to be

affected. Swept paths should be checked using
standard templates or a computer software
package.
The vehicle classification to be used in Qatar is
shown in Table 6.1.
Failure to make adequate provision is likely to
result in:
In situations where this data is not readily

available it will be necessary to undertake traffic
surveys, or use traffic modelling to predict the
likely traffic flow levels.
A reduction in the junction capacity as

the larger vehicles are forced to straddle
two traffic lanes to facilitate the turning
movement at the junction
The composition and turning movements of

traffic will. influence the geometric layout
adopted. A high proportion of heavy goods
vehicles for example will dictate the minimum
lane width and corner radii to be adopted at the
junction. A high proportion of tuming traffic may
require the provision . of a segregated or
dedicated turning lane at the junction; to ensure
that adequate through traffic capacity is
maintained.
Overrunning of kerbs
Predicted future traffic flows are important

because they:
Enable the design to be tailored to
provide sufficient capacity to meet the
future traffic flow demands
Enable a decision to be made to
constrain the traffic flows at the given
location for a particular reason
Identify the need to allow for current or
future junctions.
Guidance on acceptable traffic flows for junction
types and layouts are given throughout this
Section.
6.1.3 Design Vehicles
An obvious but often overlooked aspect of the

design of junctions is the type of vehicle that will
be using the junction. Different sizes and
classes of vehicle have varying swept paths
and turning circles. All junctions need to be
designed to allow the vehicle with the greatest
swept path, that will regularly use the junction to
turn in a safe and easy manner. For example a
36 tonne articulated lorry is unlikely to be a
regular user of a residential road. In this
example the most likely largest vehicle would
be a refuse vehicle or a school bus. Generally,
the design vehicle is likely to be a heavy goods,
.public senrice, or refuse vehicle and it is the
January 1997
Reduced visibility for other traffic

approaching or negotiating the junction.
These design principles should be extended to
the positioning of street furniture such as signs,
splitter islands, traffic signals and lighting
columns.
Allowance shall be made for the swept turning
paths of long vehicles where they can
reasonably be expected to use a junction.
Consideration shall also be given to the
manoeuvring characteristics of these vehicles in
the design of staggered junctions.
All of the geometric parameters given in this
section for use in the design of a majorlminor
junction have been developed to cater for a
16.5m long articulated vehicle, whose turning
width is greater than for most other vehicles that
regularly use these junctions.
The turning requirement of a 20.0m long
drawbar trailer combination are less onerous
regarding road width.
In cases where hardstrips are present, the
design vehicle is assumed to use 'these on
some turns, and at some simple junctions, it
may encroach into opposing traffic lanes.
Where buses or other long rigid vehicles form a
significant portion of total or peak time traffic,
and their tuming movements within these
dimensions would be awkward or present a
hazard or significant delay. Then corner radii
and lane widths should, be increased based on
the use of appropriate swept path templates.
Page 612
- :
:. . . .
..
;.
. .
sEcnoN6 .
.,;. I :
6.1.4 Siting of Junctions
L-
,-,
The siting of junctions for new build and

improvement schemes is very important.
Failure to choose a suitable location can reduce
the effective operation and safety of the
junction. It is essential to include engineering
considerations in the early planning stages to
help minimise poor land use.
Sites that should be avoided include:
Where the major road is on a sharp

curve and visibility may be impaired by
waiting vehicles
v
!
Where the minor road approaches are

skewed less than 70" or greater than
110" to the main road.
i
?
L-
,,
At the top or bottom of gradients greater

than 4% on the main road
Where the minor road approaches the
main road on an up or down gradient
greater than 2%
Where junction frequency is excessive.
The problems listed above while not exhaustive
cover the more commonly occurring situations,
and they can usually be overcome by
modifications to the horizontal and vertical
alignments.
In situations where, because of site constraints,
it is not practical to fully apply these principles,
then a comppmise will need to be established
that minimises the potential risks to drivers
approaching the junction. Measures such as
reduced speed. limits, alignment constraints,
additional signing and road markings can help
to minimise the potential hazards to the driver.
January 1997
Page 613
..
1 . .
... . .
, . .I
:""
SECTION 6
*;3
- * E
+
.-
z5:
.-
.-0 2
.+-
.-
3:z
;L -
.-
; L~
0:
N
+
C
.+
N
+
N
!%
Y
9
'tn
?
a;
p ;!
Y
.-
V)
V)
V)
.-
V)
.-
n
t
N
t
.i
.i
7
t
Y
.-
2 - P I
-" .-.-.g
: B
5
- E
.0
O
-e
.N
-9
CI
=pz a
ELr":tz
.-
F!
.+
IY
heqeq
.h
Iy
.-
a
N
PI
IY
.-
.-
0
0
0
.0
N
t
0
m
O
>
Y* V
*
t
) V )
n
C
0
0
w
F
V)
V)
C
10
C
V)
V)
.-
X
O
5
3
U
-0
0
0
0
0
t::
0
0
.-
f
0
0.
I-
-m
U
i
?
E
rr
4
!-i
-
0
%
L
1
-*
I-
4N
2I
?
-m
-
I-r
"
l
'0
-f
2
(I)
310
1113
rruaro~/somg
rlo~rrr
s p o o l rut-qprrj
raioluan s p o o l h r r ~
Table 6.1. Vehicle Classification (Sheet 1 of 2)
January 1997
Page 614
Table 6.1
SECTION 6
Vehicle Classification (Sheet 2 of 2)
January 1997
Page 615

TYPES OF JUNCTION
6.2
There are seven basic types of junctions that

should be considered for use.
There are advantages and disadvantages to
each of the seven types and the engineer
should carefully consider the suitability of each
type for the intended location and purpose.
The seven basic junction types are as follows:
SECTION 6
6.2.4 Skew or Y-Junction
This type of junction is an at-grade junction of

two roads, where the minor road approaches
the major road at an oblique angle. In a similar
manner to the T- junction, traffic control is
provided by "Give Way" or 'Stopn line road
markings in conjunction with "Stopn or "Give
Way" signing on the minor road.
As skew angle to the main road.decreases,the
junction becomes less safe.
6.2.5 Roundabouts
The T-Junction, of which there are five main

variants, is an at-grade junction of two roads
where the minor road terminates at the major
road at right angles. It is the most common type
of approach road junction and is a suitable
solution for coping with most traffic flow
requirements. Traffic control is generally
provided by "Give Way" or "Stopn signsfroad
markings on the minor approach but could
include traffic control on all approaches.
In certain urban situations where traffic,
pedestrian or safety requirements dictate,
signalization may be requir'ed. The type of
traffic control is determined through a "warrant
analysisn (refer to the Qatar Traffic Manual).
'6.2.2: Simple Crossroads
The crossroad is an at-grade junction of two

roads that cross approximately at right angles.
Simple crossroads are not safe junctions
because of the high number of traffic movement
conflicts that can occur at the same location.
For this reason, the use of crossroads is not
recommended. A safer solution, location
permitting, is to provide a roundabout or signal
control.
6.2.3 Staggered Junction
A staggered junction is an at-grade junction of

three roads, where the major road is continuous
through the junction. The minor roads intersect
the major road forming two separated Tjunctions on opposing sides of the main road.
A roundabout is a special form of at-grade

junction characterised by a one-way circulatory
carriageway around a central island located at
the intersection of a maximum of six roads.
Traffic flows around the central island on the
circulatory carriageway in an anti-clockwise
direction until it reaches the required exit point.
Entry onto the roundabout from the approach
roads is controlled by the appearance of gaps in
the circulating traffic flow. Traffic wishing to
enter the roundabout must give way to-traffic
already on the circulatory carriageway.
6.2.6 Grade Separated Interchange
This type of junction removes the principle

vehicle conflict by the provision of grade
separation between some of the turning
movements. These junctions are complex and
include extensive connecting roads and loops.
Grade Separated Interchanges are discussed in
Section 7 of this manual.
6.2.7 Traffic Signdls
Whilst not strictly a junction type, traffic signals

may be implemented on a number of junction
types to control the movement of traffic.
Junctions may be specifically designed for
signal control or signal control may be added a
later stage.
The design of physical features of this type of
junction, excluding the signal . design, are
covered within this manual. An introduction to
signalized junctions is given in Clause 6.1 6.
This type of junction is the preferred alternative

to a simple crossroad. However, should future
traffic volumes be expected to increase, then a
roundabout or signalisation may be preferable
from the outset at certain locations.
January 1997
:
Page 616

6.3
SECTION 6
JUNCTION SELECTION
6.3.2 Continuity of Standard
The selection of a junction type at a given

location is important for operational, economic
and safety reasons.
The engineer should carefully select the
junction type for the location in accordance with
the considerations listed below.
However, in some circumstances, local
conditions such as driver behaviour may also
influence the engineers choice of junction type
for a particular location. Where it is felt that
drivers may ignore 'Stop" or "Give Way" signs.
a different or higher type of jllnction could be
selected.
Apart from the basic selection considerations
given below, the engineer should also consider
the possibility of planning benefits to be gained
by the selection of junction types at locations
that promote the use of the roads in the
hierarchy defined in this manual.
The following points should be considered:
6.3.1 Status of lntersectlng Roads
~estrictionsare placed on the categories of

road that may meet. As a result, for any given
permitted combination of road types, only
certain junction types will be appropriate for
use. Table 6.2 below outlines acceptable
carriageway and junction combinations.
In the interests of safety, the sequences of

junctions on a section of road or neighbouring
roads of sirr~ilarstandard should not involve
many different layout types. A length of major
road comprising roundabouts, single lane
dualling, ghost islands and simple priority
junctions would inevitably create confusion and
uncertainty for drivers, and may result in
accidents. The safest schemes are usually
straightforward, containing no surprises for the
driver.
6.3.3 Junction Capacity
The form that a junction takes is greatly

influenced by the volume of traffic predicted to
pass through it. All junction layouts will need to
be analysed to ensure they have sufficient
capacity. This analysis should be carried out
using a standard software package (eg.
ARCADY for roundabouts and PICADY for
majorhinor junctions).
Junction selection by capacity is given in Figure
6.1. It is based on capacity and on UK;
congestion acceptance levels. Engineers may
consider that higher standard facilities should
be provided than that indicated by the
nomograph for operational or safety reasons.
The detailed geometry of junction types relating
to capacity is given in Clause 6.7.
Minor
Major
7.3m
CarriageWay
Rural
7.3m Carriageway
11.3m Carnageway
Rural
Rural
Dual-2
Rural
Rural
Urban
T,Ts,R
T,Ts,R
T,Ts,R
T,Ts,R
Rural
T,Tu,R,I
Rural
Dual9
RBI
T,Ts,V,R,I
Urban
T,Ts,V,R,I
T,Tu,R,I
Urban
Ts, R,I
RBI
T,Ts,V,R,I
T-Junction
T-Junctionwith Signals
Tu
Table 6.2
Urban
Rural
T;R
Urban
Urban
T
Ts
Urban
Dual9
11.3m
CarriageWay
Key:
Urban
Dual-2
RBI
T,Ts,V,R,I
Roundabout
T-Junction with U-Turn
Ts, RBI
I
V
Ts, RBI
Interchange
Service Road
Possible Junction Types for Different Major Road Carriageway Configurations
January 1997
Page 6/7
.-
V)c
(A~M-ow)
SECTION 6
.r
l a w (oL
In
x MOlA aVOU UONIW

----
Figure 6.1
January 1997
Junction Selection By Capacity
Page 618
6.4
MAJORIMINOR
GENERAL
JUNCTIONS
SECTION 6
6.6
MAJORIMINOR JUNCTION TYPES
6.6.1 The Simple T-Junction
'This section gives advice and standards for the

geometric design of majorlminor junctions with
regard to traffic operation and safety.
6.5
SAFETY
AT
JUNCTIONS
MAJOFUMINOR
Vehicular and pedestrian accidents mainly

occur at majorlminor junctions. More accidents
occur in the urban environment than the rural.
These accidents are mainly associated with
poorly judged left turn movements onto and
from the major road and with incautious
overtaking manoeuvres.
.. .
Various methods to enhance safety can be

introduced at majorlminor junctions.
The
engineer should review each junction on an
,
individual basis.
Ghost islands and single lane dualling (physical
islands) to shelter left turning traffic and
discourage overtaking are discussed in Sections
6.6 and 6.7: Other safety measures that could
be adopted are as follows:
The use of road markings, double white

lines, raised rib markings, narrow central
hatching, block paving, ceramic studs,
refuge islands with keep right bollards or
different coloured surfacing to discourage
overtaking manoeuvres on the major
road
Skid resistant road surfaces
At urban locations where pedestrian
movements occur, pedestrian barriers,
central refuge islands and at some
. locations, pedestrian crossings and
controlled pedestrian crossings
At some locations where safety is an
issue, the majorlminor junction may
require traffic signals.
In addition, in rural areas, problems occur with

driver perception of the termination of the minor
road. Drivers at night, on unlit rural roads are
mostly involved with this type of misjudgment.
The engineer shall ensure that there are no
physical obstructions to the path of such a
vehicle.
January 1997
Figure 6.2
Simple T-Junction
A simple T-Junction is without any ghost or

physical islands in the major road, and without
channelizing islands in the minor road
approach. Refer to Figure 6.2.
Simple T-Junctions are appropriate for most
minor junctions on single carriageway roads, but
not dual carriageways. For new rural junctions,
they shall only be used when the design flow on
the minor road does not exceed 300 vehicles
AADT (two-way) and on the major 'road does
not exceed 13000 vehicles AADT (two-way).
At existing rural and urban junctions upgrading
to a left turning facility, ghost island or single
lane dualling should be considered when safety
considerations dictate or where the minor road
flow exceeds 500 vehicles AADT (two-way).
6.6.2 T-Junction with Ghost Island
A T-Junction with widening on the major road to

accommodate a ghost island and an extra
central lane for turning traffic. The minor road
approach should also have a channelizing
island to direct vehicles to the correct position
for turning movements. Refer to Figure.6.3.
Ghost islands will enhance safety of the junction
by giving shelter to left turning traffic from
opposing vehicles and vehicles approaching
from behind.
Measures to discourage
overtaking at ghost island widening could be the
use of physical traffic' islands, double white
lines, different coloured surfacing and ceramic
studs.
Page 619
Figure 6.3
SECTION 6
T-Junction with Ghost Island
Figure 6.4"' T-Junction with Single Lane DuallingfPhysicalIsland

Ghost islands, however, should not be
positioned where overtaking opportunity is
restricted either side of the junction because
drivers may use the wide ghost island hatching
and central lane as .a place to overtake. If a
ghost island has to be positioned at these
locations then an alternative such as single lane
dualling should be considered.
Ghost island junctions should not be used
where traffic tuming left out of the minor road
needs to make the manoeuvre in two stages.
This can bccur when the major road flow
exceeds 18000 AADT (two-way).
6.6.3 T-Junction with Single Lane Dualling
Single lane dualling (physical islands) can be

used on rural single carriageway roads to
shelter left turning traffic on the major road and
prevent overtaking. It can also be used where
'the traffic turning left out of the minor road
needs to make the manoeuvre in two stages.
Refer to Figure 6.4.
*
the major route to speed up through the junction

where slow vehicles may be crossing. Care
needs to be taken when siting the junction.
The single lane dualling carriageway width is
6m,where 4m is the running carriageway and
there are Im hard strips on both sides. Some
drivers may try to overtake in this width and
hatching of the Im strips will discourage such
manoeuvres.
There may be certain conditions when single
lane dualling could be misinterpreted by drivers:
Where a length of road contains
alternating single and dual carriageway
sections
Where single lane dualling is proposed
within 3 kilometres from the end of a long
length of dual carriageway.
In these cases, other forms of junctions should
be considered.
Single lane dualling does, however, bring in

other safety issues. With the improved highway
layout there may be a tendency for drivers on
January 1997
-.
Page 6/10
Figure 6.5
T-Junction with Dual Carriageway with Median Opening (Signalized Only)
Figure 6.6
T-Junction on a Dual Carriageway with Carriageway Separation
6.6.4 T-Junctlon on a Dual Carriageway with

Median Opening (Signalized)
'These T-Junctions may be used on two or three

lane dual carriageways. This layout shall only
be implemented with traffic signals. Refer to
Figure 6.5.
Short lengths of dual carriageway just to
incorporate a junction should not be provided.
be incorporated. The turning facilities should be

provided nearby at another junction. The
nearby junction may be grade separated, a
roundabout, signalization or a U-Turn where
traffic speed and traffic flow conditions are
different. Refer to Figure 6.6. .Acceleration and
deceleration lanes from and to the minor road
should be designed in accordance with through
traffic volumes and speeds.
6.6.6 Crossroads
On continuous dual carriageways the median

width is usually between 2 and 8m. If required,
this width can be widened to provide space for
a left turn lane and waiting space for vehicles
turning left into the minor road.
6.6.5 Taunction on a Dual carriagewaywith
Cartiageway Sepatatlon
On dual carriageways, the left turn manoeuvre

from the minor road is preventedby the median,
unless the minor road warrants signalization to
As discussed earlier in Clause 6.2.2, simple

crossroads are not recommended. Staggered
junctions are always considered a much safer
alternative, especially if a significant proportion
of the flow on the 'minor roads is cross
movement. In residential areas, consideration
should be given to closing off one of the arms of
the crossroads to create a preferred simple TJunction.
January 1997
Page 6111
n o b u y y u l uu JUI I W ~ I W I I WVI I I
~1 I
3 ~a
3 I I I ~ J V I I WSIU
~IUIIIU
WI I
passing through the junction with opposed TJunctions on either side. figures 6.7 to 6.1 1
show variations of staggered junction layouts.
r l I=
III~JWI
luau. rttzctzi
ru r
u.r
~ y u i ~
RighULeft Stagger
A simple righffleft staggered junction should not
be considered.
However, the rightneft
staggered junction with ghost island or single
lane dualling would be an alternative. Refer to
Figures 6.10 and 6.1 1.
LettlRIght Stagger
The lefttright stagger is preferred because the
two left turning traffic streams on the major road
Figure 6.7
Simple LefVRight Staggered Junction
Figure 6.8
LefVRight Staggered Junction with Ghost Island
Figure 6.9 LefVRight Staggered Junction with Single Lane Dualling
January 1997
. -.
. . . .
......
..
. . . . ...
Page
6/12
-
. -i
. .
'
'
SECTION 6
Figure 6.10 RightLeft Staggered Junction with Ghost Island

...
-
. . . .
Figure 6.1 1 RightLeft Staggered Junction with Single Lane Dualling

6.6.8 Right and Left Hand Skew Junction
Figure 6.12 shows a left hand skew junction

.with a ghost island; The junction could also be
right handed.
This form of junction can be a solution when an

existing minor road joins the major road at a
skew angle. It is sometimes called a YJunction.
The existing junction is improved on safety
grounds by channelizing the minor road with
islands and road markings, and connecting it to
the major road at right angles for optimum*
visibility.
Typically skew angles of 70' or greater do not
require straightening to approach the main road
at 90'. As skew angles become smaller a large
area is required in order to achieve an effective
90' junction.. . .
,
Other combinations o i skew junctions could

combine staggered junctions, single lane
dualling and dual carriageways.
Figure 6.12 Left Hand Skew Junction

- ....,
January 1997
!
Page 6/13
*
SECTION 6
.
6.7 -MAJORIMINOR
ELEMENTS
This section outlines the geometric design

elements to be considered in the design of
major/minor junctions. Many of the elements
are dealt with separately, and the engineer
should work systematically through the design
procedure prior to assembling the component
parts. This is an iterative process, and it may
be necessary to alter part of the junction design
covered previously in order to achieve a
satisfactory design.
Major Road
Drivers approaching a majortminor junction
along the major road approaches shall be able
to see the minor road entry from a distance
corresponding to 1.5 times the stopping sight
distance (SSD) for the design speed of the
major road as described in Section 2. This
intetvisibility allows drivers on the major road to
be aware of traffic entering from the minor road
in time for them to be able to slow down and
stop safely if necessary.
6.7.2 Design Speed
When considering geometric standards for the

design speed of the major/minor road junctions,
it is the design speed of the .major road that
governs.
The concept of adequate visibility to make safe

turning movements also applies to vehicles
turning left into the minor road from the major
road.
Minor Road
Minor road traffic has to approach the junction
and join or cross the major road when there are
gaps in the major road traffic streams. It is
therefore essential that minor road drivers have
adequate visibility in each direction to see the
junction layout and oncoming major road traffic
in sufficient time to permit them to make their
manoeuvres safely.
Clear visibility on the approach to, at and

travelling through a junction is essential for the
safe and efficient use of that junction.
L.
In determining the correct visibility

requirements for a junction, the engineer must
consider both the layout of the junction and the
vehicles that will use it. The visibility and
intetvisibility requirements provided within this
clause are related to the design speed of the
major road and little benefit is to be gained by
increasing them. However, each junction must
be considered on a site-specific basis with an
assessment made of additional visibility to be
provided due to factors such as:
The principle of providing the required visibility

for drivers approaching the junction from the
minor road has three distinct features (refer to
Figure 6.1 3):
W: Approaching drivers should have
unobstructed visibility of the junction from a
distance corresponding to the stopping sight
distance (SSD) for the design speed of the
minor road. This allows drivers time to slow
down safely at the junction, or stop, if this is
necessary. Where a "Give Way" or "Stop" sign
is proposed, the visibility envelope shall be
widened to include the sign.
Width of major road to be crossed

a.
Traffic control on the minor approach

road
Turning movements to be made at the
junction
Gradient of
departures
the
Z:
A driver approaching the junction should
be able to see clearly the junction form and
those peripheralelements of the junction layout.
This provides the driver with an idea of the
junction form, possible movements and
conflicts, and possible. required action before
reaching the major road. This point is called the
'2' point which is 15m back along the centreline
of the minor road measured from the
continuation of the line of the nearside edge of
the running carriageway of the major road (not
from the continuation of the back of the major
road hardstrip, if this is present).
approaches and
Type of vehicle that will be using the

junction, eg. large, slow speed vehicles
require additional visibility.
As well as having adverse safety implications,
poor visibility reduces the capacity of turning
movements.
January 1997
.. .
.,
Drivers approaching a major/minor junction

from both the major road and the minor road
shall have unobstructed visibility in accordance
with the following clauses. The envelope of
visibility for driver's eye height is as described in
Section 2.
JUNCTION
6.7.1 General
6.7.3 Visibility
,.
. .
Page 6/14
X, Y: The distance back along the minor road

from which the full visibility is measured is
known as the 'x' distance. It is measured back
along the centreline of the minor road from the
continuation of the line of the nearside edge of
the runningcarriageway of the major road. The
'x' distance shall be desirably 1Om.
The 'x' distance, from which full 'y' distance

visibility is provided, should preferably be not
more than 1Om as this induces high minor road
approach speeds into the junction, and leads to
excessive landtake.
Similarly, although the 'y' distance should
always be provided, there is little advantage in
increasing it, as this too can induce high
approach speeds and take the attention of the .
minor road driver away from the immediate
junction conditions. Increased visibility should
not be provided to increase the capacities of
various turning movements.
From this point an approaching driver shall be

able to see clearly points to the left and right on
the nearer edge of the major road running
carriageway at a distance given in Table 6.3,
measured from its intersection. with the
centreline of the minor road. This is called the
'y' distance. Relaxations are not available for
this distance.
These visibility standards apply to new junctions,

and to improvements to existing junctions.
If the line of vision lies partially within the major

road carriageway, it shall be made tangential to
the nearer edge of the major road running
carriageway, as shown in Figure 6.14.
If the major road is one way, a single visibility

splay in the direction of approaching traffic will
suffice. If the minor road serves as a one-way
exit from the major road, no visibility splays will
be required, provided that forward visibility for
turning vehicles is adequate.
In difficult circumstances, the 'x8'distancemay

be taken as a relaxation from 10m to 7.5m for
lightly trafficked simple junctions, and in
exceptionally difficult circumstances, to 5.0m
back from the nearer edge of the major road
running carriageway. In some urban locations
where only light vehicles are involved, the 'x'
distance can be further reduced to 23m.
Design Speed
of Major Road
(kph)
'y' Distance
140
120
100
80
70
60
50
< 50
350
295
215
160
120
90
70
50
tote :hail cases the preferred 'x' distance is 1

with Clause 6.7.3.
~abie
6.3
Vehicles parked within splay lines will obstruct

visibility. Parking and access should be
designed to prevent this. Care should also be
taken in the placing of signs, landscaping and
street furniture within the visibility splay areas to.
ensure that their obstructive effect is minimised
(m)
lm.
Minimum 'x'
Distance
(m)
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
5.0 .
2.5
The minimum 'x' distances given shall only be used in difficult circumstances, in accordanc
Minimum 'x' and 'y' Visibility Distances from the Minor Road
I B aamf
~ # I QQ7
Darrs
CIIK

. *-
'
..
SECTION 6
Lines over which unobstructed

visibility should be provided
------.
a.
........
--.-.L
---
-+-----A
-.
z=15m
.. .
:.I '.
:I:
..
;l:
#
.-
'x' Distance
'y' Distance
w Minimum Stopping Distance (SSD)
for Approach Road Design Speed
y
I
I
Figure 6.1 3 Visibility Standards
it
------Tangent edge of carriageway
x 'x' Distance
y 'y' Distance
Figure 6.14 Visibility Standards with a Curved Major Road
January 1997
Page 6/16
SECTION 6
6.7.4 Corner Radii
For simple junctions, where no provision is to

be made for large goods vehicles or buses, it is
recommendedthat the minimum circular corner
radius shouid'be 6m in urban areas and 10m in
rural areas. Where provision is to be made for
large goods vehicles or . buses, the
recommended circular corner radius is shown
in Table6.4 and Figure 6.1 5. .
,
These radii' only apply where there are no

divergetapers or lanes, or merge tapers. Refer
to Sections 6.7.13 and 6.7.14. /
Alternatively, where large goods vehicles
comprise a significant proportion of the turning
movements, use of the compound curve shown
inFigure 6.1 6 is
.. - recommended.
.
b
Junction
TW
Taper
Rate
T
Length of
Taper (rn)
L
Corner
Radius (m)
R
Urban
Simple
Junction
1:s
30
10
Rural
Simple
Junction
1:lO
25
15
Ghost
Island
Junction
Staggered
Junction
All Other
i-
Table 6.4
20
Circular Corner Radii
!
!
!
R = Corner Radlus
L Length of Taper
T = Taper Rate
v.
Figure 6.1 6 Design of a Compound Curve
6.7.5 Carrlageway Widths
All of the geometric parameters defined in this

clause can be seen for the three main types of
majorlminor junctions in Figures 6.1 7 6.1 9.
Through ~ a n e s
At ghost and physical island junctions, the
through lane in each direction shall be 3.65m
wide, exclusive of edgestrips.
At dual carriageway junctions, the through lane

widths remote from the junction shall be
continued through the junction.
Minor Road Approaches
On a minor road approach of nominal width
7.3m, where a channelizing island is provided,
both lanes shall be 4.0m wide at the point where
the hatched markings surrounding the
channelizing island begin. (Refer to Figure
6.1 7).
At the point where the channelizing island

commences, the widths on either side shall be
as follows:
a)
L
.-
Figure 6.1 5 Circular Corner Radii
I
i
b)
On the approach to the major road, 4.0m

wide for a ghost island or 4.5m wide for
single lane dualling or a dual
carriageway, exclusive of hardstrips. If
the approach on the minor road consists
of two lanes, this dimension shall be
5.5m.
On the exit from the major road, 4.5m
wide for a ghost island, or 5.0m wide for
single . lane dualling or a dual
carriageway, exclusive of hardstrips.
-.
\I
January 1997
Page 6/17
SECTION 6

.. .I
If there are no channelizing islands igthe minor
road, the nominal approach $dth should
continue up until the tangent point-afthe curve
to join the edge of the major road running
carriageway.
a. ?.am Womkrl Wldlh

b. 4.0m k AH Carer
4.5m For Shgla Lana Oualllnfi
of Ova1 Canlagoway
Where the minor road approach is a dual

carriagewa$3t, should be either reduced to a
single cahageway before the junction (see
Figure 6.1 8), or signalized.
Where 16.5m long articulated vehicles (eg.
Class 8) are anticipated, but are likely to form
only a very small percentage of the total number
of vehicles and where conflicts will not occur on
bends, the carriageway widths should be
designedto cater for the lower class vehicle that
will regularly use the junction with an additional
1m allowance for variation in vehicle position.
Alternatively, figures from Table 6.5 could be
used.
An articulated car transporter will turn in the
widths shown, but where provision is to be
made for this type of vehicle, street furniture
above 2.5m high should be set back at least 1m
from the edge of the minor road carriageway at
the bellmouth (this does not apply for
channelizing islands) to allow for the projection
of the trailer over the tractor cab.
Figure 6.17 Minor Road

.
-..
,
Approach Reduced to Single Cartiageway
#
F
Figure 6.1 8 Minor Road Dual Garriageway Approaches
January 1997
Approach Incorporating U-turn Facility
rm'
?-
Page 6/18
QATAR H~GHWAYDESIGN MANUAL
SECTION 6
Carriageway Widths Around Comers

Where carriageways are taken around corners
and short radius curves, added width shall be
provided to cater for the swept path-of largei
goods vehicles and the "cut in" of trailer units.
Table 6.5 shows the recommended minimum
widths for various nearside curve radii based on
the Class 12 design vehicle. For radii above
1OOm, the standards set out in Table 3.5 shall
be used.
Inside
ComerICurve
Radius
(m)
10
=..
On single lane sections greater than 50m in

length, the allowance given in Table 6.5 shall be
made'for broken down vehicles. However, the
engineer must be careful not to use' this
additional width in locations that may encourage .
2 lane flow to develop, eg. at intersection right
turn lanes.
Single Lane Width

(Excluding Edgestrip
Pmklon)
(m)
Slngle Lane Width with

Space to Pass Stationary
Vehlcles (Including
Edgestrip Provision)
(m)
lnslde Lane
Outslde Lane
Total
8.4
10.9
8.4
6.5
14.9
7.1
Two Lane Width for One Way or Two Way Traffic

(Excluding Edgestrip Provision)
(m)
7.1
9.6
6.0
13.1
20
6.2
8.7
6.2
5.6
11.8
25
15
5.7
8.2
5.7
5.2
30
5.3
7.8
5.3
5.0
40
4.7
7.2
4.7
4.6
9.3
50
4.4
6.9
4.4
4.3
8.7
75
4.0
6.5
4.0
4.0
8.0
100
3.8
6.3
3.8
3.8
7.6
10.9
10.3
'
Table 6.5 Minimum Corner and Curve Radii and Carriageway Widths
b
e
-----------
x-----------------c. Through Lane Width (6.7.5)
a. Turning Length (+Queuing Length

if required, see clause 6.7.8)
d. Turning Lane Width (6.7.6)
b. Deceleration Length (6.7.10)

e. Direct Taper Length (6.7.9)
Figure 6.1 9 Major/Minor Junction with a Ghost Island
January 1997
Page 6/19
6.7.6 Central Islands Major Road
Ghost Islands
For new junctions, the desirable width of a ghost
island turning lane shall be 4.0m, but a
relaxation to 3.0m is permissible. At urban and
suburban junctions, it can sometimes be
advantageous to use a greater width not
exceeding 5.0m to allow a degree of shelter in
the centre of the road for large goods vehicles
turning left from the minor road to execute the
turn in two separate manoeuvres.
For improvements to existing junctions, where
space is very limited, a reduced width may be
unavoidable. The width of ghost islands shall
not be less than 2.5m.
At rightneft staggered junctions, the deceleration
lengths would overlap but the width of the ghost
island shall not be increased to make them lie
side by side. The starting points of the left
turning section shall be joined by a straight line,
which will mean at higher design speeds, the full
width of the turning lane will not be developed
until the end of the diverging section (as shown
in Figure 6.10). The width of the turning lane
shall be the full width of the ghost island.
Physlcal Islands
At single lane dualling and dual carriageway
junctions, the width of the central island at the
crossing point shall be 10.0m, including median
hardstrips. This width will shelter most large
goods vehicles turning left from the minor road,
except for very long vehicles. In exceptional
circumstances where use by very long vehicles
is expected and a roundabout is not feasible, a
width of 14.0m including hardstrips will be
needed to shelter the largest articulated
vehicles (16.5m) and a width of 16.5m including
hardstrips will be required to shelter drawbar
trailer combinations (20.0m). The minimum
width of a physical island, usually located at the
end of the direct taper shall be 3.5m.
Crossing left turn movements within the central
island can usefully be separated by physical or
painted guide islands set out with road markings
so that the number of traffic conflicts at any
point is reduced. Painted guide islands'can be
enhanced by the use of coloured surfacing or
textures within them, block paving, road
marking or traffic studs. However, designs
which have numerous small traffic islands
should be avoided as they are confusing and
tend to be ignored.
SECTION 6
one time. This can lead to greater safety. For

the separation to be effective, the junction must
be large enough for drivers to identify in
adequate time those vehicles which will conflict
with their,intended path and those that will not.
If this is not so, gaps in the flow cannot be used
effectively by traffic entering the junction.
Central Island Tapers
6.7.7
Central islands, whether for ghost islands

(Figure 6.20) or single lane dualling (Figure
6.21) should normally be developed
symmetrically about the centreline of the major
road to their maximum width at the tapers
shown in Table 6.6. The maximum island width
should continue through the junction to the
tangent point of the minor road radius and the
edge of the major road carriageway.
Design Speed
(kph)
Taper for Ghost

Island and Single
Lane Dualling
Taper for
Dual
Cartiageways
1:20
1:20
1:20
1:25
1:30
1:40
1:40
1:40
1:45
1:50
1:55
1:60
50
60
70
. 80
100
120
,140
Table 6.6
--
--
Tapers for Central Islands (1:T)
-1
..
- 0
~\\~ixX!!=--R
T. Ghost Island Taper (1:T)

R. Rounding (50mR Typical)
I
Figure 6.20 Ghost Island Development

For single lane dualling, the central island
should be introduced by means of hatched
markings until there is sufficient width to
accommodate the appropriate sign on the nose
of the physical island with the required running
clearances to it.
Preventing or minimising conflicts by separation

means that drivers are only faced with simple
decisions on their choices of movement at any
. January 1997
Page 6/20

-1
6.7.1 0
Left Turning Lanes
Left turning tapers and lanes in the centre of

ghost islands, and single lane dualling are
especially useful as they provide a convenient
space for vehicles to slow down and wait before
turning off the major road. These junction
layouts can also assist the left turn out of the
minor road.
T. Physical lrland Taper (1:T)
Figure 6.21 Physical Island Development

6.7.8
The overall length of a left turning lane provided

at ghost island, single lane dualling and dual
carriageway junctions will depend on the major
road design speed and the gradient.
Turning Length In Median (a)
The turning length is provided to allow long

vehicles to position themselves correctly for the
left turn. The. turning length should be a
minimum of 10m long irrespective of the type of
junction, design speed or gradient, measured
from the centreline of the minor road. It is
shown on Figure 6.1 9.
Where capacity calculations indicate that for
significant periods of time there will be vehicles
queuing to turn left from the major road, the
turning length shall be increased to allow for a
reservoir queuing length to accommodate such
vehicles. For simplified calculation of storage
length refer to Section 5.10.
Where reservoir provision appears desirable at
a junction with ghost islands, consideration shall
be given to providing physical islands instead to
- afford greater protection to turning traffic.
Where site conditions prevent this, the reservoir
space may still be provided.
6.7.9
Direct Taper Length (e)
The direct taper length is the length over which

the width of a left turning lane is developed. For
ghost islands and physidal islands in single lane
dualling and dual carriageway junctions, left
turning lanes shall be introduced by means of a
direct taper whose length is part of the
deceleration length and depends on the design
speed. This taper length is given in Table 6.7
and illustrated in Figure 6.1 9.
Design Speed
(kph)
Direct Taper
Length e (m)
50
60
70
80
100
120
140
5
5
15
15
25
30
35
Table 6.7
Design
Speed
(kph)
Down Gradient
Up Gradient
'
50
60
70
80
100
120
Table 6.8
0.4%
25
25
40
55
80
110
Above
4%
25
25
25
40
55
80
04%
Above
4%
25
25
40
55
80
110
25
25
40
55
80
110
Deceleration Length b (m) for

Ghost Island and Single Lane
Dualling
Design
Speed
(kph)
04%
Above
4%
0-4%
Above
4%
50
60
70
80
100
120
140
25
25
40
55
80
110
150
25
25
25
40
55
80
110
25
25
40
55
80
110
150
25
40
55
80
110
150
200
Table 6.9
Up Gradient
Down Gradient
Deceleration Length
Dual Carriageways
-b
(m) for
The deceleration length can be seen on Figure

6.1 9. The deceleration length is based on the
assumption that vehicles will slow by one
design speed step on the trunk road before
entering the length. The deceleration rate on
the level is assumed to be 0.3759. 'There is no .
reaction time as this is a planned manoeuvre.
Direct Taper Length e
It consists of a turning length, as described in

Clause 6.7.8, and a deceleration length. This
component shall be provided in accordance
with Tables 6.8 and 6.9, in which the gradient is
the average for the 500m length before the
minor road.

Median Openings
6.7.1 1
The opening in the median for single lane

dualling at the crossing point shall be 15.0m
wide. . .
Problems have been experienced with driver
confusion over priority within the median,
particularly where the width of the physical
island has been increased to cater for large
goods vehicles.
SECTION 6
illustrated in Figure 6.29. Opposite the refuge
openings, dropped kerbs shall be installed to
aid pedestrians.
6.7.1 3
Nearside Diverging Tapers and

Auxiliary Lanes
Measures to regularise the priority arrangement

within the median opening include channelizing
the central area.
Nearside Dlverging Taper

Major road traffic, when slowing down on the
approach to a junction in order to turn into a
minor road, may impede following vehicles that
are not turning. It is helpful, therefore,to permit
the divergence of the two streams at a small
angle by the provision of.a nearside diverging
taper.
Consideration may also be given in these

circumstances to introducing differential
coloured surfacing or studs to enhance 'the road
markings or indicate the area of allowable
overrun for large goods vehicles. However,
such coloured surfacing should also be visible
at night and in poor weather conditions.
Nearside diverging tapers are of less benefit in

terms of operation and safety than left turning
lanes because the right turn from the major
road does not cross an opposing traffic stream
and is rarely.impeded. However, nearside
diverging tapers should always be considered
for higher speed roads or on gradients.
Traffic Islands
6.7.1 2
,
Traffic islands can be ghosted or kerbed

(physical) and should be provided in the mouth
of the minor road at major/minor junctions
(except at simple junctions) to:
Give guidance to long vehicles carrying
out turning movements
Channelize intersecting or merging traffic
streams
Warn drivers on the minor road that a
junction is ahead
Provide shelter for vehicles waiting to
carry out manoeuvres, such as waiting to
turn left
Assist pedestrians.
Physical traffic islands should be positioned in
urban situations only, shall have an area of at
least 4.5 square metres, and shall be treated to
be conspicuous in poor lighting conditions.
Smaller areas. should be defined by road
markings. The risk of overriding the islands can
be reduced by offsetting the approach nose
from the edge of the vehicle paths., ,
Where a traffic island serves as a refuge for
pedestrians, it shall be at least 1.5m wide and
have openings in the centre at carriageway level
to make the crossing easier for pedestrians (see
Clause 5.12). The recommended layout and
details of the design of channelizing islands are
January 1997
Nearside diverging tapers shall not be provided

at simple junctions (Clause 6.6.1). They shall
be provided at junctions between major and
minor roads where the design speed for the
major road is 80 kph or above. They shall be
provided at other junctions in the following
circumstances for traffic in the design year:
Where the volume of right turning traffic
is greater than 600 vehicles AADT (oneway)*
Where the percentage of large goods
vehicles is greater than 20%, and the
volume of right turning traffic is greater
than 450 vehicles AADT (one-way).
Where the junction is on an up or down
gradient of greater than 4% at any design
speed and the volume of right turning
traffic is greater than 450 vehicles AADT
(one-way). .
Where the major road traffic flow is greater than
7000-8000 AADT (one-way), then the figures
given above for turning traffic should be halved.
Nearside diverging tapers shall not be provided
when the minor road is on the inside of a curve
where traffic in the diverging lane could
adversely affect visibility for drivers emerging
from the minor road. They shall generally not
be provided where the design speed for the
major road is less than 80 kph nor where the
cost of provision is excessive. In this case,
adequate warning of the junction ahead must
be provided.
QATAR H~GHWAYDESIGN MANUAL

Nearside diverging tapers shall be formed by a
direct increase to a width of 4.0m contiguous to
the corner Into the minor road. A radius of at
least 20m should be used where the main road
design speed is 8Okph and at least 40m above
this speed. The width around this corner will
depend on the radius selected. The length of
this lane is defined as being from the beginning
of the taper up to the start of the radius, as
shown in Figure 6.22.
In this instance, consideration should be given

to the provision of a nearside auxiliary lane
instead of a taper for diverging traffic. The
provision of an auxiliary lane, as shown in
Figure 6.23, would allow turning traffic to move
off the mainline prior to any deceleration.
The auxiliary lane should be of sufficient length
to allow for the speed change from the major
road to the turn into the minor road and would
not normally be less than 80m. Its length may
also depend on any need for reservoir space for
turning traffic. The auxiliary lane should
commence with a direct taper (Figure 6.23), the
length of which shall be determined from Table
6.7. The taper should be that used for a left
turning lane for a single lane dualling or dual
carriageway junction, with the. relevant
deceleration length given in Tables 6.8 and 6.9.
The desireble length of a nearside diverging

taper shall be that of the relevant deceleration
length given in Tables 6.8 and 6.9.
Auxiliary Lane
At major road flows of over 7000-8000 AADT
(one-way), vehicles decelerating on the main
carriageway and moving into the diverging taper
to a point where there is a full lane width
available in the diverging taper may have a
significant effect on the capacity of the through
carriageway by impeding following drivers.
SECTION 6
'
=?
a. Deceleration Length
Figure 6.22 MajorIMinor Junction with Nearside Diverging Taper

E
.4
a. Deceleration Length
b. Direct Taper Length
Figure 6.23 Major/Minor Junction with Nearside Auxiliary Lane

6.7.14
SECTION 6
Merging Tapers
Merging tapers permit minor road traffic to

accelerate fully before joining the faster traffic
streams on the mainline where the joining traffic
may otherwise impede flow or be a hazard
(Figure 6.24).
Merging tapers shall only be used at dual
carriagewayjunctions. They shall be provided
generally where the major.road design speed is
80 kph or above, or when and the volume of
right turning traffic in the design year exceeds
600 vehicles AADT (one-way).
However, where the merging taper is for an
upgradient of greater than 4% or where the
percentage of large goods vehicles exceeds
20%, the threshold value may be reduced to
450 vehicles AADT (one-way).
A separate turning lane, with a radius of at least

25m where the main road design speed is 80
kphj and at least 30m above this speed, shall
be used to introduce the merging taper from the
minor road. The .initial width of the lane, which
will depend on the radius of the turning lane
(determined from Table 6.5), should. be
decreased at a constant taper depending on the
design speed.
The lengths of the tapers to be used are give'n

in Table 6,10. The minimum initial width of a
merging taper shall be 4.0m.
On dual carriageways, with a design speed of
120 kph or greater, the merging taper may be
preceded by a short nose of 40m length formed
between it and the end of the 30m approach
curve. The back of the nose should' have a
minimum width of 2m (Figure 6.25).
Merging tapers shall never be used at single

lane dualling junctions.
At some junctions on dual carriageways, there
may be safety benefits in providing merging
tapers at lower flows.
Design
Speed
(kph)
Merging
Length-a
80
100
120
140
90
110
130
150
(ml
'
Table 6.10 Merging Length - a

,
-1
-------------------------------------------------------E
*
a. Merging Length
Figure 6.24 MajorIMinor Junction with Nearside Merging Taper
January 1997
Page 6/24
SECTION 6
Nose 2m minimum
a. Merging Length
b. Nose Taper
Nose
.-
.. .
Shoulder
Figure 6.25 MajorNinor Junction with Nearside Merging Taper (Alternative for Dual Carriageway with
a Design Speed of 120 kph)
6.7.1 5
Stagger Distances
The stagger distance of a 'junction is the

distance along the major road between the
centrelines of the two minor roads.
ieft/F3ight stagger
For simple major/minor junctions with a IefVright
stagger, the minimum stagger distance shall be
40m.
For a ghost island junction the stagger distance
shall be 50m and for a junction with single lane
dualling it shall be 40m. These are based on
the distance required for manoeuvring the
20.0m drawbar trailer combination design
vehicle between the two minor roads, and shall
be provided on all new staggered junctions,
including the upgrading of rural crossroads,
where large vehicles are expected.
RightLeft Stagger
The minimum values for staggered righffleft
majorlminor junction are given in Table 6.1 1.
For higher design speeds, the distance is based .
on the sum of the two deceleration lengths lying
side by side plus the turning lengths (and
queuing lengths, if appropriate) at each end, as
indicated in the table. Otherwise'it is based on
the manoeuvring requirements of the design
vehicle.
-..
Table 6.1 1 Minimum .Stagger Distance for

RightLeft Staggered Junction
6.7.1 6
Skew Junctions
The design parameters where the minor road.

approaches at an angle other than 90, for both
left hand and right hand skew junctions, are
The geometric
parameters are set out in Clauses 6.7.5 to
6.7.1 2.
SECTION 6
. .
-----
-----
a:
. .- -
..
-..-
-----
-----. .
-_
- -.-
b.
a. Turning Length (+ Queuing Length

if required, see clause 6.7.8)
c. Through Lane Width. (6.7;s).

.
b. Deceleration Length (6.7.1 0).
e. ~ i n oRoad
r
Entry Width (6.7.5)
d. Turning Lane Width (6.7.6)
Figure 6.26 MajorIMinor

Junction with Skew Minor Road'.
. - .
. .
January 1997'
Pane 6/26
% ,
with
. .
8
.. - , * !
-. ..,
1
<
I . .
. *... . :,.;.: .;
;: .
. - l * . " e ,
SECTION 6
Carriageway
right-idright-outconnections shall be designed

in accordance with Section 7.
On dual carriageways, left turn crossing

manoeuvres at the junction are prevented and
facilities shall be provided nearby for turning
traffic. as highlighted in Clause 6.6.5. One
method of achieving this is to provide an
interchange, the principle of which is shown in
Section 7. The design of such crossings is
outlined in the following paragraphs and the
right-idright-outconnections to the mainline are
illustrated in Figures 6.27 and 6.28.
Traffic shall be introduced to the right turn lane

by a nearside diverge or auxiliary lane in
accordance with Clause 6.7.13.
..
6.7.17
T-Junctlon
Separation
Preventing left turns removes the need to

signalize the carriageways on the major road to
cater for these movements. The major road
camageway can pass through the junction at a
constant width.
Two right-Wright-out
connections are used with an overbridge or
underpass.
These junctions should be
designed in composite form, as described in
this section, catering for the right turn
movement only.
For the right turn merge to the main road, the

minor road channelizing island shown in
Figures 6.27 and 6.28 shall be designed so as
to provide a constant width of turn into the
major road. The width shall be determined from
Table 6.5.
The detail of the island as
approached along the minor road is as set out
in Clause 6.7.18. If there is a merging taper as
shown in Figure 6.28, the widths and tapers
shall be as set out in Clause 6.7.14. The
hatched markings shall be extended from the
minor road centreline to link with those for the
merge taper, the channelizing island being
provided within them, as in Figures 6.27 and
6.28.
For the right turn diverge from the major road,
the channelizing island described in Clause
6.7.12 and shown in Figures 6.27 and 6.28 shall
be designed so as to provide a constant width
around the turn to the minor road. The width
shall be determined from Table 6.5. Where a
nearside diverging taper or nearside auxiliary
lane is present (see Figures 6.22 and 6.23),the
hatched markings should be extended along
their current path until the intersection with the
centreline of the minor road, and the
channelizing island shall be provided within
them. This is shown in Figures 6.27 an 6.28.
The right-infright-out connections can also be
used with the compact interchange detailed in
Section 7. It offers a cheaper but more
restricted form of grade separation where the
economic case for a full interchange cannot be
fully justified. The connector roads between the
'
Traffic leaving the right turn lane should 'Give

Way" or merge with the major road traffic in
accordance with Clause 6.7.14,. or join an
added lane, depending on the major road
design speed, traffic flows and layout.
SECTION 6
ChanneAshg kland flared to

gke conrtant carriageway
width around the turn
Figure 6.27 T-Junction with Carriageway Separation
- -
--------------------------------------a. Diverge Taper
c. Merge Taper
b. Nose Taper
d. Cunre Widened Lane
Figure 6.28 T-Junction (Alternative for Dual Carriageway with a design speed of 12Okph).
January 1997
. .
.- Page 6/28
6.7.1 8
Channelizing Islands
T-Junctlon
The recommended channelizing island layout
for T-Junctions or staggered junctions, where
the minor road centreline is inclined to the major
road at an angle of between 70' or 110, is
shown in Figure 6.29: This should be read in
conjunction with Tables 6.1 2 and 6.1 3.
b)
For right hand skew junctions, the island

should be about 15 metres long. The left
hand side of its tail (viewed from the
minor road approach) should touch the
curved minor road centreline and be
rounded off at a radius of 0.75m to
1.00m.
C)
The offset, dl for right hand skew

junctions is 4.5 metres.
d)
For left hand skew junctions, the circular

arc R, touches the curved minor road
centreline and is tangential to the offset
edge of the through traffic lane on the
major road into which left turning traffic
from the minor road will turn.
e)
The island should be about 15 metres

long. The tail is offset about 1m to the left
of the curved minor road centreline
(viewed from the minor road approach)
and rounded off with a radius of 0.75m to
1.00m.
The following points should also be noted:

a)
"Edge of major road carriageway" means

edge of major road travelled way.
b)
The circular arc R, is tangential to the

offset, d, from the minor road centreline
and the offside edge ofthe through traffic
lane on the major road into which left
turning traffic from the minor road will
turn.
c)
By striking a circular arc of radius (R, + 2)

metres from the same centre point as arc
R, to intersect the edge of the major road
carriageway, point A is established where
a straight line drawn from the centre point
of arc R, to this intersection crosses R,.
d)
'The circular arc R, is tangential to the

offside edge of the major road offside
diverging lane and also passes through
point A.
e);
-RadiusR, is normally the same value as

R, but should be designed to ensure that
the island nose is positioned between 2 4 metres from the edge of the main
carriageway and that the width of the
island lies between 2- 5 metres.
f)
The design ensures that left tuming traffic

from the major road will not clash with
traffic waiting to turn left from the minor
road.
'
Skew Junctions
The design of a channelizing island for skew
junctions is similar to that outlined above, but
the following points should be noted:
a)
The centreline of the minor road is turned

with a radius of at least 50 metres td meet
the edge of the major road at right angles.
Januarv 1997
Pane 6/29
SECTION 6
Figure 6.29 Design of Channelizing Island
Minor Road
Inclination 8"
Offset d
70
80
90
100
110
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
(m)
Table 6.12 Channelizing Island Offset
Width of Major Road

Carriageway at
Junction w
(m)
Radius R,
(m)
7.3
12
11.3 (Ghost Island)
14
17.3 (Single Lane Dualling)
22
Table 6.13 Design of Radius R,
January 1997
Page 6/30
:.
..
QATAR HIGHWAY
DESIGN MANUAL
6.7.1 9
'
.-,. -.. .
SECTION 6
SplitterIRight Turn Islands
Splitter/right turn islands may be used to

chanelize traffic flows and separate conflict
points within a junction.
They have additional benefits of reserving
space for signing and aiding pedestrian
movement by providing a refuge at busy
junctions. Refer to Figure 6.30.
Comer radii and carriageway widths given in
Table 6.5 shall be used to construct the right
turn lane.
The raised island shall be
constructed to give shy distances to travelled
ways as illustrated in Figure 6.30.
Traffic leaving the right turn lane should "Give

Way" or merge with the major road traffic in
accordance with Clauses 6.7.4 or 6.7.14, or join
an added lane, depending on the major road
design speed, traffic flows and layout.
6.7.20
Drainage and Crossfail
From considerations of surface water drainage

and driver comfort, the road camber on the
major road shall be retainedthrough the junction
and the minor road graded into the channel line
of the major road. Checks shall be made for flat
areas at all changes of gradient, superelevation
of crossfall. Refer to Section 8.
Splitter islands are particularly useful at

signalized junctions where minor road right turn
traffic can be controlled by "Give Way" signs
and markings rather than signals.
Traffic shall be introduced to the right turn lane
by a nearside diverge or auxiliary lane in
accordance with Clause 6.7.1 3.
= Inside Corner Radius
RW
..
Outside Comer Radius
= Lane Width
= 0.- Radius
Hatched Marking
Edge of
Travelled Wa
Figure 6.30 Typical Layout of Splitter Island
Januaiy 1997
..
Page 6/31

6.7.21
. .
SECTION 6
..
The need for, and layout of, traffic signs and

road markings is an integral part of the design
process and no junction design is complete
without these features having been included.
Advance direction and warning signs shall be
provided, and care must be taken with the
positioning and size of signs at the junctior?.
itself.so that they do not interfere with drivers'
visibility requirements.. These matters need to
be considered from the earliest stage as they
can fundamentally affect layout and hence land
acquisition requirements. Advance signing on
minor roads may need particularly careful
consideration. Refer to the Qatar Traffic
Manual for details of signing and marking.
6.7.22
Road Lighting
Road lighting is normally provided at

majorlminor junctions in rural areas only when
an intersecting road has lighting. ,When an
existing junction is being modified, the lighting
provision should be checked for suitability with
the new arrangement. Any alteration should be
carried out prior to, or at the same time as the
roadworks. Refer to Section 10.
January 1997.
. . Page. 6/32
.
..

6.8
ROUNDABOUTS GENERAL
This section defines the main types of

roundabouts that can be used for an at-grade
junction of any class of road.
The requirements are defined in relation to the
size of roundabouts, effect of approach speed,
visibility, entry width, entry deflection and ttie
circulatory carriageway.
The recommendations for siting of roundabouts
are given in Clause 6.1.4.
6.8.1 General Principles
The principal objective of roundabout design is

to secure the safe interaction of traffic between
crossing traffic. streams with minimum delay.
This is achieved by a combination of geometric
layout features that, ideally, are matched to the
volumes of traffic in the traffic streams, their
speed, and to any locational constraints that
apply*
There are two broad regimes of roundabout
operation. The first occurs in urban areas with
high peak flows, often with marked tidal
variations and physical restrictions on the space
available. The second regime occurs in rural
areas and is characterised by high approach
speeds, low tidal variation and few physical
constraints.
Entry width is an irnportant feature that
determines entry capacity and often needs to be
larger in urban situations than in rural cases.
On the other hand, the most important
determinant of safety is vehicle deflection
imposed at entry because this governs the
speed of vehicles through the junction. It is
particularly important whenever approach
speeds are high. Entry deflection is related to
the entry path curvature and limiting this radius
of curvature in the vicinity of the entry to 100m
maximum ensures that sufficient deflection will
be undergone by entering vehicles to limit
through speeds.
The characteristics of roundabout accidents and
their frequencies in relation to geometric layout
design and traffic flows have been studied in
the UK by Transportation Research Laboratory
(TRL). 'The relationships derived from these
studies have provided insights into how various
aspects of design interact to influence the types
and frequencies of accidents at roundabouts.
These relationships therefore, constitute the
fundamentals of design for safety.
As
relationships between aspects of design are not
always mutually compatible, minimising the
likely incidence of a particular type of accident
January 1997
SECTION 6
may increase the potential for another. Design,
therefore is a trade-off between operational
efficiency, minimising delays at the junction, and
various safety aspects within whichever location
constraints apply. The latter are often the
dominating
factor
when
designing
improvements to an existing junction,
particularly in urban areas.
Consideration of the need for, and layout of
traffic signs and road markings should be an
integral part of the design process. Reference
should be made to the Qatar Traffic Manual.
The provision of road lighting at roundabouts
should normally be regarded as an essential
safety requirement.
Sometimes lighting
requirements may conflict with environmental
considerations.
However, it should be
recognised that roundabouts are generally safer
than other forms of at-grade junctions and the
decision to use a roi~ndaboutshould not be
abandoned solely because of lighting problems.
In sensitive locations it may be possible to adopt
alternative lighting methods and other measures
to make the roundabout more visible. When an
existing roundabout junction is being modified,
the lighting layout should be checked for
suitability with the new road arrangement and
any alteration carried out prior to, or at the same
time as the roadworks. It is irnportant that
approaching drivers see and perceive that they .
are approaching a roundabout and are not
misled by the projection of the lighting layout,
particularly at times of poor visibility.
6.8.2 Types of Roundabout
Definitions
The preferred main type of roundabout to be
used in Qatar is the Normal Roundabout. There
are other forms such as Mini and Double
Roundabouts, and other variants of these basic
types, ie. Ring Junctions, Interchange
Roundabouts and Signalized Roundabouts.
Normal Roundabout
A roundabout having a one-way circulatory
carriageway around a kerbed central island 4m
or more in diameter and usually with flared
approaches to allow multiple vehicle entry.
(Figure 6.31).
The number of entries recommended is either 3
or 4. Roundabouts perform particularly well with
3 arms, being more efficient than signals,
provided the traffic demand is well balanced
between the arms.
Page 6/33
..
- '
.,
SECTION 6
. . .
i
I
.--
a Traffic deflection
island
Figure 6.31 Normal

Roundabout
...
If the number o f entries is above 4, driver
comprehension is affected and the roundabout
becomes larger with the probability that higher
circulatory speeds will be generated.
.
Interchange Roundabouts
The foliowing examples of interchanges are
discussed in Section 7 Interchanges.
.
.
Two bridge roundabout

.
One bridge and two roundabouts'

(dumbbell)
Ring junction interchange.
Signalized Roundabout
As with Majorminor Junctions, traffic signals
can be installed at roundabouts to improve
safety or traffic capacity. Traffic signals can be
used at one or more of the approach arms or
even on the circulatory carnageway on some
large roundabouts.
January 1997
'
.. .
.. . .
..
- .-.
:.
. -.- . -. Page
;. . .6/34
. . .. . .
\
- .

6.9
'
SAFETY AT ROUNDABOUTS
SECTION 6
~esi~
to nencourage slow entry to the
junction and quick exit to leave the
junction clear for the next users.
6.9.1 General
It is generally known from studies that fewer
accidents occur at roundabouts than at
signalized junctions of similar traffic flows. The
severity of accidents is also much less than at
other junctions.
Measures to reduce accidents at existing

roundabouts with poor safety records include:
Care must be taken in layout design to secure

the essential safety aspects.
The most
common problem affecting safety is excessive
speed, both at entry or within the roundabout.
The most significant factors contributing to high
entry and circulating speeds are:
Provision of map type advance direction

signs
Repositioningor reinforcement of warning

signs
Making the "Give Way" line more

conspicuous.
Moving the central island chevron sign
further to the right to emphasise the angle
of turn, placing another chevron sign
above the normal position, and placing
chevron signs in the median in line with
the offside lane approach on dual
carriageways.
Chevron boards can
impinge on circulatory visibility but the
effects can be minimised by positioning
the boards (and associated turn right
sign) 2m back from the central island
kerbline
Inadequate entry deflection

.. .
. A very acute entry angle which

encourages fast merging manoeuvres
with circulating traffic
Poor visibility to the "Give Way" line
Poorly designed or positioned warning
and advance direction signing
"Reduce Speed Now" signs, where
provided, being incorrectly sited
When approach speeds are low (usually

in urban areas), a ring of contrasting
paving can be laid in a chevron-pattern
inside the central island perimeter at a
gentle slope, refer to Clause 5.1 9.
More than four entries leading to a large

configuration.
Additional safety aspects to be considered in
designing a layout include:
In rural areas it is not recommended to

install raised kerbed chevrons. on
roundabouts. Experience has shown that
physical obstructions such as' chevron
kerbing will be hit inadvertently at night
time by vehicles whose drivers are not
aware of the junction ahead. Chevron
signs should be placed in these locations
only
Angle between arms:

The accident
potential of an entry depends on both the
angle (anticlockwise) between its
approach arm and the previous approach
arm, and the traffic flows. A high flow
entry should have a large angle to the
next entry, and a low ftow entry a smaller
angle in order to rninirnise accidents
Landscaping where approach speeds are

high in urban areas can provide a useful
supplement
Gradient: Whilst it is normal to flatten

approach gradients to about 2% or less
at entry, research at a limited number of
sites has shown that this has only a small
beneficial effect on accident potential
Provisionof "Yellow Bar Markings"on fast

dual camageway approaches has shown
that a 57% reduction in accidents can be
achieved. This is from studies carried
out in the UK by the TRL
Visibility to the left at entry: This has

comparatively little influence upon
accident risk. There is nothing to be
gained by increasing visibility above the
recommended level
Provisionof appropriate levels of skidding

resistance on the approaches to
roundabouts and on the circulatory
carriageways
Crest Curves: Junctions should not be

sited on crest curves where the approach
sight to the roundabout is impaired
.
Januarv 1997
. ..
. .
...
. .
Paae 6/35

It should be noted that at the speed of
traffic on a circulatory carriageway,
skidding resistance is derived from the
surface texture of the aggregates which
form the surface of the road (the micro-.
texture). Particular consideration should
be given to ensure that the aggregates
used have skid resisting properties
appropriate to the circumstances
.
The deep surface texture (the macrotexture) necessary for good skid
resistance on high speed routes is not
required for circulatory carriageways.
Deep surface texture is required
however, on the approaches to
roundabouts if the design speed of traffic
is greater than 120 kph
.
Avoidance of abrupt and excessive

superelevation in the entry region
Reduction of excessive entry width by
hatching or physical means
Provision of "Reduce Speed Now' signs
andlor 'Count-down" markers
Reduction of the circular width by
insertion of a central island collar.
Care should be taken with the choice of kerb
type for roundabout design. A safety problem
can arise where certain specialist, high profile
kerbs are used around a central island as they
can be a danger to vehicles over-running the
entry. - Observations have shown that these
kerbs can result in loss of control or overturning
of vehicles unless the approach angle is small
and actual vehicle speeds are low. Where
high profile kerbs are to be used on
approaches, the kerbs can be hazardous for
vehicles and pedestrians, and consideration
should be given to the provision of pedestrian
guardrails. Care should be taken to ensure that
visibility sightlines are maintained.
High circulatory speeds cause associated entry
problems and normally occur at large
roundabouts with excessively long and/or wide
circulatory cartiageways. Excessive circulatory
speeds can also be caused at smaller
roundabouts by inadequate deflection at
previous entries.
The solution to high
circulatory speeds usually has to be fairly
drastic, involving the signalization of problem
entry arms at peak hours. In extreme cases
the roundabout may have to be converted to a
ring junction in which the circulatory
carriageway is made 2-way and the
entrieslexits are controlled by individual normal
roundabouts or traffic signals.
January 1997
SECTION 6
Ifentry problems are caused by poor visibility to

the left, good results can be achieved by
moving the 'Give Way" line forward in
conjunction with curtailing the adjacent
circulatory carriageway by hatching or extension
of the traffic deflection island.
6.9.2 Two Wheeled Vehicles
Though roundabouts have an impressive

overall safety record for most vehicle types, this
does not apply equally to two wheeled vehicles.
Research has shown that at four-arm
roundabouts in the UK, injury accidents
involving two-wheeled vehicles constitute about
half of those reported.
The proportion of
accidents involving cyclists is about 15%,
although they typically constitute less than 2%
of the traffic flow.
The.accident involvement rates for two-wheeled
vehicles, expressed in terms of accidents per
road user movement, are 10-15 times those of
cars, with pedal cyclists generally having slightly
higher accident rates than two-wheeled motor
vehicles riders.
The study at four-arm roundabouts by the TRL
in the UK has shown for example that, in 50 and
60 kph posted speed areas, there are
differences in pedal cycle accident involvement
rates for different categories of roundabouts.
Engineers should be aware of the following:
Normal roundabouts with small central
islands and flared entries have accident
rates which are about twice those of
normal roundabouts with large central
islands and unflared entries.
This
relationship appears to apply consistently
for all types of vehicular road users. As
previously stated, analysis of accident
data suggests that when all types of
accident are considered, entry deflection
is the,most important factor
70% of pedal cycle accidents at smaller
normal roundabouts are of the
'entry/circulating' type, for example, motor
vehicle entering roundabout collides with
pedal cycle crossing entry
At dual carriageway roundabouts, the
accident involvement rate for cyclists is
about two to three times greater than that
at dual camageway traffic signals, but for
cars, the opposite is true.
Page 6/36
6.9.3 Large Goods Vehicles
._<
,.
.
- .
. .
..
..
. SECTION 6'
The problem of large goods vehicles

overturning or shedding their loads at
roundabouts has an obvious solution in relation
to layout geometry. Whilst in the UK there are
only about 60 personal injury accidents a year
in this category, there are considerably more
damage-only accidents. Load shedding often
involves great congestion and delay, and is
expensive to clear, especially if occurring at
major junctions.
Experience suggests that
roundabouts where these problems persist
usually exhibit one or more of the following
features:
Inadequate entry deflection leading to
high entry speeds
Long straight sections of circulatory

carriageway leading into deceptively tight
bends .
Sharp turns into exits
Excessive crossfall changes on the
circulatory carriageway
Excessive adverse crossfall on a
nearside lane of the circulatory
carriageway.
An incipient problem for some vehicles may be
present even ifhigh speeds are not occurring.
Research has shown that an articulated, large
goods vehicle with a gravity height of 2.5m
above the ground can overturn on a 20m radius
bend at speeds as low as 24 kph. Particular
attention should be paid to ensure that
pavement surface tolerances are complied with
and that abrupt changes in crossfall are
avoided. It is good practice to make the exit
radii greater than the entry radii.
- .
- .
..
0
January 1997
Paae 6/37
SECTION 6
6.10 ROUNDABOUT ELEMENTS
6.1 0.1
Definitions
Entry Wldth: el is measured from the point A

along the normal to the nearside kerb, see
Figure 6.32.
I' Average Effective Flare Length
Figure 6.33 Average Effective Flare Length
A. Polnt of Maxlmum Entry

Dbfleclon at Left
Hand End of Olvm Way
Unm
a. Entry Width
v. Appmach Half
Wldth
r. Enty Radlu~
D. In~uibed
Clrclm Diambtbr
inscribed Circle Diameter: Dl is the diameter

of the largest circle that can be inscribed within
the junction olitline, see Figure 6.32. In cases
where the outline is asymmetric, the local value
in the region of the entry is taken.
a,
The Entry Angle:

serves as a geometric
proxy for the conflict angle between entering
and circulating streams. For roundabouts
having a curved circulatory carriageway,
Figure 6.32 Geometric Design Features

Approach to Half Width: v, is measured at a
point in the approach upstream from any entry
flare, from the median line (or offside edge of
carriageway on dual carriageways) to the
nearside kerb, along a normal, see Figure 6.32
Average Effective Flare Length: It,is found as
shown in Figure 6.33. The line GF'D is the
projection of the nearside kerb from the
approach towards the "Give Way" line, parallel
to the median HA and at a distance of v from it.
BA is the line along which e is measured (and
is therefore normal to GBJ), and thus D is at a
distance of [e-v] from B. The line CF is parallel
to BG (the nearside kerb) and at a distance of
[e-vy2 from it. Usually the line CF' is therefore
curved and its length is measured along the
curve to obtain 1'.
Sharpness of Flare: S, is defined by the
relationship:
and Is a measure of the rate at which extra

width is developed in the entry flare. Large
values of .S correspond to short severe flares
and small values to long gradual flares.
January 1997
Entry Angle
Figure 6.34 Entry Angle

The line BC is a tangent to the line EF, which is
midway between the nearside kerbline and the
median line or the edge of any median island
on the offside, where this line intersects the
"Give Waywline.
is measured as the acute
angle between BC and the tangent to AID' at
the point of intersection between BC.and AtD'
For all other,roundabouts, the construction is
shown in Figure 6.35. The line BC is the same
as in Figure 6.34. The line GH is the tangent to
the line JK, which is in the following exit,
'midway between the nearside kerb and the
-. .
Page 6/38
.-.
SECTlON 6
median lineor the edge of any median island

on the offside, where this line intersects the
outer edge of the circulatory carriageway. BC
and GH intersect at L. 9 is then defined by:
6.1 0.2
when the right hand side of the equation is

positive.
The designer has flexibility in the application of

the parameters to best meet the particular site
requirements and constraints. The variables
are:
The design of roundabout entries is a complex

procedure, there are several variables which
need to be addressed to ensure a design which
is safe and has adequate capacity.
6.10.3
Figure 6.35 Entry Angle

When the right hand side of the equation is zero
or negative, @=O. Angle BLG is measured on
the "outside" of the roundabout, that is, on the
side facing away from the central island..
Entry Radius: r is measured as the minimum
radius of curvature of the nearside kerbline at
entry, see Figure 6.32. For some designs the
arc of .minimum radius may extend into the
following exit, but this is not important provided
that a half or more of the arc length is within the
entry region.
Minimum Stopping Sight Distance: as
defined in Section 2.
Entry Path Curvature: This is a measure of the
amount of entry deflection to the right imposed
on vehicles at the entry to a roundabout, see
Clause 6.1 0.8.
Traffic ~ef16ctionIsland: a raised area
(usually kerbed) on the carriageway, which is
located and shaped so as to direct and also
separate traffic movements onto and from a
roundabout.
Ghost Islands used for Subsidiary Traffic
Deflection: a shaped area, flush with the road
surface, delineated by road markings, and
within the entry width of the approach to a
roundabout, so located to deflect and direct
traffic movements into the circulatory
carriageway.
Entries
Entry Width
Flare Length
Entry Angle
Entry Radius
Approach Carriageway Half Width.
Entry Width
It is good practice to add at least one extra lane

width to the lanes on the entry approach, but as
a general rule, not more than two lanes should
be added and no entry should be more than
four lanes wide. The relationship between
entry width and capacity is quite significant.
Entry width is the largest single factor, apart
from approach camageway half width, affecting
capacity.
There may be some cases, usually associated

with low predicted flows, where increased entry
width is not operationally necessary, but in
these circumstances it is still recommendedthat
two entry lanes be provided. This will give
added flexibility at abnormal flow periods in the
future, a passing facility in the event of
breakdown, and will ease the problem of space
provision for long vehicles turning.
Lane widths at the 'Give Way" line shall be not
less than 3m. Lane widths should be tapered
back in the entry flare to a minimum width of
2m. It is generally better to use wide lane
widths because they are more suitable for large
goods vehicles. For example, at a 10m wide
entry, 3 x 3.33m lanes are better than 4 x 2.Sm
lanes.
The development of entry lanes should take
account of the anticipated turning proportions
and possible lane bias since drivers often have
a tendency to use the nearside lane. The use
of lane bifurcatfon where a lane widens into two
should maximise use of the entry width. The
use of short offside lanes is not recommended.
Paae 6/39
The alignment of entry lanes is also critical.

On rural roundabouts, where design speeds are
relatively high, the kerbline of the deflection
island (or central reserve in the case of a dual
carriageway) should be on an arc which, when
projected forward, meets the central island
tangentially. In urban areas, where design
speeds are lower, this is less important, but
nevertheless should be achieved where
possible. Care should be taken to ensure that
the resultant entry angle is not too low and that
entry path cutvature is not too great.
SECTION 6
this the design becomes one of link widening.

Where the design speed is high, entry widening
should be developed gradually, avoiding any
sharp angles. In urban areas the use of long
flare lengths is often not possible due to land
constraints and capacity may have to be
achieved using wider entries and shorter flares.
As a rough guide, the total length of the entry
widening (BG) should b e about twice the
average effective flare length I' (Figure 6.33).
6.1 0.5
For capacity assessment, the entry width

should be taken as the width which drivers are
likely to use. Where the offside kerbline forms
a vehicle path which is tangential to the central
islands, the entry width and effective entry width
are the same.:
'
It is usual to consider design flows 15 years

after opening for highway schemes. This can
result in roundabout entries with too many lanes
for earlier year flows and lead to operational
problems. A design year layout will determine
overall geometry and land requirements for the
roundabout, but for the early years, it may be
necessary for the designer to consider an
interim stage. This approach can result in
reduced entry widths and entry lanes.
Consideration can also be given to an interim
reduction of the circulatory carriageway width,
either by an increase in diameter of the central
island, or by extending islands fonrvard into the
circulatory carriageway.
6.10.4
Entry Angle
The effect of entry angle on entry capacity is

negative; as the angle increases capacity
decreases slightly. However, care should be
taken in the choice of entry angle since high
and low angles may result in increased accident
potential.
The angle should, if possible, lie between 20
and 60 degrees. Low entry angles force drivers
into merging positions where they must either
look over their shoulders to their left or attempt
a true merge using their mirrors (with the
attendant problems of disregarding the 'Give
Way" line and generation of high entry speeds).
High entry angles produce excessive entry
deflection and can lead to sharp braking at
entries accompanied by "nose to tail" accidents,
especially in rural areas. The best entry angle
value is about 30 degrees. Figures 6.36 and
6.37 show two extreme cases.
Flare Design at Entry
Flares on the approach to roundabouts shall be

such that:
a)
The maximum entry width shall not

exceed 10.5m for single and 15.0m for
dual carriageway approach roads
b)
The average effective flare length shall

not exceed loom, but it should be noted
that beyond 30 or 40m any expected
extra capacity is derived from
extrapolation beyond the bounds of
experimental data and should therefore
by treated with caution.
The capacity of an entry can be improved by

increasing the average effective Flare length,
though this is of limited effect. A minimum
length of about 5m is desirable in urban areas, .
whilst a length of 25m is considered adequate
in rural areas. Flare lengths greater than 25m
may assist in geometric layout but have little
effect in increasing capacity. Flare lengths
should not be areater than 100m. as bevond
January 1997
Entry Anale
i8
Defined a8 (90'-812)
Figure 6.36 Example of Too Low an Entry

Angle and also Substandard Entry
Deflection.
Page 6/40
. . ..
..
..
.. .
. ,.'-
..
, ,'. ' , " . " ."

SECTION 6
'
Entry angle
Figure 6.37 Example of Too High an Entry

Angle and also Excessive Entry
Deflection
6.1 0.6
Entry Radius
.
For small roundabouts entry capacity increases

with entry radius up to about 20m, higher radii
result in very little increase in capacity. The
minimum entry radius should be 6m, a good
practical design is about 20m. Where a
roundabout is designed to cater for large goods
vehicles in particular, the entry radius should
not be less thanJ0m. For large roundabouts
(40-60m diameter), large entry radii will almost
certainly result in inadequate entry deflection,
for example it will not be possible to achieve the
deflection standard if the entry radius is lOOm
or more.
..
1
L.
6.10.7
Entry Kerbing
As entries are almost always kerbed, hardstrips

should be terminated when entry widening
begins. The simplest procedure is to place the.
kerbs at the back of the hardstrip and then
terminate the hardstrip edge line by profiling it
back towards the kerbs in a short smooth curve
or taper. (See Figures 6.38 and 6.39). This is
not appropriate where there is regular use by
cyclists who may wish to continue to the edge
of the circulatory carriageway by using the
hardstrip. .
r-
January 1997
, " .
.. .
Page 6/41
QATAR HIG'HWAY DESIGN MANUAL
SECTION 6
----------
d Edge of Carriageway
Figure 6.38 Method of Terminating Edge Strip on Single Carriageway Approach to a Roundabout
d
d
....................
-.
I'm
a
b
c
d
Kerbs ,
Edge Lines
Edge Line Profiled Back towards the Kerb
Edge of Carriageway
Figure 6.39 Method of Terminating Edge Strips on Dual Carriageway Approach to a Roundabout
January 1997
. Page 6/42
QATAR HIGHWAY
DESIGN MANUAL
. -
6.1 0.8
Entry Deflection
Entry Path Curvature is one of the most

important determinants of
safety at
roundabouts. It is a measure of the amount of
entry deflection to the right imposed on vehicles
at entry to the roundabout.
For design purposes only, at both new and
improved 'normal' type roundabouts, the vehicle
entry path shall be such that when inscribed in
accordance with the following construction, the
tightest radius of the entry path curvature shall
not exceed 100 metres.
Constructlon of the Vehicle Path
The method of.construction and measuring the
entry path curvature is described below, and
shown in Figures 6.40 to 6.43. Figure 6.41
shows an approach with negative curvature,
Figure 6.42 shows an approach with positive
approach curvature, and Figure 6.43 a
roundabout at a 'Y' junction.
e)
SECTION 6
'That the vehicle proceeds towards the

"Give Way" line, then:
It proceeds towards the central island

of the roundabout passing through a
point not less than 1m from the
nearside channel or kerb, the position
of which relative to the starting point
depends on the amount of approach
flare to the right (Figure 6.40 and 6.41)
The vehicle is then assumed to

continue on a smooth path with its
centreline never passing closer than
1m from the central island (it may be
more in some configurations).
Draw, to a scale not less than 1/500 using a

flexible curve of equivalent, the centre line of
the most realistic path that a vehicle would take
in its complete passage through the junction on
a smooth alignment without sharp transitions.
More than one independent assessment of the
vehicle paths shall be carried out.
Assume:
a)
The entering vehicle is 2m wide and will

be taking the 'straight ahead' movement
at a 4 arm roundabout and across the
head of the Tee at a 3 arm roundabout
b)
That there is no other traffic on the

approach and on the circulatory
carriageway
c)
That the driver will negotiate the site

. constraints with minimum deflections and
that lane markings by the 'Give Way" line
will be ignored
d)
The initial approach position for entry

path curvature measured from a point not
less than 50m from the 'Give Way" line is
within the range:
1m from the nearside kerb

1m from the centreline of a single
carriageway or 1m from the offside
kerb of a dual carriageway
This will ensure that all approach

alignments are examined and that no
vehicle
path can
exceed
the
recommended maximum radius of
curvature
January 1997
This tightest radius shall be measured by

means of suitable templates. See "To Measure
the Entry Path Curvaturen.
The exact path drawn will be a matter of
personal judgement and the results should be
examined for compliance and consistency with
the appropriate clauses in this section.
One convenient method of construction of the
required path is to imagine the advance of all
the channel or kerb lines and centreline in the
case of single carriageways (together with
central islands and deflection islands) into the
carriageway by 1m.
The vehicle path will be the line of least
resistance, whose centreline will normally, but
not always, be tangential to these construction
lines; in the entry, at the central island and in
the exit. Any reverse of curvature in the vehicle
path around the central island must be drawn so
that there is no sharp deviation between that
curve and the entry curve. Particular care in
checking entry path curvature is required when
considering small central island designs.
To Measure the Entry Path Curvature
The entry path curvature is measured on the
curved length of path in the vicinity of the 'Give
Way" line (but not more than 50m in advance of
it) between points X and Y (see Figures 6.40 to
6.43) about 20m to 25m but not less than 20m
in length, over which the tightest radius occurs.
Page 6/43
..
..
. .
SECTION 6
Figure 6.40 Determination of Entry Path Curvature
Figure 6.41 Determination of Entry Path (On a Curved Approach Arm with Negative Approach
Curvature)
January 1997
. .-
...
. .
Page 6/44
..
.(,',..'j
3 . . . . .
. ..
.
-. .- .. .... .. . . . .. . .
SECTION 6
Figure 6.42 Determinationof Entry Path C u d u r e (On a Curved Approach Arm with Positive Approach
. .
Curvature)
path in the vicinity of the Give Way line but not more
than $Om In advance of It.
b. Commencement polnt 1rn from the ofkide kerb for
D2 or 1m from centre line for S2L, not ierr than SOm
from the Give Way line.
c. VehWe entry path cumture.
Figure 6.43 Determinationof.Entry Path Curvature for a Roundabout at a Y Junction

6.10.9
Achieving Entry Deflection
A good method for creating entry deflection on

new schemes where there are no other
constraints is to stagger the arms, as shown in
Figure 6.44. This will help with the overall
design, reduce the size of roundabouts,
minimise land acquisition and assist with the
construction of 'easyn exits.
SECTION 6
In urban areas, the restrictions on space

available coupled with the turning width
requirements of large goods vehicles may
necessitate small normal roundabouts which
cannot provide sufficient entry deflection to the
right by means of the central island alone. In
these cases, deflection should be generated by
means of enlarged traffic islands in the entry,
(Figure 6.45).
It is not good practice to generate entry

deflection by sharply deviating the approach
roads to the left close to the roundabout and
then to the right at entry. Approach curves
should be fairly gentle, but there are cases
when horizontal radii below the minimum for the
general design speed of the approach link may
be used, provided always that they are
proceeded by the 'Roundabout Ahead' waming
sign as defined in the Qatar Traffic Manual.
However, tight radii will require large amounts of
verge widening to provide adequate forward
visibility and add to the verge maintenance
requirements.
There is evidence to suggest that a gentle left
hand bend leading to a right hand deflection at
entry is more safe than a gentle right hand
bend.
a. Crntmlnr Omrt 1620m (Not. Paaf Exb)
Figure 6.44 Entry Deflection by Staggering

Approach Roads
Figure 6.45 Example Showing How Island Design can Increase Entry Deflection at an Existing
Roundabout
January
. .
1997
- .
Page 6/46
QATAR HIGHWAY DESlGN MANUAL

6.1 0.1 0 Visibility
The forward visibility at the approach to a
roundabout shall be as indicated in Section 2 for
the appropriate design speed. This Minimum
Stopping Sight Distance (SSD) is measured to
the "Give Way' line as shown in Figure 6.46.
The following guidelines represent good
practice concerning the provision of visibility
and, when subject to relaxation, there is a need
for additional signing to alert drivers of all
vehicles to potential hazards.
Eye and Object Heights
Visibilities, with the exception of visibility to the
left at entry and across the central island, shall
be assessed in accordance to Section 2.
Visibility to the left and across the central island
shall be obtainable from a driiets eye height of
1.05m to an object height of 1.05m, and the
envelope of visibility shall extendto 2,Om above
the road surface.
Where traffic and direction signs are to be
erected on a central reservation, verge, or
deflection island within the envelope of visibility,
including to the left, the mounting height shall
not be less than 2.0m above the carriageway
surface and the envelope checked on sites with
changes of gradient.
Visibility to the Left
Drivers of all vehicles approaching 'the "Give
Way' line shall be able to see the full width of
the circulatory carriageway to their left from .the
"Give Way" line for a distance appropriate to the
sight stopping distance for the circulatory traffic
(measured along the centreline of the
circulatory carriageway) as indicated in Table
6.14, and shown in Figure 6.47. This also
applies to roundabouts that have parapet walls
on either side of the circulatory carriageway.
This visibility shall be checked from the centre
of the offside lane at a distance of 15m back
from the "Give Way' line, as shown in Figure
6.48. Checks shall be made that crossfall
design or consiruction and sign location do not
restrict visibility.
It should be noted that excessive visibility at
entry or visibility between adjacent entries can
result in approach and entry speeds greater
than desirable for the junction geometry.
Consideration shall be given to limiting in
particularthe visibility of adjacent entries to that
from 15m back on the approach, and the
visibility along the approach to no more than the
stopping sight distances for the design speed of
the approach, by the selective use of
landscaping.
-.. .
. .
.
.
''.
...::
. ....
January 1997
SECTION 6
Forward Visibility at Entry

Drivers of all vehicles approaching the 'Give
Way" line shall be able to see the full width of
the circulatory carriageway ahead of them for a
distance (measured along the centre line of the
circulatory carriageway) appropriate to the size
of the roundabout (as indicated in Table 6.1 4).
The visibility shall be checked from the centre of
the nearside lane at a distance of 15m back
from the "Give Way" line as shown in Figure
6.49.
Circulatory Visibility
Drivers of all vehicles circulating on a
roundabout shall be able to see the full width of
the circulatory carriageway ahead of them for a
distance appropriate to the size of roundabout
(as indicated in Table 6.1 4). This visibility shall
be checked from a point 2m in from the central
island as shown in Figure 6.50. It is often useful
to improve the conspicuousness of central
islands by the use of landscaping, but this could
obstruct circulatory visibility. The circulatory
visibility envelope will encroach onto the height
of vegetation or surface treatment. In these
situations, limited penetration into the visibility
envelope by vegetative growth of a dispersed
nature would not be unacceptable.
Inscribed Circle Diameter
. (m)
Visibility Distance
(m)
('a' in Figure 6.49)
< 40
Whole Junction
40-60
40
60-100
50
> 100
70
Table 6.14 Visibility Distance

Pedestrian Crossing Visibility
Driven of all vehicles approaching a pedestrian
crossing across an entry shall have a minimum
distance of visibility to it of the Stopping Sight
Distance for the design speed of the link (see
Section 2). At the 'Give Way" line, drivers of all
vehicles shall be able to see the full width of a
pedestrian' crossing across the next exit if the
crossing is within 50m of the roundabout (see
Figure 6.51). In urban areas, adjacent roadside
development may however prevent 'this visibility
splay being fully established.
Visual Intrusions
Signs, street furniture and planting shall not be
placed within the visibility envelopes so as to
obstruct visibility, but infringements by isolated
slim projections such as lamp columns, sign
supports or bridge columns can be ignored
provided they are less than 550mm wide. The
only exception to this will be positioning of
bollards on deflection islands and staggered
chevron boards on central islands. Where
possible, care shall be taken to minimise the
effects of pedestrians on visibility requirements.
January 1997
SECTION 6
C,
-
Page 6/48
.. .
SECTION 6
7.3m Dual Carriageway
11.3m Single Carriageway
7.3m
7.3m Single Carriageway
Vehicle Position Centre of Nearside Lane
s Desinble Minimum Stopping Sight Distance (SSD) for Approach Road Design Speed
Figure 6.46 Measurement of Stopping Sight Distance

. .
January 1997
Page 6/49
3cb I
IUN
..
a. Sight Stopping Dlrtancr for Circulating Tratfic

b. Half Lane Width
Figure 6.47 Visibility to the Left Required at Entry (From "Give Way" Line)
--
Aroa oIcirculetoy crniapeway over

whkh vislbilily shall be obtained
korn viewpoint
8. Sbht Slopping Distance for
CkculeUnp TraMc
b. Half Lene WUU,

8. Limit of VlrlblIMy Splay
w
Figure 6.48 ~ i i i b i l ito

t ~the Left Required at Entry (15m back from Oive Way" Line)
January 1997
. .-
Page6150
QATAR H ~ G ~ W ADESIGN
Y
MANUAL
'
SECTION 6 '
a. Sight Stopping Distance for Circulating Traffic
b. Half Lone Width

c. Limit of Visibility Splay
Figure 6.49 Forward Visibility Required at Entry
L .-
Area 01 clrcuiatory carriageway over which

visibility shall be obtained
.
from viewpoint
Dlstance Related to Circulatory Speed

b Llmlt olVlsibility Splay
Figure 6.50 Circulatory Visibility
. . .
.lanuarv 1997
._ . .
Page 6/51
SECTION 6
CJ
I
--
8 Minimum 8ma over whleh unobstructed

vlrlblltty h required from vlewpolnt
when crotrlng h wlthin 6Om of exit
b H a l lane width
c LlmR of vlslbllfty rpky
Figure 6.51 Visibility Required at Entry to Pedestrian Crossing at Next Exit
January 1997
.Page
. 6/52
SECTION 6
6.1 0.1 1 Circulatory Carriageway
6.10.12
The circulatory carriageway should, if possible,

be circular in plan, avoiding deceptively tight
bends.
The following advice is based on the swept

turning paths generated by a 16.5m long
articulated vehicle with a single axle at the rear
of the trailer. This is referred to below as the
"Design Vehicle".
The width of the circulatory carriageway shall

not exceed 15m. However, block paving
'collars' around the central island can be used
to provide additional width if long vehicle turning
movements need to be catered for on smaller
roundabouts.
The turning width required by this type of

vehicle is greater than that for all other vehicles
within the normal maximum dimensions
permitted in the classifications given in Table
6.1, or likely to be permitted in the near future.
The requirements for other vehicles (including
a 12m long rigid vehicle, 12m long coach, 20m
drawbar trailer combination, and a 16.5m
articulated vehicle) are less onerous.
The width of the circulatory carriageway shall be

constant and lie between 1.0 and 1.2 times the
maximum entry width. However, see Clause
6.1 0.1 2 if small lnscribed Circle Diameters
(ICDs) are being contemplated.
The smallest ICD for a normal roundabout that

will accommodate the "Design Vehicle' is 28m.
It should be noted that it may be difficult, if not
impossible, to meet the entry deflection
requirement with normal roundabouts which
have lCDs up to 40m.
In this case
consideration could be given to the installation
of a low profile central island which would
provide adequate deflection for standard
vehicles but allow overrun by the rear wheels of
articulated vehicles and trailers. Such islands
should have the same profile as the circulatory
camageway with a maximum upstand of 50mm.
It is normal practice to avoid short lengths of

reverse curve between entry and adjacent exits
by linking these curves or joining them with
straights between the entry radius and the exit
radius. One method is to increase the exit
radius. However, where there is a considerable
distance between the entry and the next exit, as
at three entry roundabouts, reverse curvature
may result (see Figure 6.50).
'There may be situations where the turning
proportions are such that one section of
circulatory carriageway will have a relatively low
flow. In this case, there may be an over
provision in circulating carriageway width and
an area of carriageway, usually adjacent to an
entry deflection island, becomes unused. It
would be possible to reduce the circulatory
carriageway width by extending the deflection
island and advancing the 'Give Way" line. This
method of reducing circulatory width may also
be adopted as an interim measure in the early
years of a scheme.
For larger roundabouts, this reduction in
circulatory width can be achieved by the use of
hatch markings and is often associated with
taking out of use the offside entry lane. If such
measures are to be considered as an interim
geometric design feature for early years traffic
flows, consideration should be given to the use
of contrasting hard surfacing for these areas.
For smaller roundabouts it is more appropriate
to consider interim circulatory carriageway
reduction by increasing the size of the central
island. If this is to be introduced from the
outset, a preferable measure would be the use
of contrasting hard surfacing but hatch markings
could also be considered. .
January 1997
Inscribed Circle Diameter (ICD)
The turning space requirements for the "Design

Vehiclen at normal roundabouts from 28m to
36m ICD are shown in Figure 6.52. For lCDs
above these values, and/or where low profile
central islands are to be installed, the circulatory
carriageway width should be checked against
Table 6.5. But usually the rule in Clause
6.10.1 1 will provide more than adequate width.
.
6.1 0.1 3 Exits

The spacing of an exit and the preceding entry
shall not be less than that which results from the
combination of the minimum entry radius (6m)
and the minimum exit radius (20m), though
desirable radii of 20m, and 40m respectively
should be used where possible. If an existing
roundabout is to be modified to include an
additional entry, care must be taken to ensure
that this does not affect safety at the proceeding
entry and following exit. It may be necessary to
redesign the whole junction if adequate spacing
between adjacent entry/exit cannot be
achieved.
'The principle of "easy exitsnshall be applied. A
nearside kerb radius of about 40m at the mouth
of the exit is desirable but for larger rural
roundabouts this may be increased to suit the
Page 6/53
SECTION 6
overall junction geometry. In any case, this

radius shall not be below 20m or greater than
200m.
At the beginning of an exit, its width, measured
normally to the exit radius, should, where
possible, allow for an extra traffic lane over and
above that of the link downstream.
For example, if the downstream link is a single
2 lane or wide single 2 lane carriageway, the
width at the exit should be 7.0m or 7.5m, and if
the link is a 2 lane dual carriageway, the width
should be 10m to 11m. This extra width should
be reduced on the nearside in such a way as to
avoid exiting vehicles encroaching onto the
entering carriageway at the end of the traffic
deflection island. Normally, this would be at a
taper of 1:15 to 1:20, though where the exit is
on an up gradient, the local widening may be
extended to reduce intermittentcongestion from
slow moving larger vehicles and to provide an
overtaking opportunity for faster, vehicles.
Similarly, if the exit road is on a right hand
cunre, it may be necessary to extend the taper
length and the length of the traffic deflection
island. Within single carriageway exits, a
minimum width of 6m, measured normally to the
nearside kerb, should be provided adjacent to
traffic deflection islands to allow traffic to pass a
broken down vehicle. Figure 6.53 shows a
typical single carriageway exit embodying some
of the above principles. On exits, the edge line
should continue along the line of the kerbing
once this is terminated (see Figures 6.38 and
6.39).
January 1997
. . .
...Page 6/54,
.,
t-
. .
SECTION 6
..-
..
a
b
c
d
e
f
Main central Island

Low profile subsidiary central island where provlded
Remslning circulatory carriageway width 1.0-1.2 x maximum entry width
Design vehicle
l m clearance minimum
Inawlbed circle diameter ( E D )
Figure 6.52 Turning Widths for Smaller Normal Roundabouts
. .
January 1997
...
Pane 6/55

.
SECTION 6
6.1 0.1 4 . Crossfall and Longitudinal bradlent
Normal crossfall for drainage on roundabouts

should not exceed 2% (1 in 50). Crossfall
should not exceed 2.5% (1 in 40). To avoid
ponding, longitudinal edge profiles should be
graded at not less than 0.67% (1 in 150), with
0.5% (1 in 200) considered the minimum.
Steep gradients should be avoided at

roundabout approaches or flattened to a
maximum of 2% before entry. Crossfall and
longitudinal gradient combine to provide the
necessary slope that will drain surface water
from the carriageway. Thus, although the
following clauses are for simplicity written in
terms of crossfall, the value and direction of the
. greatest slope must always be taken into
account
when
considering
drainage.
Superelevation is arranged to assist vehicles
when travelling round a curve. Its values, when
used, are equal to or greater than those
necessary for surface water drainage.
The design gradients do not in themselves

ensure satisfactory drainage, and therefore the
correct siting and spacing of gullies is critical to
efficient drainage.
For Entries
Here, curves may be tightened, (see paragraph
6.10.9) and the degree of superelevation should
be appropriate to the speed of vehicles as they
approach the roundabout but superelevation
should not exceed 5% (1 in 20). In cases where
superelevation is used, it should be reduced to
the crossfa,llrequired merely for drainage in the
vicinity of the 'Give Way' line, since with
adequate advance signing and entry deflection,
speeds on approaches should be reducing.
Superelevation is not required on the circulatory

carriageways of roundabouts whereas crossfall
is required to drain surface water. However, on
the approaches and exits superelevafion can
assist drivers to negotiate the associated
cuwes.
To provide comfort and enable drivers to remain
in control, the maximum algebraic sum of
opposing crossfall gradients should not be
greater than 5%.
Figure 6.53
January 1997
-.
Typical Single Carriageway Exit
..
._
. . . ._ . .
...
Page 6/56
.-
.
SECTION 6
. .
b
1
Sectkn X-X
a Crown Line
b Smooth Crown
Figure 6.54 Typical Example of Crossfall Design Using One Crown Line Which Joins the Traffic
Deflection Islands by Straight Lines
For Circulatory Carriageway
Values of crossfall should be no greater than
those requiredfor drainage, although it is good
practice at normal roundabouts, to arrange for
crossfall to assist vehicles. To do this, a Cross
line is formed where the entry and exit
carriageways meet the conflicting crossfall of
the circulatory carriageway. This line can either
join the end of the traffic deflection islands from
entry to exit (Figure 6.54), or divide the
circulatory carriageway In the proportion 2:1
internal to external. The conflictingcrossfalls at
the crown lines have a direct effect on driver
comfort and may also be a contributory factor in
load shedding and large goods vehicle roll-over
accidents.
The maximum recommended
algebraic difference in crossfall is 5% although
lesser values are desirable, particularly for
roundabouts with smaller ICD. Care needs to
be taken. during 'dotailed design and at the
constmctlon stage lo ensure a satisfactory
carriageway profile, without sharp changes in
crossfall. is achievtrtl. A smoothed crown is
essential:
In some cases with tvnall ICDs it may be more

appropriate
apl'l~ crossfall across the full
circulatory cania9e~v11~
width either towards the
.-. .
. .
jnnuary 1997
..
central island or away from it. This should onli

apply where vehicle speeds are relatively low.,
For Exits
Superelevation, related to the horizontal
alignment, should be provided where necessary
to assist vehicles to accelerate safely away from
the roundabout. However, as with entries,
crossfalls adjacent to the roundabout should be
those required for surface water drainage. If the
exit leads into a left hand curve, superelevation
should not be introduced too quickly and to
such a value that vehicles tend to encroach into
an adjacent (dual or opposing single
carriageway) lane.
Adverse Crossfall
Adverse Crossfall is crossfall that acts against
the desired movement of a vehicle when
turning. It can lead to driver discomfort and
even safety hazards and should, if possible, be
eliminated from the paths of the main traffic
movements at norrnal roundabouts. Smaller
normal roundabouts In urban areas are often
superimposed upon existing pavement profiles
and in these cases, the cross section of the
existing roads will influence crossfalb at the
roundabout. T-Junctio'ns require particular
.. . .
.
Page 6/57

atiention. Some adverse crossfall can be
accepted in order to fit the existing levels
provided approach speeds are low. Limited
adverse crossfall at these roundabouts can
assist in making the form of junction more
conspicuous to drivers.
6.1 0.15 Segregated Right Turning Lanes
Segregated right turn lanes are a useful method

for giving an improved service to vehicles
intending to leave a roundabout at the first exit
after entry. Their use should be considered
when more than 50 percent of the entry flow, or
more that 300 vehicles per hour in the peak
hours, tum right at the first exit. However, when
considering the use of these lanes, vehicle
composition should be examined. If the right
turn vehicles are predominantly light and there
is a high proportion of cyclists and/or large
goods vehicles leaving the roundabout, there
could be problems with differential speeds at
the merge, particularly if this is on an uphill
gradient. If segregated lanes are to be used in
these situations they should finish with a "Give
Way' line at the exit to the lane.
The use of these lanes in urban areas where
pedestrians are expected to cross should be
carefully considered. In no circumstances
should pedestrians be expected to cross right
turn lanes segregated by road markings.
If pedestrians are anticipated they should be
channelled with the use of guard rail to a safer
crossing point. If this is not possible the
segregation should by a physical island of
sufficient width to accommodate the anticipated
peak number of pedestrians.
There are two basic types of segregated right
turn lanes, namely segregation by road
markings and physical segregation. In both
types, vehicles are channelled into the rlght
hand lane by lane arrows and road markings
supplemented by advance direction signs, and
vehicles proceed to the first exit without having
to 'Give Way" to others using the roundabout.
Segregation by road markings is more common,
but is less effective because it is subject to
abuse. It is essential that the operation of the
segregated lane is not impaired by traffic
queuing to use the roundabout itself. The
designer should ensure that the approach
arrangements are sufficiently clear so that they
are relatively self-enforcing.
Segregated right turn lanes should not induce'
high speeds. The design speed should not
exceed that of either the entry or exit link, and
any desirable speed reduction should be
achieved at the entry to the lane rather than
January 1997
SECTION 6
within it. Forward visibility throughout the

segregated lane should be the appropriate
stopping site distance for the design speed.
Where the large goods vehicle proportion is
low, the lane width may be reduced to 3.5m but
should not be less than 3.3m. Where road
markings are used to create the lane
segregation, the overall width of the marking
should normally be a minimum of 1.Om. Where
the large goods vehicle content is higher, the
lane width must be checked to ensure that it
can accommodate the swept paths of larger
vehicles, especially where physical segregation
occurs. Further information on the widening of
lanes on curves is given in Table 6.5 and
Section 3.
It is not necessary to make allowance for
broken down vehicles. With segregation by
road markings, such vehicles can be overtaken
with caution. Where physical segregation is
introduced, this should not prevent a right turn
at the roundabout in the normal way from the
non-segregated part of the approach.
These lanes have been observed to handle
1300 vehicles per hour with ease and for design
purposes a maximum capacity of 1800 light
vehicles per hour may be assumed where the
exit is free running. Segregated lanes need not
be considered as part of the entry when
calculating capacities for other traffic
movements.
The merging between vehicles from a
segregated right turn and other vehicles exiting
the roundabout should take place within 50m of
the roundabout, where speeds are still
comparatively low. Ideally, there should not be
a forced merge. However, running the two
streams alongside each other is only possible
where the exit link can provide two lanes in the
same'direction.
In other cases the segregated right turning
traffic has to merge with the other stream, giving
way where necessary. This merging length
should be at least 10m long. Segregation by
road markings is not recommended if vehicles
have to give way at the merge point. Where
street furniture is placed on the island in the
vicinity of the merge, it should not obstruct
visibility.
In the improvement of an existing urban TJunctions, the signing on the segregated right
turning lane must clearly indicate to drivers that
they have to 'Give Way" to vehicles leaving the
roundabout.
,.
. .
Page 6/58
HIGHWAY DESIGN
- . .:
QATAR
MANUAL
- .... : ....:.:
6.10.16 Road Markings
. , -.
a',;
Road markings are used to channelize traffic

and, where required, to indicate a dedicated
lane. Lane indication arrows to reinforce the
advance map type direction signs at entries can
be beneficial where heavy flows occur in a
particular direction.
Lane dedication by arrows and markings on the
circulatory carriageway is not normally
recommended.
Where a roundabout is
particularly extensive and partially signalled and
it is tending to a gyratory system, then some
degree of channelization by road markings may
prove beneficial operationally.
.
I
.;
Januar) 1997
..
.. .. . . . - ..
..
.. ...
. ..,. .,
.,
SECTION 6 . '
. .'
..
Page 6/59
6.i I U-TURNS GENERAL
The provision of U-tum facilities are appropriate

to a limited number of situations in rural
locations on dual carriageways and when
combined with other forms of junction in urban
situations. We shall consider rural U-turn
facilities only in this section.
Generally rural U-turns should be provided-in
advance of or beyond junctions as follows:
Beyond a junction to enable drivers to
retum to an important junction if they miss
.their turning
Beyond a junction to accommodate left
turn traffic movements not otherwise
catered for at the junction
SECTION 6
..., .
The area of median in the vicinity of the U-turn

should be kept uncluttered and free from
obstructions that are over 1.Om high and wider
than 500mm, with the exception of signs. The
visibility requirements are given in Table 6.1 5.
This measure will help to ensure that drivers
exiting from the U-turn are able to see vehicles
approaching from their right, and for them to be
seen by drivers on the major road.
U-turns, in a similar fashion to left turns,
contribute to congestion by drawing slow
moving tuming traffic into the offside lane. They
also add to the accident hazard particularly
where U-turning movements are heavy or of
slow moving vehicles. However, U-turns often
afford the best economically available solution
to a given problem.
In advance of a junction where through

and other turning movements would be
hampered by the U-turn movement
6.13 U-TURN ELEMENTS
To facilitate maintenance operations, use

by emergency services etc.
The main elements in the production of an

acceptable U-turn facility are:
One of the key requirements for a satisfactory

U-turn design is that the width of the
carriageway, including the shoulder or tuming
bay, be sufficient to permit the turn to be made
without encroachment beyond the outer edges
of the road pavement. The minimum median
width for a U-turn is 11.6m. This allows space
for physical islands each side of traffic waiting to
turn. U-Turns should be positioned at least
400m in advance of or beyond any junction.
Figure 6.55 illustrates the standard U-Tum
layout.
Wherever a U-turn facility is to be provided,
consideration should be given to providing a
reciprocal U-turn. This enhances safety by
reducing the likelihood of any illegal turning
movements that may have resulted from the
provision of a single U-turn facility and presents
a consistent layoutto drivers.
6.12 SAFETY AT U-TURNS
Safety is a major concern at all junctions,

particularly on high volume, high speed roads.
Where U-turn facilities are to be provided on
these roads, the hazard created by the turning
vehicles and their interference' with through
traffic must be minimised. Designs that enable
vehicles to be in a protected position while
waiting to turn are safest. As are those that
make the turning vehicle cross and leave the
opposing carriageway before returning to the
near side lane with a standard merge
movement.
January 1997
General
6.13.1
Median width
The length of the median opening
Use of acceIeration/deceleration lanes or
tapers
The nature of the turning traffic
The design speed of the main road.
Figure 6.55 and Table 6.15 detail standard UTurn layout arrangements for rural locations.
6.13.2
Direct Taper Length (d)
The direct taper length is the length over which

the width of a left turning lane is developed. Left
tuming lanes shall be introduced by means of a
direct taper whose length is part of the
deceleration length and depends on the design
speed. This taper length is given in Table 6.1 6.
6.13.3
Width. of Physlcai Islands in the

Median
The width of median at the turning point shall be

a minimum of 11.6m including hardstrips. This
width is sufficient to shelter most large goods
vehicles using the U-turn facility. The minimum
width of a physical island, usually located at the
end of the direct taper shall be 3.5m. The
minimum width of physical island separating the
storage lane from the through lanes shall be
1.2m or that necessary to incorporate signing.
Page 6/60

6.1 3.4
SECTION 6
Left Turn Lane
6.13.9
The length of the left turning lane will depend

on the major road design speed and the
gradient. It consists of a median opening length,
a storagelqueuing length and a deceleration
length. The deceleration length shall be
provided in accordance with Table 6.17, in
which the gradient is the average for the 500m
length before the U-turn opening.
6.1 3.5
6.1 3.1 0 Traffic Slgns and Road Marklngs

U-turns shall be clearly signed in accordance
with the Qatar Traffic Manual. Consideration
should be given to providing additional signing
for the traffic on the through route to indicate
that vehicles may be crossing the road ahead.
The opening in the median at the crossing point

shall typically be 11.Om wide, as shown on Fig
6.55. However this should be adjusted to suit
long 'vehicles or those with abnormal loads
when required.
6.13.1 1 Drainage and Crossfall

To allow for surface water drainage and driver
comfort, the road crossfall on the major road
shall be continued through the U-Turn. Checks
shall be made for flat areas at all changes in
gradient, superelevation or crossfall. Surface
run-off shall not be allowed to collect in streams
and flow from the U-Turn across the major
through road, or to collect on or cross the UTurn lane so as to present a hazard to vehicles
manoeuvring and braking. In addition, the rural
situation requires the engineer to carefully
consider the maintenance requirements of any
drainage system he adopts. Refer to Section
8.
...
StoragelQueulng Length (b)
The storagelqueuing length shall be determined

in accordance with the requirements of the
Qatar Traffic Maunal. The queuing length shall
be separated from through traffic by a physical
island on each side and the queuing lane width
shall be 5.0m.
6.13.7
Road Lighting
It is particularly important that U-turns are

clearly visible to through traffic. In all cases,
street lighting shall be provided. Refer Section
10.
Medlan Openings (a)
6.1 3.6
. .
Merging Length (e)
The merging length shall be constructed in

accordance with Clause 6.7.14. The merge
length commences a minimum distance of 45m
from the inside radius of the median opening, or
if the major road design speed is 120kph or
greater, the merge nose taper commences at
this point. The distance of 45m is that required
for the design vehicle to be parallel to the major
road carriageway following the U-turn
movement.
'
The width of shoulder on the exit of the U-turn

shall enable the design vehicle to make the Uturn without using excessive steering lock whilst
maintaining a 1m hardstrip from the outside
wheel to the edge of surfacing. To aid vehicle
direction, the shoulder should be marked or
studded to guide vehicles to the merging length.
6.13.8
Pavement Construction
The pavement construction for the entire U-turn

facility shall be a minimum of that used for the
major through road construction. Where
consistent heavy loading is expected, the
engineer should consider more durable
pavements. Refer to Section 9.
.. .
.
... .
...
. . ..
.
. . .
Januarv 1997
..
I_.
. ..,.. _ . . .
.(.
. . ..
.
'.
9 .
Paae 6/61
SECTION 6
.----------------------------------------------------------------------------
20
45 m k
,
.
8. Mmdhn opmnhg
b. Queuing kngth
c. D8cmbr8Uon imngth + dhetspmr lmngth
d. Diracl taper Imngth
a. Marping k n g h (norm kngh when ngulrmd)
b l and S2. Vislblmy dimnun
Figure 6.55 Typical U-Turn Layout
Design Speed
on Major Road
Sl
(m)
S2
(m)
(kph)
0-45
45-60
60-80
Over 80
50
75
125
175
5.0
7.5
10.0
10.0
Table 6.1 5 Visibility Distances
Design Speed
- (kph)
Direct Taper Length

(m)
50
5
5
60
15
70
80
15
25
100
30
120
140
35
Note: Rounding shall be applied to the kerblines, typically
SOmR.
Design
Speed
(kph)
04%
Above
4%
04%
Above
4%
50
60
70
80
100
120
140
25
25
40
55
80
110
150
25
25
25
40
55
80
110
25
25
40
55
80
110
150
25
40
55
80
110
150
200
Up Gradient
Down Gradient
Table 6.17 Deceleration Length

Dual Carriageways
- c (m) for
'
Table 6.1 6 Direct Taper Length - d
January 1997
Page 6/62

6.14 URBAN ROAD
SECTION 6
Avoiding long straight service roads
SERVICE ROAD
Service roads should be provided in the urban

situation where through traffic on a district
distributor or higher classification road will be
significantly affected by traffic manoeuvres from
developments lying adjacent to the through
road. The function of the service road is
therefore twofold:
Collects connecting minor roads and
concentrates the entrances and exits to a
limited number of locations along the
major road, thereby allowing major road
traffic to flow more freely
Provides road users with a safer
environment adjacent to developments by
separation from higher speed through
traffic.
Service roads typically run parallel to the major
road: However, their vertical alignment is often
governed by a lower design speed and can
therefore be used to match threshold levels in
existing development situations.
Service roads should preferably be connected
to major roads using the majorlminor junctions
criteria listed earlier in this Section. However,
limited reservation space usually requires the
junction to connect at a skew to the major road.
This creates the following undesirable situations
which the engineer should recognise in
preparing service road designs:
Providing satisfactory divergelmerge

lengths
Siting diverges and merges away from.
other junctions or traffic generation points
(both on the major and service roads).
Figure 6.56 shows a diverge and merge for a
service road off an urban road of design speed
100 kph or greater. The spacing of diverge
nose to merge nose is also fixed by the design
constraints of the facility. Major road
hardshoulders continue across the junction as
a painted hatched marking.
~ i g u r e6.57 shows a similar diverge and merge
for a service road off an urban road of design
speed 80 kph or greater but less than 100 kph.
The spacing of diverge nose to merge nose for
this design speed is fixed by the design
constraints of the facility.
Major road.
hardshoulders are shown with 45' tapers at
distances, set backs and shy distances shown.
The minimum weaving length between merges
and diverges is given in Table 6.18.
Design
Speed
(kph)
Minimum
MergeIDiverge
distance
(m) -
120
500
100
417
80
333
70
292
250
60
208
50
Note: Junction spacings may only be reduced below these
minima on the express approval of CED Roads.
.
Angled diverge off the main carriageway

encourages high speed entry into the
service road and consequent danger to
other service road users
Table 6.1 8 Minimum MergelDiverge Weaving

Length
Angled merge onto the main carriageway

requires the driver to make use of his
mirrors to effect a safe merge with major
road through traffic.
The minimum weaving length in metres

between successive
MergelMerge or
DivergeIDiverge measured between the tips of
the noses shall be:
The above points can be mitigated to some

extent by:
Eliminating parking and providing
uncluttered visibility in the area of merges
and diverges
Introducing a chicane type manoeuvre at
the entrance to a service road therefore
slowing traffic entering the service road
Increasing the conflict angle where
vehicles entering and vehicles using the
service road meet
. . . . .-
. " -
January 1997
- .
. .
Weaving Length (min) = 3.75V

Where V = design speed of main road (kph)
The distance given by the above formula may
be increased if the minimum requirements for
effectivesigning are p.rovided.
Note: Service roads would generally be one

way in the same direction as the major road, the
major road always being a dual carriageway or
minimum 11.3m wide single carriageway.
However, where space permits, a service road
may be two way with normal T-junction
entrylexits onto the major road.
. . . -. -.. .
.<
Page 6/63
SECTION 6
Deceleration
Y = 4.0m
__C
Major Road
__C
3m Shoulder
Service Road
One W a y
4-
Merging
Length
__C
Major Road
__C
3m Shoulder
One W a y
Y
'0
= 4.0m
Figure 6.56 Service Road DivergeIMerge for Speeds 2 100kph
Deceleration
__C
Service Road
Y=4.0m
P a r k i n g or Shoulder
Paint Marking
Merging Length
Service Road
One Way
Y=4.0m
Figure 6.57 Service Road DivergeIMerge for Speeds 2 80 kph < 100 kph
January 1997
Page 644

6.15 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
6.1 5.1 Residential Areas

In urban areas and, in particular, within
residential areas, where there is the likelihood
of pedestrians crossing the road and where
pa,rldngmay be on-street, careful consideration
is required at road junctions. .
The most commonly used junction to access
developments and the most appropriate is the
T-Junction. There are two basic forms of
access layout.
In the first form, the major traffic flow is on the
through route (eg. a local road with access
roads joining), as shown in Figure 6.58.
In the second form, shown in Figure 6.59, all
traffic is distributed to the residential access
roads. This is the preferred method,of treating
access roads, as the short lengths of straight,
combined with the turning movements required
at the junction, serve to restrict vehicle speeds
and the number of accesses onto and off the
major route.
SECTION 6
traffic flow, for drivers on the minor road to fail

to obey the priority signing and drive through the
junction, thereby creating a hazard to traffic on
the major road.
The preferred form of vehicular crossing
movement is the staggered crossroads.
Wherever possible the offset should be to the
left so that vehicles making the crossmovement first turn left then right. This is
discussed in Clause 6.2.3.
Roundabouts may be used at the jilnctions of
local roads with local roads and of local roads
with access roads.
However, roundabouts are generally only
required where the volume of traffic on the
minor road approaches is of the same order as
that on the major road, and where the overall
level of traffic is such that vehicles on the minor
road experience severe delay. If the residential
road network is properly planned, this should
not occur.
6.15.2 Older Residential Areas
Many existing older residential areas in Qatar

have particular requirements. When considering
recoristruction of these roads, the following shall
be noted:
Narrow road resewations giving rise to
poor visibility, especially at junctions
High parking requirement
Street system of ill defined through-ways, .
crossroads and rat-n~ns
Poor utility records and poor utility
condition
Figure 6.58 Multiple Access Roads Joining a

Major Road
Highly variable threshold levels, often

adjacent.
No existing surface water drainage
Existing development in low lying flood
areas
Poor illumination.
Figure 6.59 Access Roads Concentrated Prior

to Main Road Juncfion
As already discussed in Clause 6.2.2, the use
of 'simple' crossroads is not encouraged as
there is a tende-ncy, particularly in areas of low
Faced with this nurr~berof considerations, it is

essential that the engineer carefiilly plan the
revised road system to meet the requirements
of the area. Traffic should be restricted from
areas where it is undesirable, rat-runs should be
closed, parking regulated and surface water
effectively collected. The following are typical
actions:
..
January 1997
. . . .
..
Page 6/65
'
SECTION 6
Close or partially close one or more legs

of a crossroads
Provision of a sign posted alternative

cycle route away from a junction
lntroduce parking at every opportunity
Grade separation (eg. in urban areas) by

means of a footbridge or subway. This
could be combined for use by both
pedestrians and cyclists.
Close some minor access roads leading

into the development from local or district
distributors
Identify areas such as schools, shops,
mosques, etc that may require specific
consideration for parking or access
lntroduce one-way systems where
appropriate
.'
If provision of any of these is not possible, then

greater emphasis should be placed on safety
with carefully selected crossing places. At
roundabouts, where cyclists are always at risk,
motorists should be made aware of their
presence by road markings and signing,
especially where segregated right turning lanes
are used.
lntroduce traffic calming if required

Introduce-blockpaving as a road surface
to identify areas where pedestrian traffic
is a dominant factor
lntroduce effective surface water removal
Consider utility requirements for future
developments and reconstruction
Pedestrian requirements at major/minor

junctions including roundabouts should be
carefully considered.
Although it is preferable to provide separate
pedestrian routes away from junctions, where
road crossing widths are less and traffic
movements more predictable, this is rarely
practical.
Suggested facilities for improved pedestrian
safety at junctions are given below:
lntroduce street lighting.

Many of the factors identified for older
residential areas can be satisfactorily applied to
any older area. Engineers should first identify
the area uses and needs and apply suitable
solutions to arrive at a well thought out, safe
and useful environment.
'
6.15.3 Other Road ~ g e r s
Provision of a minor road central refuge

at an unmarked crossing place with
dropped kerbs and tactile paving, if in a
busy pedestrian area
Provision of a pedestrian crossing, with or
without a central refuge. These should
not be of excessive length or angled to
the road
'
'
The principle road users in Qatar are vehicles.

However, it is important that the'engineer also
considers the requirements of other users of the
road system, particularly cyclists and
pedestrians, where major/minor junctions
including roundabouts present a particular
hazard.
Measures to improve cyclist and pedestrian
safety are described below:
Provision of cycle lanes adjacent to the
running carriageway will go some way
toward protecting the cyclist. This lane
should be identified with the cycle lane
marking. At junctions the minor road
'Stop" and "Give Way" lines should be
set back out of the way of cyclists
Provision of a displaced cycle
track/footpath for shared use by
pedestrians and cyclists with uncontrolled
or controlled crossings at junctions
January 1997.
Provision of displaced
pedestrian crossings
controlled
Provision of a subway or footbridge.

At-grade pedestrian crossing points should not
be placed in the mouth of the junction. Instead
they should be located away from the mouth
where the carriageway is relatively narrow. In
urban areas, with low pedestrian flows, it is
possible to provide a central refuge in the
hatched area of a ghost island junction, though
it is important to check for the design vehicle
movements.
If a crossing giving pedestrians priority is
provided close to the entryiexit points of a
roundabout the safety of pedestrians will be
compromised and traffic operation problems
may become evident with the roundabout.
Where a crossing must be provided within the
layout of a roundabout, a non-signalized
.
Page 6/66
..
QATARHIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL
'
-.
..
. . .
i .
.......
"
.'
! . ....
- .
. _ .,
...,...
...
_ &
, . .^, _
. . . a .
" A
(i
. ..
'SECTI'ON'~
pedestrian crossing is preferred. A signalized

pedestrian crossing may be confusing to drivers
approaching the "Give Way' line of a
roundabout. If a signalized pedestrian crossing
is provided, it should preferably be of the
divided crossing type to minimise delays at the
exits.
In urban' areas, where large numbers of
pedestrians are present, pedestrian barriers
would prevent pedestrians from crossing
indiscriminately across the junction. They
should direct the pedestrians to a controlled,
safer place to cross. Pedestrian barriers should
be of the standard CED design and positioned
so that the drivers view of the pedestrians is
maintained and vice-versa.
L
I
i
The type of-.safety facility selected for

pedestrians and cyclists at majorlminor
junctions (including roundabouts) will depend
upon the expected volume and movements of
pedestrians, cyclists and vehicular traffic.
.
January 1997
.4:
............
-... . ,.._._... .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 6/67
SECTION 6
The lane width on the approach to the junction
shall be in accordance with Clause 5.2.
6.16 SIGNALIZED JLlNCTlONS
Introduction
6.16.1
Design of signalized junctions brings together

the highway engineer and the traffic engineer.
In Qatar this requires the close involvement of
the Civil Engineering Department - Roads
Division. The highway engineer is responsible
for the geometric parameters of the road design
on the approaches to and through the junction.
'The traffic engineer is responsible for the
specific layout of the junction in terms of
capacity, tliming movements, signing, marking,
pedestrian considerations, specification and
position of signals.
Reference shall be made to the Qatar Traffic
Manual and a concept layout should be agreed
with the Director of Civil Engineering
Department prior to proceeding with the
preliminary and detail design stages.
Basic Requirements
6.1 6.2
'
When designing traffic signal installations, care

should be taken to ensure the following:
Drivers have sufficient advance warning
to know exactly which direction to take at
the junction
The number of lanes at the stop line shall be

maintained across the junction to the exit lanes.
The possibility of introducing slip roads at the
corners of a junction should always be
considered. These allow right turning traffic to
'Give Way" or "Stopn rather than wait for the
signals. They also provide larger turning radii
than would otherwise be the case and can be
beneficial to pedestrians when provided with
clearly defined crossing points.
If U-Turns are to be provided at the junction,

lane widths and turning movements of different
vehicles should be considered and the position
of pedestrian refuge points checked against
possible cpnflict.
It is preferable that left turn lanes and through
lanes are segregated by physical islands for the
entire queuing length. It is also preferable that
entry and exit traffic on opposing carriageways
is segregated by a median or physical island.
Minimum visibility requirements to the primary
signals are detailed in the Qatar Traffic Manual.
Drivers are guided into the intended lane

or lanes by road markings
Drivers have a clear view of the signals at
the junction itself
The junction layout allows easy visual
recognition of correct exit lanes and
required vehicle trajectory.
.
Movement from 'Stop" line to exit lane is

a natural flowing.movement and does not
interfere with other movements allowed at
the same time.
6.16.3
Typical Layout Features
It is impractical to deal with all possible

variations of junctions. The various features
mentioned is this clause may be considered for
most situations.
The size of traffic islands and pedestrian refuges
is important. Adequate clearance between the
kerb and any street furniture is needed to
prevent damage by vehicles having a lateral
overhang.
January 1997
',
Page 6/68
SECTION 7
INTRODUCTION
7.1
For new roads with high predicted traffic flows,

consideration can be given to grade separation.
Grade separation removes conflicts between
the major vehicle flows thereby improvingsafety
and capacity of an intersection. For existing atgrade junctions, grade separation can also be
considered to improve safety and capacity if
these particular problems have been identified.
It is important for the engineer to use the correct
terminology. The principle definitions relating to
grade separation are given below:
Intersection: The meeting point of two or more
. .
roads.
Junctlon: The treatment of the road alignment
at the intersection to enable traffic to negotiate
the intersection in the defined manner.
Grade Separatlon: Removes conflicts arising
from an intersection by the provision of a
bridge.
Interchange: When grade separation is used
but a connection is maintained between the
roads, this combination of grade separation and
junctions is called an interchange.
lnterchanges may be complex and include
extensive connecting roads and loops. They will
only be required for the highest range of traffic
flows.
This section sets out the requirements for the
design, layout and size of Interchanges. It is
essential that the engineer produces safe
designs that provide adequate capacity.
lnterchanges are generally required between
primary routes and between primary and
secondary routes although they may be
positioned at the intersection of any urban or
rural road. The major selection criteria are
always safety and capacity.
lnterchanges may be considered to improve an
existing junction for a number of different
reasons. For example:
a)
To remove a hazardous main at-grade

junction in order to improve safety
b)
To' eliminate traffic delays at a bottleneck

caused by the volume of crossing and
turning traffic
, ,: .
Januarv 1997
'
c)
To improve the alignment of a road
d)
To standardise junction types when

upgrading a corridor to motorway status.
7.2
TYPES OF INTERCHANGE
7.2.1 General
The decision to provide an interchange and the

type and detailed design of an lnterchange will
be specific to a particular site. The selection of
the most suitable facility for a particular site and
the'associateddesign parameters depend upon
a number of controlling factors which include:
Safety
Road classification for the connecting
routes
Design speed
Traffic volume and mix
Requiredjunction capacity
Number of junction legs
Topography
Land available, the type of land and its
present use
Economics
Lighting
Environmental impact
Access to local communities
Pedestrians, farming and cyclists.
Safety is always the most important factor

followed by capacity.
Layouts will vary for different locations. It is
unlikely that the layout for one site could be
directly applicable for another. The traffic and
topography are unlikely to be the same.
However, it is desirable to standardise layouts
along a particular route wherever possible to
attempt to reduce confusion to drivers and
thereby improve safety.
The two forms of lnterchange considered
provide a wide variety of types available to the
engineer. These have been classified into the
following generic types for selection of the most
suitable form:
Full lnterchanges
Full interchanges combine grade separation of
major conflicts with slip or loop roads that begin
and end with diverges and merges.
Full cloverleaf interchange

Directional interchange with variants
3-leg junction types including trumpets
Partial cloverleaf.
SECTION 7
. .
Compact lnterchanges
Compact lnterchanges combine grade
separation of major conflicts with connector
roads that either begin or end with a form of
junction other than a diverge or merge.
- Diamond junctions and variants

- Roundabouts and variants
-- Half cloverleaf and variants
Compact 3 and 4 leg grade separation
unctions and Weaving Sections
The main aim of grade separation is to remove

the conflicts between turning vehicles thereby
improving safety and capacity. Therefore
particular attention must be paid to the design of
those areas of an interchange where this
conflict cannot be removed.
Junctions are the areas of carriageway where
traffic joins or leaves the main road and are the
locations where accidents are most likely to
occur.
a)
. All left turn movements are provided for

with one grade separated single structure
b)
All traffic movements are free flowing
c)
The interchange may be built in stages
d)
Trafficsignalsarenotrequired.
L
I
Disadvantages:
. . . L.
~equireslarge land take
b)
Weaving lengths on both routes are

greatly reduced. A collector distributor
road would help weaving by reducingthe
traffic speed, but would increase the
structural costs
c)
Multiple merges and diverges complicate

traffic signing
d)
Short deceleration lane lengths for inner

loops
7.2.2 Full lnterchange
e)
The design speed of the inner loops is

generally low
This form of interchange provides uninterrupted

movement for all tuming traffic by the use of
interchange links.
f)
Provision for U-turn movement is

restricted until fully constructed
Full Cloverleaf lnterchange
g)
Significant environmental impact due to

the size of the junction.
On a dual carriageway the distance between

any combination of successive junctions is
called a weaving section. This is the length of
carriageway in which drivers change lanes in
advance of tuming off the main road. Due to
lane changing, weaving sections must be
carefully designed in order to give drivers
sufficient time to make their manoeuvres safely.
Refer to Clause 7.4.9.
c-i
L,
Advantages:
a)
On a single carriageway road the length

between successive junctions is called the
stagger distance. Refer to Section 6.
A typical full cloverleaf interchange is shown in

Figure 7.1. It is a 4 leg interchange which
provides free flow movements for all traffic. It
completely eliminates all left turn conflicts.
Inner loop/slips are provided for the 4 left turn
movements and outer loop/slips are provided
for the 4 right turn movements.
Trumpet Junctions
Trumpet junctions can be of varying forms.
Typical layouts are shown in Figures 7.2 and
7.3.
Advantages:
Figure 7.1 ~ u lCloverleaf

l
lnterchange
a)
'The layouts generally provide a relatively

high speed semi-direct connection for
large traffic flows
b)
Only one structure is normally required
c)
Successive merges and diverges are

avoided therefore no weaving lengths are
required
-- - L
'
'.
Page 712
CJ
j
January
. .
1997

.-
SECTION 7
Traffic signals are not required
7.2.3 Compact lnterchange
e)
Can orientate the largest radii loop to the

larger traffic flow
f)
All movements are free flow
g)
Relatively easy to sign although some

gantry type signs may be required
h)
Lower environmental impact than

cloverleaf and variants is achievable with
landscaping and sympathetic topography.
This form of interchange involves the grade

separation of the major turning movements
combined with low-grade junctions at the
commencement or termination of slip roads or
loop roads to accommodate the turning
movements on the minor road. The low-grade
junction element, whether a major/minor
junction, roundabout or signalization, can
produce three' main types of compact
interchange.
d)
'
Disadvantages:
b)
Should be used with care when the

terminating leg is on a high speed route
The abrupt end of a high speed route
requires ~ubstantialspeed reduction with
a potential for reducing safety
c)
Can only sensibly be used for 3 leg

interchanges
a)
d)
U-turn movement is not provided for

unless the interchange includes
additional loops and slips that can be
very long.
Dlamond lnterchange and Variants

A diamond interchange has slip roads parallel
to the major road. The major route is grade
separated over or under the minor road.
Turning movements are catered for at Tjunctions between the slip roads and the minor
road.
'
The diamond is the simplest form of

interchange and is usually the most common.
It is essential that the forward visibility and
stopping sight distance of the slip road
approaching the at-grade intersection should
be designed to the correct standards. Most
accidents occur at the at-grade junctions where
vehicles cannot stop in time.
A typical diamond interchange layout is shown
in Figure 7.4.
Figure 7.2
Right Hand Trumpet lnterchange
Figure 7.4
Diamond Interchange
Advantages:
Figure 7.3
. - .. .
Left Hand Flattened Trumpet,

Restricted Movement.
a)
High standard merges and diverges can

be provided in advance and beyond the
structure
-
January 1997
Page 713

b)
Economic landtake and low construction

costs
c)
Single exit slip road simplifies signing
d)
No weaving lengths are required on the

major road
e)
No acceleration or deceleration tapers

required on or under structures
f)
Simple structures can be achieved
g)
Can improve capacity of the at-grade

intersection by providing extra lane width
at entry, segregated turning lanes and
traffic signals.
a)
Lower capacity on the minor road due to

left turning movements
b)
Many points of conflict on the'minor road

increasing the accident potential. Traffic
signals will help reduce conflict
c)
With the many tuming movements at two

locations on the minor road, visibility and
intervisibility is difficult
d)
Possibility of traffic tuming the wrong way

down slip roads
e)
Turning traffic from the primary route has

to stop at the secondary route with the
possible requirement of wider lanes for
storage capacity
f)
Little possibility of future expansion of the

junction.
lnterchange with Roundabouts and Variants

Interchanges with roundabouts can provide a
more flexible junction arrangement than a
diamond interchange. The roundabout element
can cater for varying turning volumes, thereby
reducing the overall delay to vehicles in
comparison with simple T-junction elements.
They are particularly useful when there is a
large percentage of left turning traffic.
The two most common forms of roundabout
interchange are the two bridge and the
dumbbell type. The dumbbell type is the most
economic because of the single structure and
reduced landtake, however the two bridge type
is safer for larger volumes of traffic. These are
shown in Figures 7.5 and 7.6.
SECTION 7
Figure 7.5
Dumbbell
lnterchange
Roundabout
Figure 7.6 Two

Bridge
lnterchange
Roundabout
Advantages:
a)
The dumbbell roundabout is very

economic with a signal structure and very
small landtake
b)
The two bridge roundabout, although not

so economic is safer with a less confined
"Give Way" area
c)
High standard merge and diverge can be

provided in advance and beyond the
structure
d)
Single exit slip roads simplify signing
e)
No weaving lengths are required on the

major route
.
1)
g)
No acceleration or decelerationtapers on
. or under structures
Simple 'structures can be achieved
January 1997
Page 714
h)
Can improve capacity of two bridge

roundabout by providing extra lane width
at entry, segregated turning lanes and
traffic signals.
4lh Quadnnt
Disadvantages:
a)
b)
The efficiency of the roundabout relies on

drivers being aware of how roundabouts
operate. Drivers must give way to traffic
on the roundabout to their left and must
not queue across the exits which would
cause the roundabout to lock
Difficult to enter large, two bridge
roundabouts if circulatory speeds are
high.
Compact 3 and 4 Leg Partial Cloverleaf

Interchanges
Compact partial cloverleaf intersectionscan be
used in rural or urban locations. They are
simple, low speed versions of partialcloverleafs
with the same advantages and disadvantages
except that they have smaller land take and
lower cost. Typical compact partial cloverleaf
interchanges are shown in Figures 7.7 and 7.8.
2nd Quadnnt
Figure 7.8
Partial
'
a)
Provide a safe means of crossing a high

speed route
b)
~ e d u c 6the ekironmental impactof full

interchanges :by providing,a compact
junction layout. .
.
c)
Regulate and maintain vehicle speed for

minor route traffic through the junction at
a level appropriate to the layout
standards
d)
Remove the left turn manoeuvres from

the major route
e)
Provide a junction with minimal land take
Provide an operational, efficient junction

layout.
g)
Provide an economic solution for

modifying an existing junction to grade,
.'separation standards.
4th Quadrant
'
3rd Quadrant
Figure 7.7
variant of compact
Cloverleaf lnterchange
The objectives of compact partial cloverleafs

are as follows:
Connector
Road
2nd Quadrant
3rd Quadmnt
Compact
Partial
lnterchange
Cloverleaf
The only disadvantageis that high speed traffid

.on the major route will exit on a tight loop.
te
signing, good
radius. ~ d e q ~ a advanced
visibility and chevron signing at the exit point
will reduce the safety hazard. If all such
junctions along a primary route are the same
then drivers would be very aware of the
tightness of all such loops and would adapt
accordingly. .
it is only when the% i s inconsistency in the

design standards and types of junctions that
drivers are confused and safety is
compromised.
. ..
January 1997
..
- . . . .. .. .
- .. ..
..
Page 715

7.3
SELECTION OF INTERCHANGETYPE
than the minimum weaving length as defined in

Clause 7.4.9.
7.3.1 General
This section outlines the design procedures for
selecting a form of interchange most suitable for
a particular location. The geometric design of
the elements are covered in Clause 7.4. A
series of preliminary designs shall be prepared
for comparison before final selection and
production of a detailed design.
7.3.4 Initial Information Requlrements and

Declsions
The following information must be collated to
form the basis for the selection of the most
appropriate type of-interchangefor a particular
location.
Required Information:
7.3.2 Traffic Flows and Design Year

The major factor influencing junction design is
safety. However, for the road network to operate
efficiently, new junctions must have sufficient
capacity. It is not possible to ensure at the time
of design that' a new junction has sufficient
capacity indefinitely. Instead, new and improved
junctions shall be designed on traffic levels
predicted to occur in the Design Year, typically
20 years after the opening of the schemes, to
ensure that they are free of conge'stion for a
reasonable period.
a)
Define the classification of the roads

approaching the intersection
b)
Define the carriageway cross-section of

the roads on each side
c)
Define the design speed of the roads
d)
Define the proposed opening year for the

new facility'
e)
-
Predicted traffic flows shall be based on the

existing, observed traffic flows growthed up to
model the Design Year flows. All Junctions and
Interchanges shall be designed using the peak
hour flows. The use of peak hour flows will
model the worst case for traffic congestion. Of
particular 'vportance to junction design is the
volume of traffic undertaking each turning
manoeuvre. All predicted traffic volumes and
turning volumes for the Design Year shall be
agreed with CED Roads.
'
f)
Define the location of any constraints to

the scheme.
These include land
ownership, existing and proposed
utilities, planning constraints, topography,
dry wadi courses, flood plains and
ground conditions.
g)
Define the environmental constraints.

These include proximity to dwellings,
severance of communities, plants of
particular importance, animal habitats
and regularly used animal tracks and
migration routes.
7.3.3 Junction Spacing Within the Network

In deciding on the form of the interchange the
engineer must consider the location within the
overall road network. 'The aim must be to
produce a consjstent junction strategy across
the network that maximises safety. Guidance on
the junction strategy for a particular location
shall be sought from CED Roads.
The minimum spacing of c~nsec~utive
junctions
on a multi-lane road is defined in Clauses 6.1.4
and 7.4.9, and is based on safety requirements
for weaving movements. This minimum spacing
will also allow the design of effective traffic
signing and lighting schemes for each junction.
These clearances shall be achieved between
the maximum extent of the consecutive merges
and diverges for each junction. In no
circumstances.shall spacing between junctions
of consecutive interchanges be reduced lower
January 1997
Obtain the existing traffic volumes must

be obtained for the peak hour and apply
growth factors.
.
Having collated the above information, the

following decisions must be made before
finalizing the form to be used.
Initial Decisions:
a)
Agree the overall strategy with CED

Roads
b)
Agree predicted traffic volumes and

turning volumes with CED Roads
c)
Decide which turning movements will be

accommodated
.
Page 716
d)
Decide which movements will be given

priority with grade separation and highgrade links, and which minor movements
will be accommodated by low-grade links
and junctions
g)
Provision for "on-motorway 'traffic and

non-motor vehicle road users
h)
.Estimate of construction costs
The engineer'must also consider:

e)
Confirm
horizontal and
clearances for structures.
vertical
7.3.5 Type of Interchange for Preliminary

Design
The type of facility must be selected before

preliminary designs are prepared. The various
types of junction and their relative advantages
and disadvantages have also been discussed in
Section 6. For a given location two or more
types of facility may be worked up into
preliminary designs for evaluation.
i)
Method of construction
j)
Method of maintenance
k)
Environmental
landscaping
I)
Lighting and signing principles
m)
Provision of safety fences and barriers.
effects
including
Preliminary designs will be discussed with CED

Roads and approval granted before the
engineer progresses to detailed design. Certain
elements of the preliminary designs may need
to be worked up into more detail at the request
of CED Roads to fully assess the relative merits
of the prehminary designs.
No fixed rules can be given for the selection due

to the multitude of criteria that must be
considered. Each location will have different
governing criteria and it is for the engineer to
use his experience to select the most
appropriate type for evaluation.
Safety will always be the highest priority.
However, adequate capacity is also important to
reduce congestion and thereby improve safety.
Refer to Section 6.3.
7.3.6 Preliminary Designs
. Preliminary designs are prepared for alternative

arrangements to assess suitability and relative
costs. The main elements of the facility must be
defined in sufficient detail and at a suitable
scale to determine the landtake required.
The items to be defined in the preliminary

design include:
a)
Safety implications for road users and

non-road users
b)
Number of lanes required for each

movement
c)
Radii of links and loops
d)
Vertical and horizontal clearances for

structures and maximum carriageway
gradients
e)
Lengths of loop roads, slip roads and

merges and diverges
f)
Lengths of weaving sections
..
....-.
.'
January 1997
..--
...
,-
..
. ....
..,-
_. . ...
Page 7/7

7.4
SECTION 7
DESIGN ELEMENTS
A particular form oi
connector road where the
carriageway turns through
an angle of approximately
270" - in
order
to
accommodate the traffic
movement.
Loop Road:
7.4.1 Definitions
Interchangesare made up of distinct elements,

each sewing different purposes. Any one
facility may have any number of these elements.
The detailed design of each of these separate
elements is covered in this section. For
clarification, they are defined below:
or
The
carriageway
carriageways that are given
priority, generally by nature
of carrying the highest
volume of traffic.
Main Road:
'
Minor Road:
Merge:
...
The
carriageway
or
carriageways that are not
given priority, generally by
nature of carrying low
volumes of traffic.
Weaving Section: The length of carriageway

between
successive
merges and diverges where
traffic changes lanes in
order to reach its chosen
exit.
Physical Nose:
The point where the

carriageway surfaces of the
main line and the merge or
diverge separate.
Painted Nose:
The length of chevron

marking from the physical
nose to the intersection of
the merge or diverge with
the main road travelled way.
The area of, tapered

carriageway where traffic
joins the,main road.
7.4.2 Design Speed
Diverge:
The area of tapered

carriageway where traffic
leaves the main road.
Auxiliary Lane:
Connector Road:
'
An additional lane added

parallel to the main road and
used in conjunction with a
merge or diverge carrying
higher traffic volumes to
provide extra capacity.
he length of road that joins

merges, diverges, 'Give
Way" or "Stopn junctions
within an interchange. Slip,
Link and Loop roads are
types of connector road.
Link Road:
A
particular form of
connector road that joins
diverges and merges within
a full interchange to provide
uninterrupted movement for
turning traffic.
Slip Road:
The length of carriageway

between the end of the
merge or diverge and the
"Give Way" or "Stopn line on
the junction within the
overall interchange.
January 1997-
Design speeds for slip roads and link roads are

related to the design speeds for the main road
as shown in Table 7.1.
Urban
a) l20kph
Main Road
Design
b) lOOkph
Spa
Rural
(a) l4Okph
(b) l20kph
Type of
Connector
Road
Road
Slip
Road
Unk
Road
Sllp
Road
Design
a)120or100
a)70
a)140or120
a)80
Speed
b)100or80
b)70
b)120or100
b)80
Link
Table 7.1 Design Speed for Link and Slip

Roads
Where two alternative design speeds are
shown, the engineer may use the lower if it is
considered that safety will not be compromised.
Where transition curves are used between
design elements within the Interchange, the
transition curve relating to the higher design
speed must be used. The appropriate Stopping
Sight Distance must always be used. Design
speeds on slip roads-must not be reduced
below the stated values as they terminate with
"Stopn or "Give Way" junctions and would
compromise safety.
Page 718
- .
,...

7.4.3 Lane Provision and Capacity
Lane provision for the main road, slip roads, link

roads and loops shall be based on the agreed
traffic flows as defined in Clause 7.3.2. For
interchanges, the minimum number of lanes
provided on any particular element of the
junction shall be based on 1600 vehicles per
lane per hour. The number of lanes shall be
rounded up to the nearest whole number.
The engineer may wish to increase the lane
provision above the minimum defined above for
operational reasons. The 1600 figure is based
on UK acceptable congestion standards for all
purpose roads and may not be suitable for all
locations in Qatar.
Lane provision' for the main road or roads
through the junction shall not be less than the
provision either side of the junction except with
the approval of CED Roads.
Where the minimum lane provision is one lane,
the engineer may wish to add an extra lane to
reduce the potential for problems with broken
down vehicles blocking the carriageway or
restricted space for maintenance. Any proposed
changes from the minimum lane provision shall
be agreed with CED Roads.
Provision on Main Road
Hard Shoulder
Sllp .
Roads
Link
Roads
Terminate
hard
shoulder opposite
physical
nose.
Redwe at 1:30 to
1.0m edge strip.
Terminate edge
strip 10m before
'Give W a r or
'Stop' line
Continua edge strip

to 10m before 'Give
way' or 'Stop' line
If both main roads

have
hard
shoulden, continue
them along the fink
road.
If
not,
terminate
hard
shoulder opposite
physical
nose.
Reduce at 1:30 to
1.Om edge strip.
If both main roads

have edge sMps
continue them along
the link road.
As link roads
As lmk roads
I I 1
Table 7.2
Edge Strip
Provision of Hard Shoulders and

Edge Strips on Connector Roads
7.4.5 Merges and Diverges at Interchanges
7.4.4 Hard Shoulders and Edge Strips
Within interchange areas, merges and diverges

are the locations where accidents are most
likely.@occur. It is essential for the engineer to
pay particular attention to their layout. Traffic
should be able to leave or join the main road as
smoothly as possible. To this end, the speeds
of traffic joining or leaving the main road must
be similar to that on the main road. Acceleration
or deceleration to the appropriate speed should
take place 'on the slip road or link road before
the merge or after the diverge. The geometry of
the carriageway or other conditions in the
vicinity of the merge or diverge must not
impede this smooth flow. Queuing in the area of
the merge or diverge must be avoided.
Where hard shoulders or edge strips

(Reference to Section 5.4 and 5.5) are provided
on the main road either side of the interchange,
they shall be continued through the interchange.
For connector roads, the provision of hard
shoulders or hard strips shall be in accordance
with Table 7.2.
Two alternative types of merge and diverge

shall be used depending on the volumes of
traffic as defined in Clause 7.3.2. They are the
standard taper and the auxiliary lane layout..
The auxiliary lane layout has an additional lane '
parallel to the main road to increase capacity of
the merge or diverge taper.
On the main road, the hard shoulder or edge

strip shall continue immediately after the
chevrons for the painted nose.
To select a merge layout, hourly flows for the

merge and the upstream mainline are inserted
into the nomograph Figure 7.9.
The
intersection point of the merge and upstream
main line flows will fall within a segment of the
nomograph from which the number of lanes
required on the connector road, and need for
an auxiliary lane are determined.
For the majority of interchanges, the maximum

number of lanes provided for connector roads,
is likely to be two. If the lane provision for any
particular connector road, is more than two, the
engineer may have incorrectly defined which is
the main road and shall refer to CED Roads for
guidance.
January 1997
Page 719
SECTION 7
To select a diverge layout, the procedure is

repeated using the hourly flows for the diverge
and the downstream mainline, and the
nomograph Figure 7.10. The mainline lane
capacity is based on a flow of 1600 vehihour.
Generally the auxiliary lane layout is used in
locations with higher volumes of traffic. The
auxiliary lane shall be the same width as the
nearside lane of the main road but may be
reduced to a minimum width of 3.5m in urban
areas on approval of CED Roads.
Where the existing mainline lane capacity is
already at a maximum or where exceptionally
large merge or diverge flows are expected,
provision of a lane gain a lane drop may be
required. In these instances, the engineer
should refer to'the 'Design Manual for Roads
and Bridges, Volume 6 Road Geometry, Section
2 Junctions, Part I TD22192 Layout of Grade
Separated Junctionsw and the merge and
diverge layouts should be agreed with CED
Roads.
The standard taper and the parallel taper merge
and diverge are shown in Figures 7.1 1, 7.12,
7.13 and 7.14. The geometric parameters for
setting out are shown in Table 7.3 for merges
and Table 7.4 for diverges.
Stopping Sight Distance in accordance with the
higher design speed from the adjacent elements
shall be provided over the whole length of the
merge or diverge
January 1997
. . .
'
7/10
.. .. .Page
.. . . . . . .
C . _ .
. -
Q ~ A tRi i G H V i l ~ DESIGN
;~
MANUAL
h
L
3
0
2000
,
,
1500
,
,
. .
.
.
.
. .. . ::\
,
.:
............
5
Q)
-2
LL
............
al
F
r
Q)
1000,-
Lane 1 Lane 2
Upstream Mainline
I
0
Lane 3
Lane 4
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
II
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Upstream Mainline Flow (Vehhour)
A = standard Taper
B = Auxiliary Lane
Figure 7.9 Merge Design

........
. . . . ;.
January 1997
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . _ . . . . . .
>
. .a,.'
I .
Page 711 1
Diverge Flow (Vehlhour) .
.-

Road Class
Length of entry
taper (m)
(1)
Taper for min

angle at
physical nose
- SECTION 7
Painted nose
length (m)
Min auxiliary
lane length (m)
Length of aux lane per

lane provided (m)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
Rural
140 kph
120 kph
100 kph
205
150
130
1 :40
1 :30
1 :25
115
85
75
230
190
160
75
55
55
130
95
75
1 :25
1:15
1:12
75
50
40
160
125
loo.
55
40
40
Urban
120 kph
100 kph
80 kph
Table 7.3
Geometric Parameters for Merges
Painbd
Auxhry Lone
Physical
(4) 6 (5)
- - -- - - - - - - - - - - ---- - ----C------------------------IC
Figure 7.1 2 Auxiliary Lane Merge
Figure 7.11 Standard Taper Merge
Road Class
Length of exit
taper (m)
Taper for
min angle
at physical
nose
Painted nose
length (m)
Min auxiliaty
lane length (m)
Length of aux lane per

lane provided (m)
(4)
(5)
(6)
1 lane
(1)
2 lane
(2)
170
150
130
1 85
150
130
1:15
1:15
1:15
80
70
70
200
170
150
75
55
55
130
95
75
130
110
90
1:15
1:15
1:12
70
50
40
150
125
100
55
40
40
(3)
Rural
140 kph
120 kph
100 kph
Urban
120 kph
100 kph
80 kph
Table 7.4
Geometric Parameters for Diverges
Physical
N;=~-N;-~
Painted
p e r
(1) 6 (2)
----- -----........................
Figure 7.1 4 Auxiliary Lane Diverge
Figure 7.13 Standard Taper Diverge
January 1997
..
r t . .
Page 7/13

In addition to the above setting out information
the engineer should also ensure that the
crossfalls in the vicinity of the merge and
diverge areas are suitable for the safety of high
speed vehicles crossing at angles. Ideally the
main road crossfall should be continued across
the merge or diverge up to the physical nose. If
this cannot be achieved the maximum permitted
difference in crossfall between the mainline and
the merge or diverge is 4% for design speeds
less than l2Okph and 2.5% for designs speeds
of 120kph or greater.
The radius of the edge of carriageway or
kerbline on merges and diverges may be
reduced to that applicable to the next lowest
design speed over a maximum distance of 50m
in the immediate vicinity of the join to the slip
road or link road. Transitions in this vicinity may
be used at the engineers discretion.
SECTION 7
7.4.8 Loop Roads

The minimum radii for loops are given in Table
7.5, measured in accordance with Figure 7.16.
They are not related to design speed. For the
purposes of Stopping Sight Distance on loops
the driver must have uninterrupted sight to a
point a minimum of 100" around the loop from
his current position, measured in accordance
with the standard method for Stopping Sight
Distance. Refer to Clause 2.2. Consideration
shall be given to the use of 7% superelevation
on loops in accordance with the requirements
of Clause 3.4.
The maximum gradient applicable to loops
shall be 6%. The gradient along the loop shall
be constant from the physical nose to the end
of the loop and shall be determined by the
required vertical clearance between the two
roads.
7.4.6 Slip Roads

Slip roads shall be designed in accdrdance with
the design speeds from Table 7.1. If a slip road
is longer than 750m it shall be designed in
accordance with the method for Link Roads.
Secondary Roads
Primary
Roads
''/Off Main
Road
75m
Horizontal and vertical design of slip roads shall

be in accordance with the parameters for main
roads but with the exception that the maximum
vertical gradient may be increased to 6%.
Guidance shall be sought from CED Roads if
steeper gradients are proposed on slip roads.
On to Main
Road
Off Main Road
30m
50m
Table 7.5 Minimum Radii for Loops

A typical arrangement for a loop is shown in
Figure 7.1 5.
The appropriate Stopping Sight Distance

relating to the design speed must be provided
over the whole of the slip road between the
physical nose and the "Give Way" or "Stop* line.
The minimum length of slip road is therefore the
Stopping Sight Distance relating to the
appropriate design speed.
The engineer shalt check that the slip road is of
sufficient length in order to develop the level
difference required for grade separationfrom the
main road. The cross-section between the slip
road and main road should also be checked to
ensure that it does not exceed the maximum
safe angle of the slope which will depend on the
nature of the soil.
Figure 7.1 5 Typical Loop Arrangement
7.4.7 Link Roads

Link roads must ensure the smooth flow of traffic
between the main roads. They shall be designed
in accordance with the appropriate design
speeds from Table 7.1 using the parameters for
main roads.
January 1997
- ------
R = Radhta (Rater T8ble7.5)

L = Lane WMO, (Rmfer Table 0.6)
E Edge SMp (Refer Table 8.5)
Figure 7.16 Measurement of Loop Radii
.-,.
. ..
Page 7114
. .
'
7.4.9 Weaving Sections
SECTION 7
>.
The 'minimum spacing between junctions is

defined in Clause 6.1.1. This distance is
required to ensure that the traffic changing lanes
as a result of the first junction does not interfere
with the traffic changing lanes for the second. In
effect, the minimum spacing between junctions
eliminates the need for specially designed
weaving sections. It also allows for the provision
of suitable signing.
N =- (QnW +Qw, +aW2(2%

+ I))
D
La,
The parameters in the above equation are
defined in Figure 7.1 8.
Flow 3
Weaving sections are those areas of

carriageway, within interchanges, between
successive merges and diverges that allow
traffic to safely change lanes in order to
accomplish their next turning movement. They
are measured between the points shown on
Figure7.17. '
Flow 1
Flow 2
,
Flow 4
'
Where:
....?,
------5----C
Weaving Length
( L , to L,,)
Number of traffic lanes
Q,,,
Total non-weaving flow (vph)
Qwl =
Major weaving flow (vph)
Q,
Minor weaving flow (vph)
Max mainline flow (vpMane)
L,,
Desirable min weaving length

for the road class.
La,
Actual weaving length

available (m).
(where L,, >LmJ
Q,
Flow 1 + Flow 2
- ;
.-4
Figure 7.17 Measurement of Weaving Length

I
L
.-
--,
The minimum weaving distance shall be

provided between all merges and diverges
within an interchange. This distance is defined
as that which is covered in fifteen seconds by a
vehicle travelling at the design speed. Weaving
lengths are summarised in Table 7.6.
Qwr =
Design Speed
(kph)
Min Weaving
Length (m)
140
120
100
80
583
500
417
Q,
Greater of Flow 2 or Flow 3

Lesser of Flow 2 or Flow 3
Figure 7.1 8 Weaving Parameters
333
Table 7.6 Minimum Weaving Length

In all cases the minimum weaving length shall
be checked against the following equation for
the number of lanes. The length of the weaving
section shall be increased such that no more
than one auxiliary lane is required to accomplish
weaving.
January 1997
Page 7115

7.5
OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
7.5.1 Clearance and Headroom
Clearances and headroom shall be designed in

accordance with Clause 3.7 and 4.6. The
engineer shall seek guidance from CEO Roads
to define if any additional clearance or
headroom is required for specific structures to
accommodate abnormal load routes.
7.5.2 Superelevation
Superelevation and camber shall be designed

in accordance with Clause 3.4. Special
consideration shall be given to the
superelevation on adjacent design elements.
The engineer must ensure that the entire
carriageway will drain efficiently and that there
is minimal risk of long vehicles grounding at
changes of superelevation.
7.5.3 Safety Fenclng
Safety fencing sha.11 be provided at locations
defined in Clause 5.1 5. Special consideration
must be given to measures at the physical nose
of diverges. High speed vehicles crossing the
painted nose are at particular risk. The ends of
safety barriers at these locations must be given
special treatment to reduce the dangers of
head-on impact. Consideration shall be given to
the provision of energy absorbing terminations
for these locations.
Direction and warning signs for interchanges
may be large and possibly gantry mounted.
Consideration must be given to the protection of
isolated signs and gantry legs.
In addition to safety fencing designed to
mitigate accidents, consideration should be
given to provision of safety fencing to prevent
illegal. movements within the interchange.
Illegal movements across the verges between
slip or link roads are highly dangerous to all
traffic and must be strongly discouraged.
7.5.4 Signing
Effective and clear signing is essential for the

safe operation of any junction. This is
particularly relevant to interchanges where
vehicle speed and traffic volumes are high.
Signs at such junctions will be large and
possibly gantry mounted. Adequate clearance
must be provided for the large foundations
required.
January 1997
..
SECTION 7
Detailed guidance on signing is provided in the

Qatar Traffic Manual. As a general point, the
engineer must consider signing requirements at
the preliminary design stage. At this stage the
engineer can build in suitable locations and
visibility splays for the signs.
7.5.5 Llghtlng
Suitable roadway lighting greatly reduces the

potential for accidents throughout the road
network. Lighting design is detailed in Section
10. As with signing, the engineer must consider
lighting requirements at the preliminary design
stage. Lighting columns can have very large
bases which may need special consideration.
Information must be obtained from the Utility

Authorities at an early stage of the design.
Diversion or modification to existing or
proposed equipment can have a major impact
on the design and the cost of an interchange.
Utility Authorities may require service
reservations to be provided through the
interchange to accommodate future equipment
not yet detailed.
7.5.7 Emergency Vehicles
At the preliminary design stage the engineer

must consider how emergency vehicles could
reach the scene of an incident, particularly if the
carriageway is blocked by other vehicles held
up by that incident. Provision of additional
lateral clearances at structures could be
considered along with emergency median
crossovers wtth demountable safety fences.
7.5.8 Malntenance Provisions

Maintenance of the carriageway is an important
long term objective for the network. The
engineer must consider the implications of
maintenance strategies and traffic management
on the layout of the proposed interchange. He
must ensure that the facility will be safe to
maintain and that turning movements can be
reasonably accommodated whilst maintenance
is taking place.
7.5.9 Environmental Issues
Environmental issues shall be considered at the

preliminarystage. All reasonable efforts shall be
made to design'out unacceptable environmental
impacts. The remaining impacts shall be
mitigated as far as reasonably practical.
Page 7/16
'
'SECTION 7
One main impact of interchanges is visual

intrusion due to their size. Careful landscaping
can reduce the impact of large structures above
ground level. A combination of hard and soft
landscaping can usually achieve the best
results. Materials in keeping with the
surroundings should be used, with careful
consideration of colours, textures and styles. In
proposing soft landscaping, the engineer must
consider how it could be safely maintained
thmughout the year, including regular watering.
The design of hard and soft landscaping must
not interfere with the operational requirements
of the facility. No landscaping features shall
obstruct stopping sight distances, visibility of
signs or the effectiveness of roadway lighting.
January 1997
Page 7/17

SECTION 8 DRAINAGE
8.1
INTRODUCTION
8.1 .1
Functions of Highway Dralnage
Reduces the damaging affect

of pore water build up in the
pavement,
formation
or
subgrade
Prevents pavement weakening
due to ingress of salt lenses
from the lower subgrade layers.
The requirement for satisfactory road drainage

has a direct bearing on the ability to use the
road during and after a rainfall event, long-term
serviceability of the road structure, provision of
an acceptable urban environment and
minimising health risk caused by long term
surface ponding.
In the case of exceptional rainfall

events the road surface itself can be
used as a storm carrier:
Construction of a highway shall not be allowed

to increase the risk of flooding to properties.
The highway drainage system must therefore be
considered as providing four primary functions,
which due to land use constraints are usually
dealt with differently in urban and rural
situations, namely:
Determinethe total amount and rate (Q)

of storm water run-off reaching the poinf
under consideration
Reduces the danger

standing water to traffic
of
Select appropriate criteria on limits and

frequency of acceptable flooding
Maintains the use of

trafficked lanes
all
Determine points of concentration,

discharge and hydraulic controls,
together with method of entry into and
exit from the drainage system
Reduces sediment build up at

the road side
Determine the requirement for the

provision of sub-surface drainage.
Reduces percolation into the

road structure.
Guide surface water run-off safely

across or under roadways:
Minimises disruption to traffic

Minimises damage to the
pavement or embankment
structure
Guides surface water run-off to

suitable discharge points
.
Minimises road impact on the

natural surface hydrology in
rural areas.
Remove water percolating through the

pavement, lower ground water and
prevent capillary rise:
January 1997
Concentrates flood water to

discharge basins for easy
removal.
The engineer shall undertake the following

minimum studies for each highway using the
criteria set out in the clauses in this section:
Collect precipitation falling on the

highway reservation, adjacent side
roads and catchment and convey to a
suitable outfall:
Prevents damage to property in

flood prone areas
'
8.1.2
'
Minor and Major Systems
Drainage of highways is the joint responsibility

of the Civil Engineering Department's Roads
Division and Drainage Division. Each Division
has defined responsibilities and procedures
which shall be adhered to when designing
highway drainage. These are explained in the
following clauses.
Minor System
The Roads Division is responsiblefor the design
of the Minor System, namely the road drainage,
comprising gullies, soakaways, connecting
pipework and storage areas required prior to
discharge into the Drainage Division Network.
The highway drainage system shall be
designed using parameters defined in this
section. The point of discharge and discharge
parameters listed below, will be provided by the
Page 8/1
SECTION 8
CED Drainage Division:

Diameter of trunk sewer
Allowable discharge volume
Invert level of trunk sewer
Location of tn~nksewer
Acceptable method of discharge into
the trunk sewer.
Major System
CED Drainage Division is responsible for the
Major System which comprises all the drainage
components beyond the agreed interface point
with the minor system:
Trunk, surface water sewer network

Surface water pumping stations
Ground water control networks
Surface water storage retention
areas/tanks.
'The preferred drainage method is by a positive

system. However should this not be practical
due to distance from a suitable discharge point
or economics, agreement to discharge water to
the ground or adjacent areas may be sought
from the Director of the Civil Engineering
Department.
8.2.1
I.
For the purpose of highway drainage design the

country shall be considered as having the same
rainfall characteristics for all regions.
The Total Rainfall and Maximum Rainfall in 24
hours data (Table 8.1 a & b) provided from Doha
International Airport Meteorological Station
provides the longest available rainfall record
and'shall be referred to for design purposes.
However, a more onerous review may be
required in specific cases where flood damage
to strategic highwaysoor property would be
severe.
Intensity-Duration-Frequency
Data regarding individual storm events in Qatar
is scarce and generally inadequate. However,
statistical analysis and comparisons by a
number of researchers has established an
intensity duration frequency relationship
which is generally found to stand comparison
with Bahrain data and to some extent, the
Bilham Formula. See Figure 8.la & b.
I = 25.4 ~1.a
x ~ m ) * -a* 11
~
T
Where
I=
T=
N=
rainfall intensity (mmlh)

duration of storm (hours)
Probable number of
occurrences in 10 years
~ y d r o l o ~ i cData
al
Rainfall Characterization
Long term rainfall records for Qatar commenced
in 1962 and are recorded daily, together with
other weather information, from a number of
locations by the Civil Aviation and Meteorology
Department of the Ministry of Communications
and Transport.
Summaries of recorded data are issued

regularly.
Run-off Coefficients (C)

Typically, for densely built up areas, there is a
high run-off for all rainfall intensities. However,
as development becomes more sparse or
ground conditions more pervious the total runoff will reduce. Run-off is also affected by storm
intensity.
Calculation of surface water run-off shall be

made using Figure 8.2 which gives values for
run-off coefficients which reflect the above
situations.
Qatar lies in an arid region and annual rainfall

may vary.from 20mm to over 300mm per
annum. Individual storms occasionally as
intense as 124mm in a 24 hour period Bnd
54mm in a 3 hour period, have been recorded.
Rainfall is therefore characterised by:
High variability
Severe thunderstorms
geographical extent.
January 1997 -
of
limited
Page 0i2
...
Total Monthly Rainfall (mm)
Table 8.1a Total Rainfall Doha InternationalAirport 1962 1995

(Data to be reviewed at regular intervals)
. - . .
January 1997
Page 813
SECTION 8
State of Qatar
Minisly d Communlcalions 6 Transport
Departmen1of Civil Aviation 6 Meteorology
Muimum Rainfall in 24 Hours (mm)
Staticn: Doha InternationalAirport
Lac 25 15N Long: 5134E
YW&bntIl
JAN
1962
FEE
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
0.0
0.0
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.6
1.5
64.0
0.0
0.0
80.1
80.1
Year
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.2
0.0
1 983
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.9
64.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1%4
47.0
15.0
13.0
2.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.
1965
3.0
0.8
0.0
30.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
13.0
0.0
30.0
I966
0.0
17.6
0.0
2.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
17.8
0.0
1 .S
1.5
6.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.1
0.0
25.0
0.0
14.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
25.0
58.0
0.2
0.0
6.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
58.0
1970
8.7
0.0
1.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.7
1971
0.6
5.8
0.0
7.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
7.4
1979
4.5
0.1
46.6
Trace
Trace
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
0.0
16.8
48.8
1880
7.2
20.2
3.0
Trace
0.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
Trace
20.2
1981
6.4
2.4
12.7
Trace
1.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
12.7
1082
1.8
9.9
40.1
2.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
Trace
17.3
11.8
40.1
1983
6.0
4.1
17.5
5.0
0.9
0.0
0.0
Tmce
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
17.5
1984
Tmce
Trace
15.2
Trace
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
16.2
16.2
1985
1.7
0.0
0.5
Trace
Trace
0.0
0.0
Tram
0.0
0.0
Trace
3.8
3.8
1968
3.7
6.2
3.4
17.1
Trace
0.0
.0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
16.0
17.1
1987
0.5
0.1
28.0
Tram
Trace
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Tncb
0.0
0.2
26.0
1988
4.1
41.3
2.3
8.7
0.0
0.0
Tfm
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
41.3
1969
Trace
5.0
2.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
8.3
34.9
34.9
1907
1908
1969
'
.. .
0.2
loo0
6.8
0.6
2.3
Tram
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
7.5
1991
1.3
14.7
0.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.9
14.7
1.6
1.2
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
12.2
0.0
32.7
32.7
1.9
2.0
1.6
0.0
T m
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Trace
44.6
0.5
8.8
2.0
8.6
0.0
0.0
Tmce
0.0
Tram
0.0
Trace
8.6
0.0
TI~W
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
38.6
56.2
0.0
TI~W
0.7
Tram
17.3
45.0
60.1
80.1
1992
lo03
MAR
1994
0.1
1995
0.0
12.0
58.2
3.1
HW*
58.0
44.6
58.2
34.4
TI-
64.0
Table 8.1 b Maximum Rainfall - Doha International Airport 1962 1995.

(Data to be reviewed at regular intervals)
January 1997
Page 814-
Figure 8.la Bilham Formula, Intensity - Duration Frequency Chart (0-4h)
January 1997
Page 815
SECTION 8
Figure 8.1 b Bilham Formula, Intensity Duration Frequency Chart (1-24h)
January 1997
Page 816
+ .
SECTION 8
0
1.0
0.B
0.8
0.7
C5
2
LL
0.6
0
Z
oL
U.
0.5
U)
I-
w_
-0LL
0.4
0
C)
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
RAINFALL INTENSITY (I) mmlh
'2
Figure 8.2 Run-off Coefficients for Urban Catchments
. .,
Januarv 1997
Paae 817
SECTION 8
Catchment Area (A)
At a chosen point the peak flow generally

occurs at the instant all parts of the catchment
are contributing to the flow.
Rural
The area to be considered shall incorporate
two parts:
The Time of Concentration (Tc) is defined as

the interval in time from the beginning of the
rainfall to the time when water from the most
remote part of the catchment reaches the point
under consideration by the engineer.
The area of the road corridor subject to

direct precipitation
The broader natural catchment area
within which the road runs.
Specifically, the effect the road may
have on the natural surface and subsurface drainage of the area.
The Time of concentration is a function of the

average slope, length 'and roughness of the
catchment.
A number of equations have been developed for
computation of the Time of Concentration for
various methods of flood analysis. However, it
is recommended that where the Rational
Method is employed, Manning's equation is
used for the calculation of flow velocity in
gutters, drainage channels or pipes.
Reference to topographic mapping should be

made to assess the catchment area.
.-.
Urban
The area to be considered shall incorporate two
parts:
.--.
Manning's Equation:
--Thearea of the road corridor subject to

direct precipitation
v= FIS)sH
n
. The additional adjacent area assessed
by reference to the Development Plans

and topographic mapping for the area.
The additional area will be dependent on
factors such as intensity of development,
provision of flood storage areas, and
contribution from adjacent roads and
developments.
Where
V = Mean velocity of flow (rn/s)

n = Manning's
coefficient
of
R
S
roughness
= Hydraulic radius (metres)
= Slope (percent)
'
Surface Run-off (Q) . .

Highway drainage areas to be considered in
Qatar are typically less than 50 Hectares. For
these.areas surface run-off (Q litres/second)
shall be calculated using the formula:
Q = 2.78CIA
Where
B
C = Run-off coefficient
I= Rainfall intensity (mrnlh)
A = Area (hectares)
For areas larger than 50 Hectares, mostly rural

conditions, consideration should be given to
assessment of run-off by a combination of
historic observation and generation of storm
hydrographs. The method used shall be
agreed with CED.
Time of Concentration (Tc)

The engineer wishing to size a drainage system
must ascertain the peak rainfall run-off from the
catchment under consideration for the
designated design storm return period.
January 1997
Time of Concentration:
Where
Tc = Time
of
Concentration
(seconds)
V = Meanvelocityof Row (m/s)
L = Length of flow path from the
point of consideration to the
furthest catchment extremity
(metres)
For easy reference, when preparing drainage
computations to the Rational Method, the
engineer may use the nomograph given in
Figure 8.3.
When considering short duration storms the
rainfall intensity changes rapidly with only a
small change in storm duration, (Figure 8.la).
Therefore it is important that for small drainage
areas an accurate assessment of Time of
Concentration is made. However, due to the
necessity for the surface to receive rainfall and
reach a flowing condition the Time of
Concentration shall not be reduced to less than
3 minutes.
SECTION 8
The run-off that a positive highway drainage

system shall be designed for is determined by
the Time of Concentration and reference to the
acceptable frequency limits provided for the
different highway classes in Table 8.3.
Permeability (P)
Permeability of the ground shall be determined
by in situ geotechnical testing as described in
Appendix B of this manual.
Ideally the permeability will be assessed at a

number of locations along a project site and
soakaway sizes optimised on the basis of the
test results.
Highway
Classification
Should geotechnical data not be available then

reference to Table 8.2 and to records held by
CED Roads and Drainage Divisions should
assist the engineer. However, where existing
records are used, this should be verified by site
permeability testing during construction in order
to confirm the design values used.
Soil ~
Permeability
Situation
Storm Return
Period
(years)
Primary
Rural
Urban
1 i n 10
1 in10
Secondary
Rural
Urban
1in5
1 in5
Tertiary
Rural
Urban
1in2
1In2
Table 8.3

System
'
- Positive
Where a positive drainage system is not

available and drainage is to soakaways, then
the 24hrs total rainfall figures given in Table 8.4
shall be used.
Area Description
Clean sands
and sandgravel mixtures
Desiccated and
fissured clays
Very fine
sands, silts and
clay-silt
laminate
Rainfall
ResidentialAreas &
Minor Roads
12mm in 24 hours
Major Roads &

Commercial Areas
18mm in 24 hours .
Table 8.4
Design Total Rainfall - Soakaway

System
Where the highway is required to cross a water.

course, the acceptable frequency limits against
flooding and damage from natural water
courses given in Table 8.5 shall be maintained:
'Special measures required in this range.
Table 8.2
8.2.2
Typical Permeability
The design of an economic surface water

drainage system is related to the acceptable risk
against flooding. Though Qatar is an arid
country, when storms occur, the disruption and
damage caused can be considerable. However,
to provide a complete, risk free, surface water
drainage system would be prohibitively
expensive.. The following Design Return Period
tables list the minimum storm return periods to
be used in the design of surface water systems.
Highway
Classification
Situation
Storm Return
Period
(years)
Primary
Rural
U@an
Rural
Urban
Rural
'Urban
l ' i n 50
1 in 50
1 In 20
1 in 20
1 In 10
1 in10
Secondary
Tertiary
.
Table 8.5
Design Retum Period

Surface Run-off
Natural
The engineer may chose a reduced level of risk

if a specific project requires this.
-.
. .. .
Jariuary 1997
.
. . ..
.- .
.
-
Page 819

If there is a .requirement to utilise the road as a
storm run-off carrier in the case of a major
rainfall event then advice regarding the
acceptable frequency limijs for individual
situations should be obtained from the CED
Drainage Division. This will typically reflect
those shown on Table 8.6.
t
Classificationof Area Subject to flood
Storm
Return
Period
Hospital IAirport
Industrial
Prestigious Commercial
Government Offices and Private Offices
Residential & Llght Commercial
1 in 100
1 In 50
1 in 20
1 in 20
1 in 10
Table 8.6
Design Return Period Areas

.. .
If an area forms a boundary with no natural

outlet for surface run-off then higher acceptable
frequency limits may apply. CED Drainage
Division should be consulted further for advice.
8.2.3
Design Method
Surface water drainage design should be

submitted to the CED Roads Design Section for
approval as part of the project detail design
report.
Detail design should utilise the
information provided within this Design Manual.
Basic design methods to be used are as follows:
Lloyd Davis Rational Method
Suitable for the majority of surface water
drainage systems envisaged in Qatar, eg. Minor
branch connections to a major trunk sewer
designed by others. The relevant storm and
catchment parameters given in this section are
usedto calci~latesurface water discharge flows
and the piped system is sized to suit these flows.
A standard calculation sheet to be completed
and submitted with designs is given in Figure
8.4.
A number of important points need to be
considered by the engineer utilising this method.
Simple to use
Larger catchments can provide
conservative results, typically when
chosen pipe diameters exceed 600mm
Care should be taken in selecting run-off
coefficients and rainfall intensities for
use in the equations.
SECTION 8
Catchments where the contributing

area does not increase uniformly with
time can produce erroneous results.
Hydrograph Methods
Suitable for larger urban catchments where
storage in pipes and above ground b e c ~ m e s
significant, and for calculation of overland flow
in larger rural catchments for the sizing of
culverts and retention ponds.
Storm hydrographs should be built up from
existing known storm data. However, this
information is currently not widely available in
Qatar and hydrographs such as a UK summer
storm are considered generally equivalent to
Qatar storms and therefore suitable for use in
hydrograph models.
Design of larger diameter piped systems should
take account of pipe storage and proprietary
computer software models should be used at
the direction of CED Roads to optimize system
design.
Retention ponds, storage tanks and hydraulic
restrictors shall be modelled using methods as
agreed with CED Roads.
Soakaway Design
Soakaways should be considered for surface
water drainage in areas where a positive
system is not available or economics preclude
the use of a positive system.
However, areas of high groundwater table shall
not be considered suitable for soakaways. In
these areas positive systems shall be provided
with outfalls to EFA's, storagehetention tanks or
purnping stations.
Where permeability has been accurately
assessed with confidence and where its long
term availability through maintenance is without
doubt, then ground permeability can be
considered within the design of the soakaway.
In all other situations the soakaway shall be
considered a storage chamber and shall be
capable of storing the total rainfall requirement
of Table 8.4, below carriageway formation level.
Each gully shall be connected to an individual
soakaway, except at junctions where areas to
be drained are reduced due to gullylchannel
requirements.
Soakaways shall be positioned in accordance
with the reservation cross-sections given in
Section 5.
Page 8/10

-
n
j/~
Soakaways shall be sized and located so as not

to introduce water to the pavement construction.
Soakaways should be constructed with a rising

piece to enable shallow utilities to pass above
the main chamber.
I
L
'SECTION 8
Soakaways can introduce localised subsidence

due to wash out of fines. As such, they shall not
be positioned under the camageway, shoulder or
parking area or within 5m of a structure (subject
to geotechnical advice).
In particular situations the engineer can consider

linking soakaways by pipe connections at invert
or intermediate levels. However, he should
ensure that this is not going to merely
concentrate the ..surface
water at the road valley
.
point.
Where the existence of a perched water table

has been established by geotechnical
investigation, CED Drainage shall be'consulted
regarding the use of combinations of boreholes
and soakaways to discharge to lower aquifers.
It should be noted that in some areas lower
aquifers may be under a piezometric head or
utilised for potable water purposes.
When a road is reconstructed or a piped
drainage system is installed in an existing road,
the original soakaways are unlikely to be either
efficient or undamaged by corrosion and will
need to be removed or renovated.
January 1997
Page 8/11

.-
Figure 8.3
Time of Concentration For Use with Rational Method
SECTION 8
I
L(
Impermeable Area (Ha)

Location of Pipe Diff. in Length Pipe Veloclty Time of Time of Rainfall
Slope
Level
Flow Conc. Intensity
Other Total
From
To
Cut
(rn)
(mln)
(mln) (mm/h) Roads
(mls)
(m)
STORM SEWER DESIGN COMPUTATIONS
(m%)
Flow
Velocity Velocity 7emarks

Pipe %pacity
Dia
Capacity Full
Velocity (mls)
(mm) (rn3/s)
SECTION 8
Urban Catchment
8.3
URBAN DRAINAGE
8.3.2
8.3.1
lntroductlon
Urban development causes changes to the runoff process by both altering the route and
surface characteristics over which the run-off
flows.
Drainage of highways in urban areas of Qatar is

achieved using the major and 'minor systems
described in Clause 8.1.2 and constructed and
maintained by the CEO Roads and Drainage
Divisions.
Highway drainage shall be provided for all
urban roads.
Rainfall falling within the catchment area shall
be collected and disposed of within the highway
limits or to a designated outfall point. Surface
run-off shall not be allowed to shed outside the
highway reservation unless to a specified
discharge point.' Surface-water shall not be
allowed to stand within the highway reservation
for an extended period of time so as to cause
public nuisance or a health hazard.
It is important that the highway' drainage
requirements are established early in the design
process to ensure that adequate reservation
space is provided and service utilities routed to
avoid possible clashes, particularly with
soakaways. Refer to typical cross-sections in
Section 5.
Drainage problems can often be alleviated by
the engineer considering the layout of the road
system and planning of a new development in
harmony with the natural drainage of a
catchment.
The roadway can be used to provide the
following functions:
Guide overland flow
Isolate drainage catchments into
manageable sizes
Increase the drainage path and hence
time of concentration
Provide additional flood storage area
Provide a drainage reservation to the
area discharge point.
Open areas such as parks, school yards, car
parks etc. can provide storage areas should the
drainage system be unable to cope with area
surface water run-off. Their location should
therefore be carefully chosen at the planning
stage to make the best use o.f topography and
drainage constraints.
January 1997
Highways form a part of the urban catchment

and the highway engineer must carefully
consider adjacent development and its
discharge points and characteristics in order to
accurately assess the total catchment that may
be contributingto the highway drainage system
under design.
The urban catchment provides the engineer
with further points for consideration; that of
availability of discharge points for the collected
water, and the environmental damage due to
increasing build up of pollutants washed into the
highway drainage system.
8.3.3
Positive Drainage
Positive drainage is preferred in all urban

situations.
Water collected is piped or
channelled to a discharge point from whence it
can be collected and discharged away from
roads and developed areas.
Highway drainage by positive means involves
discharging run-off to a point advised by the
CEO Drainage Division for onward transmission
by the Trunk Sewer System.
8.3.4
Rain falling on the road surface builds up and

presents a hazard to vehicles both during and
after storms. It is therefore necessary to
provide drainage to the carriageway by a
combination of transverse and longitudinal
gradients, shedding to water collection points
and a distribution system.
Typical topography in urban areas of Qatar,
where roads are kerbed, requires slack
gradients to minimise the appearance of a roller
coaster road and reduce fill requirements. The
minimum gradient criteria to be used are given
below:
Transverse gradients of 2% are
provided as normal for drainage off the
travelled way to the channel
Page 8/14

Minimum longitudinal gradients of 0.3%
should be provided to drain the edge of
a travelled way to a discharge point
However, a desirable minimum
longitudinal gradient of 0.5% is to be
provided, where practical
Care shall be taken at junctions and
areas of superelevation to ensure that
the combination of transverse and
longitudinal fall does not create a flat
zone in the carriageway
In particular cases, a rolling crown may
be used as an alternative to
superelevating channel lines to avoid
flat zones, Figure 8.5. The length of the
rolling'crown is determined using the
same formula as that for applying
superelevation (refer to Clause 3.4).
k
. .
To maintain gully performance under the

influence of wind borne debris and dust and to
improve collection under the effect of high
rainfall intensity, it is preferred that gullies are
constructed as pairs.
Valley points of large catchments should be
located in areas where flooding would present
minimal hazard or disruption, or where
additional . water storage or dispersion is
available. ie Emergency Flood Areas (EFA),
parks and gardens, trunk storm sewers etc.
Gullies shall be linked to the disposal system,
by piped connections.
The preferred minimum gradient for gully
connections is 1%. However, gradients of 0.5%
are acceptable should situations dictate.
Maximum gully. connection length is 36m.
Should longer lengths be required then
intermediate manholes or catchpits shall be
included in the scheme to facilitate cleaning.
Utilities shall be located so as not to provide a
hindrance to the drainage system installation
and maintenance or increase the chance of
damage during utility maintenance works.
X-x
--em---
C~rrirgewry
Crossfrl
SECTION 8
Crniagowry
Crossbfl
Longth of
Rolllng Crown
Storm sewer design shall be in accordance with

CED Roads and Drainage Divisions' design
guides and specifications. Storm sewers shall
cater for the flows computed from the design
criteria in this Section and any additional flows
advised by CED Roads or Drainage Divisionsat,
the project commencement.
Figure 8.5 Typical Detail of a Rolling Crown

Across a Single Carriageway
Drainage collection points in urban areas should
typically be provided by gullies located along
the channel or gutter. On gradients of 0.5% or
less the flow of water to the gullies can be aided
by the use of channel blocks. Gully spacing is
a function of grating size, road gradient and
crossfall and acceptable flow width at the
channel. Standard gully spacings and criteria
are given in Figure 8.6.
Where standard criteria do not apply, the
engineer should consider reducing the gully
spacing or referring the specific case to more
detailed calculation procedures.
On roads with longitudinal falls, valley points
shall be provided with double gullies to aid
water collection.
. _...
January 1997
Page 8/15
.,
SECTION 8 .
200 .
190
Longitudinal gradient
at channel given as %
Flood width of 1.Om
180
170
160
,150
..-140
130
120
h
13
110
2cn
100
3
4
90
z0
13
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
2
-4
'9
m6
'?
10
11
12
t-
I M P E R M E A B L E WIDTH (m)
Figure 8.6 Gully Spacing
January.1997
.. .
.-
. .
.,
.,
Page 8/16.
--

8.3.5
Dralnage of Medians, Footways and

Verges
Medians
Medians in urban areas are normally paved or
landscaped with planting. Paved medians shall
be sloped to shed run-off onto the adjacent
carriageway for collection by the carriageway
drainage system.
Landscaped areas in
medians shall be edged so as to prevent run-off
from these areas taking soil and plant debris
onto the carriageway.
SECTION 8
They are to be used in situations where run-off
from. sizeable catchments would become
trapped at a valley point and consequential
flooding would cause damage to adjacent
properties or render a road impassable with no
equal adjacent route available for detours.
Water should not be allowed to pond for
extended periods so as to cause a health
hazard.
Emergency Flood ~ i e a sshall therefore be
provided with:
Footways
Footways shall normally be sloped at 2%
towards the carriageway to shed run-off onto
the carriageway.
Where new highways are to be constructed in
areas of existing development, care must be
taken to ensure road levels are set to allow the
footway to slope from the property threshold to
the carriageway. Areas of wide paving may
require sloping to additional collection points
away from the carriageway. These collection
points must be suitable for pedestrian traffic to
cross without risk of injury and must be situated
so as not to be a hindrance to maintenance
access.
It is the duty of adjacent property owners to
prevent significant run-off across the footway by
the introduction of collection channels. This is
particularly relevant in the case of polluting runoff such as from petrol station forecourts.
A location where water can be easily

pumped by tanker or temporary
pumping station.
Borehole soakawaysto aid discharge to
the ground water table, where
investigation has shown this is
achievable.
Permanent surface water pumping

station and rising main connected to the
trunk sewer system.
In order to make the best use of land in
developed areas it is normal practice to design
EFA's as sports fields, parks, playing fields, car
parks etc.
EFA's that are not landscaped or utilised for
other purposes have a tendency to collect
rubbish and become an eyesore.
L
Collected water may be added to the highway

drainage system once cleaned of grit, oil and
other.pollutants.
Verges
Verges with hard landscaping shall be sloped to
shed water towards the carriageway. Where
soft landscaping is provided then it shall be
edged and sloped to prevent run-off from
depositing soil and plant debris onto the
adjacent pedestrian or trafficked surfaces, or
into property thresholds. Areas of raised
planting which incorporate drain holes shall
incorporate a filter membrane to prevent
washout of soil onto adjacent areas.
EFA's should be considered a potential

drowning and disease hazard. Where possible
they should be kept shallow and spread over a
large area. This helps evaporation and
dissipation and presents a less deep water
hazard. Side slopes should be gentle to allow
easy exit and marker posts should be located
around the rim to identify the deeper area in
times of heavy flooding.
Prior to designing EFA's the prevailing
groundwater table should be ascertained to
ensure the excavation does not allow standing
water to remain. Soakaways or boreholes can
be constructed in the base of the EFA to
encourage water dissipation.
Emergency Flood Area (EFA)
8.3.6
Emergency Flood Areas are portions of land set

aside, within or adjacent to the highway reserve,
that are used for additional storage of
exceptional run-off generated by storms greater
than those normally designed for.
.. *
January 1997
. .
Page 8117
SECTION 8
8.3.7
..
Maintenance Strategy
.
All highway drainage systems shall be designed

with future maintenance procedures being
considered.
Routine maintenance will be required due to
build-up of wind blown debris and settled
.
sediments in gutters, gullies and pits.
8.4.3
In order to reduce surface build up of rainfall

and the consequent hazard to vehicles both
during and after storms, it is necessary to
provide drainage to the carrlageway by a
combination of transverse and longitudinal
gradients shedding onto the verge and adjacent
land:.
.. .
Transverse gradients of '2% are
provided as normal for drainage of the
travelled way.
Exceptional maintenance should be limited by

good design and construction practices.
CED Highway Maintenance Section are the
responsible authority for the maintenance of the
highway drainage system, including EFA's and
storage areas not in the Trunk Storm Sewer
System.
.. .
CED Drainage Division are the responsible
authority for maintenance of the Trunk Storm
Sewer System.
8.4
RURAL DRAINAGE
8.4.1
Introduction
Drainage of highways in rural areas of Qatar

can be considered as two cases:
Longitudinal gradients are

not
considered for drainage purposes on
unkerbed roads. However, care must
be .taken during the deslgn of
superelevated sections to avoid flat
zones in the camageway.
In areas where carriageway edge run-off collld
damage verges or steep embankments then
edge kerbing or edge channels shall be
provided to collect water to discharge points.
Discharge points would include gullies and
precast channels.
8.4.4
Drainage of rainfall falling onto the road

and highway reservation
Drainage of natural overland flows.
Drainage of run-off from the road and highway
reservation shall normally be achieved by
shedding onto adjacent land.
8.4.2
Rural Catchment
The engineer is not usually faced with the

problem of catching and dissipating rainfall as in
urban situations, but is allowing run-off to flow
generally unimpeded on its natural course.
Rural catchments are often extensive and can
build considerable volumes of water in their
lower reaches during even moderate storm
events.
Considerable care should be taken in assessing
the size, slope and surface characteristics of the
catchment (refer to Figure 8.2) and applying the
appropriate design storm (refer to Table 8.5).
January 1997
Dralnage of the Carrlageway
Drainage of Medians and Verges
Medians
Medians in rural areas would normally be
unkerbed and unpaved.
The median should be sloped away from the
carriageway to prevent run-off washing soil
debris onto the road.
Where run-off is collected from long sections of
gradient, median outlets should be provided at
wadi and valley points to prevent water ponding
and flooding onto the carriageway. Alternatively
the median may be broken into individual
catchment segments and surface water allowed
to percolate into the embankment or evaporate.
Median ditches, if required, should have a
maximum side slope of 1 in 6 and shall be
designed such that water in the ditch cannot
percolate into the road construction, see Figure
8.7.
Where ditches are required to facilitate
subsurface drainage, it is important to ensure
that adequate outlets or storage volume is
provided.
Page 8118
'
SECTION 8
In areas of steep cutting, ditches should be

located so they are not filled with loose debris
from the cutting. In areas where natural surface
run-off is high it may be necessary to install a
ditch setback from the top of cuttings to prevent
rainfall damaging the cutting face.
8.4.5
Natural Surface Drainage
Where a highway crosses a wadi, the wadi

catchment characteristics, design storm and
class of road will determine the type of road
crossing required. It is normal practice to allow
run-off even from small catchments, to cross
under the road so as to minimise disruption to
the natural surface flow.
Fig 8.7 Typical .Median Ditch
Verges and Ditches
Verges in rural areas shall be sloped to shed
water away from the carriageway.
At the back of the verge a shallow ditch may be
provided to both collect and transport
carriageway run-off and catch minor area runoff for transport to wadiis along the route.
The designer shall ensure that ditches are not
located so they can introduce surface water to
the pavement construction. Normal practice is
to ensure the ditch invert is a minimum of 0.3m
below the carriageway formation level at the
outer edge of the carriageway.
Ditch dimensions and shape shall be designed
following consideration of its location and
impact on highway safety together with the
following hydraulic considerations:
Culverts
A culvert is a covered channel or pipeline used
to convey a watercourse under the road. It
consists of an inlet, one or more barrels and an
outlet.
Typically, culvert barrels will be constructed
from concrete or steel pipes or boxes. Inlets
and outlets may be constructed with gabions,
mattresses, stone pitching or concrete.
The hydraulic characteristics of a culvert are
complex due to the number of flow conditions
that can occur. The highway engineer shall
consult specialist literature in his design of
culverts and shall choose the most appropriate
culvert for the specific purpose considering the
following general constraints:
Preferred minimum
diameter 800mm
pipe
culvert
Minimum pipe culvert diameter 450mm
contributing catchment
appropriate storm duration
gradient
roughness coefficient of lininglsurface
Flooding against embankments is

acceptable short term. Freeboard to
edge of carriageway to be a minimum
of 0.5m for the design storm. .
In most cases it is expected that rural ditches

will be unlined. Permissible depths of flow for
unlined channels are given in Figure 8.8.
Embankment slopes of 1 in 6 or greater

do not normally require protection
against washout due to short term
ponding. Long term ponding may
require embankment slopes of 1 in 10.
Shallow side ditches are not normally graded to

provide a fall but follow the road profile.
Ditch slopes should not present a significant
hazard to traffic leaving the road during an
accident. Side slopes of 1 in 6 or shallower
should suffice for this.
January 1997
The engineer shall balance embankment height

with culvert height to .provide a satisfactory
technical and economic solution.
. Page 811 9
SECTION 8
i
Fords
Where wadi flows are exceptionally high or the
road requires a low storm design return period
and is lightly trafficked, culverts may prove
impractical. The engineer may therefore
consider incorporating a dry ford or vented dry
ford. In designing a dry ford, care must be
exercised to ensure driver awareness of the
potential hazard. Guide posts should. be
positioned adjacent to the caniageway to assist
traffic positioning and advance signing should
be used to indicate the dry ford to approaching
drivers.
/--
..-/
r
l
I S
5-
.,
b
Specific attention must be paid to minimising

scour and the prevention of carriageway
surfacing and edge loss. Verges, medians and
embankment slopes should be protected by
Washout of
impervious l*ers or rock.
embankment fines should be prevented by the
use of filter layers or impermeable membranes.
January 1997
., .
Page 8/20
SECTION 8
.-
,?
Q
s
0
s
LD
.
I
0
C/)
.c,
s
CV
s
. cr
-- E
3-,
..-cn
V)
.-
S 6
Q
V)
0
L
w
ov, I
-a, I
c
sg
c
00
S
v
a
Q)
a
.u
0
L
s
v
v-
z0
(w) 'yldaa
MOI-J
lunw!xeyy
Figure 8.8 Permissible Depths of Flow for Unlined Channels
Januajr 'l997
Page 8/21

8.5
JUNCTION DRAINAGE
8.5.1
Introduction
Effective drainage of the carriageway at

junctions is particularly necessary for two
reasons:
Lightweight Glass Reinforced Concrete (GRC)

embankment channels are easily installed to
prevent washout of embankment slopes at
areas of run-off concentration such as at kerb
ends.
Drainage at Junctions
8.5.2
The need to retain surface grip to

enable the safe stopping, starting and
turning
manoeuvres
routinely
undertaken by vehicles at these
locations.
Carriageway crossfalls and longitudinal

gradients at junctions are used to channel
water to collection points. The following are
examples of satisfactory crossfall layouts with
typical collection points:
The need to maintain the traffic system

capacity, particularly at major junctions
makes it essential that flooding of lanes
and reduction in junction capacity is
avoided.
T-Junctions (Figure 8.9)

Constant camber maintained on major
road
,
The following criteria must be considered to

satisfy the above requirements:
Satisfactory transverse gradients must
be maintained, particularly on the
approach to "Stop" or "Give Way* lines
Longitudinal gradients must be carefully
chosen to keep slack sections of
channel to a minimum
Where slack gradients are unavoidable
the transverse gradient should be a
minimum of 2%
Collection points must be carefully sited
to avoid ponding or run-off across
carriageways from one channel to
another
Longitudinal gradient on major road

maintained across minor road throat
Longitudinal gradient maintained on
minor road to major road channel line
Constant transverse gradient on minor
road maintained to radius tangent
points
Gully positions chosen to prevent flow
crossing the minor road entrytexit.
It is preferred to maintain the major
carriageway transverse gradients
through cross roads or small signalized
junctions.
MAJOR ROAD
Collection points must link to an easily

maintainable disposal system with
adequate capacity.
Junctions should preferably be situated away
from valley points for large catchments to
prevent flood concentration at these points.
Locating junctions adjacent to trunk sewers or
EFA's to provide additional drainage facilities
should also be considered.
----------
I
I
I
UWORROAD
Urban junctions should always be kerbed and

are therefore drained by gullies to the disposal
system.
Rural junctions would normally be kerbed
however an economic collection and disposal
method may be achieved by flush kerbs located
at collection points with shallow lined channels
removing the water to the adjacent ground..
January 1997
Figure 8.9 Typical Drainage at T-Junctions
Page 8/22
SECTION 8
_
Large Signalized Junctions (Figure 8.1 0)
-b
Transverse gradients to be maintained

at approach to "Stop" lines & pedestrian
crossings
Longitudinalgradients to be satisfactory
to prevent a large flat area being
created at the intersection point
Transverse gradients on right turn slips

to provide superelevation
Valleys created in slips to have

adequate collection and disposal points
Additional gullies placed at collection

. points serving a large surface area
Gully positions chosen to prevent flow

crossing carriageways.
4%
Roundabouts (Figure 8.1 1)
!
L
-$-
Transverse gradients maintained at

approached to "Give Way" lines
Longitudinal gradients to continue to be

maintained on approaches and
departures
Channel of central island to fall to one

collection point
Transverse
gradients
provide
superelevation for right turners or those
- circulating
Gullies positioned to prevent cross

carriageway run-off.
,..-..,
January 1997
. ..
I
Page 8/23
i
QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL '
"
'
SECTION 8
Figure 8.10 Typical Drainage at Large Signalised Junction
Figure 8.1 1 Typical Drainage at Roundabouts
January 1997
Page 8/24

8.6
SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
8.6.1
lntroductlon
Water can be introduced to the pavement by:

Rainfall permeating through the
wearing and base courses (old
pavements)
Rainfall permeating through the verges
and medians
High groundwater table at the formation
due to natural water table or seasonal
ponding
Capillary rise from groundwater near
the formation.
Where these situations are present, subsurface
drainage is required to prevent build up of pore
water within the pavement, formation and
subgrade. lncrease in pore water q n weaken
the pavement by:
Transferring loads to lower (weaker)
sections of the pavement through
increase in pore water pressure
Washout of fines by movement of pore
water
Increase in salt content in pavement
layers and subsequent swelling due to
capillary rise when appreciable
quantities of salt are present in the
subgrade
Swelling in susceptible material,
followed by shrinkage or drying out.
SECTION 8
Tidal coastal areas where the water
table varies close to the surface.
It is preferred that a soils investigation is
undertaken to assist in deciding the need for
subsurface drainage.
8.6.2
Subsurface Drainage Methods
High Groundwater
In areas of existing development where high or
rising groundwater is likely to bring moisture to
the formation level, a collection and disposal
system shall be installed to lower the water
table.
It is normal practice that this is performed by the
installation of a perforated land drain below the
carriageway, together with a positive surface
water drainage system. 'This would normally be
undertaken by the CED Drainage Division as
part to the Trunk Sewer Network. In these
locations, soakaways shall not be used for
drainage.
Alternatively, in rural areas, the provision of side
ditches can serve the dual function of
intercepting overland flow and aid in the
lowering of groundwater local to the road
structure.
Coastal Areas
In tidal coastal areas, sabkha is likely to be .
present as an indication of a high groundwater
table.
In these situations capillary rise of up to 1.Om
can draw saline water up to the road formation
level, depositing salt lenses and increasing pore
pressure.
'This is generally prevented by:
Subsurface drainage is not normally detailed in

Qatar as it is rarely a problem. Low lying areas
are normally filled prior to development to raise
them sufficiently above the groundwater table.
Roads are generally constructed on
embankments in areas of high groundwater as
they are usually subject to flood inundation
during storms.
Subsurface drainage is therefore only
considered necessary in the following
situations:
Areas of existing development and
rising groundwater levels
January 1997
Construction of high embankments

Introduction of a granular capillary
break layer below the formation.
General Deslgn Conslderation
The highway engineer should consider the
introductionof water to the formation as likely to
happen due to annual rainfall and irrigation of
plants in the median and verges.
In most cases the dry granular nature of the
typicai Qatar subgrads layers means the pore
pressure rise due to percolation is slight.
Page 8/25
. ,
.. .. .. * . ,.:.. ;.*- i-.:.:,.-. .
.....
.
. . .
_ .
..
..-... <.. . -..: i
: , ,. . ..': ,.&
,: ..;
.- .
'-
_ ..
SECTION 8
However, to provide an additional safety factor

against this occurrence, the following measures
Slope the formation todrain away from
the carriageway to the verge or median
Avoid steps in the formation that could
lead to water concentration points Keep planting areas separated from the
pavement construction to prevent
moisture transfer
Ensure planting area watering is
effectively controlled to prevent over
watering
~tilise=*surface
water drainage details
that will reduce the chance of
accidental damage and maintenance
problems
Ensure soakaways do not introduce
water to the pavement construction.
January 1997
Page 8/26

SECTION 9 PAVEMENT DESIGN
9.1
INTRODUCTION
9.1 .1
General
The pavement designs described in this manual

replace those given in the 1989 Highway
Design Manual issued by the Civil Engineering
Department of the Ministry of Public Works.
Unlike the previous designs, based on the road
hierarchy and a standard subgrade, the new
designs described in this section are based on
the cumulative traffic over a definite design life
(normally 20 years) and three subgrade
strengths. 'The designs are set out in catalogue
format and the technical basis for these is
described in an Annex at the end of this section.
All materials, --methods of construction and
tolerance used for road pavements must be in
accordance with the Qatar Construction
Specification (QCS). The Civil Engineering
Department (CED) laboratory should be
consulted during both the design and
construction stages of any project to ensure that
the latest material specifications are being
used.
The various types of pavement constructions
described herein may be used for kerbed or unkerbed roads, in locations with or without
positive drainage. Any requirement for kerbing
and drainage will depend upon the exact nature
and location of the road - refer to Section 8.
.9.1.2
Typical Pavement Structures
A typical flexible pavement structure is shown in

Figure 9.1. It comprises a wearing course laid
upon roadbase and sub-base layers, and the
subgrade.
'The wearing course must provide a skid
resistant running surface and should be both
crack and rut resistant. However, due to its
exposure to the extremes of temperature and
high wheel load shear stresses, the wearing
course will probably deteriorate and require
replacement before the rest of the pavement.
Resurfacing is likely to be required at intervals
of approximately 6-8 years during the life of the
road.
The roadbase is the main structural layer of the
pavement and may consist of either asphaltic
concrete or granular material (gravel or crushed
stone) for medium traffic levels, but only
asphaltic concrete for high traffic levels. Its
thickness is determined by the amount of traffic
which is expected during the design life.
January 1997
SECTION 9
The sub-base is a granular layer to support the
roadbase and its thickness is determined by the
strength of the underlying subgrade. In addition
to providing adequate support to the roadbase,
the sub-base must be able to carry construction
traffic without developing excessive ruts.
'The subgrade is the top layer of the earthworks
and depending on the road geometry, will be
either cut or fill.
In rigid pavements, the asphalt wearing course
and roadbase are replaced by a high quality
concrete slab, with or without reinforcement.
The sub-base is normally cement bound rather
than just granular, to ensure a robust surface on
which to erect side forms and joint assemblies
and to minimise any pumping of fine material
through slab joints.
Flexible-composite pavements consist of a
cement bound roadbase with asphalt surfacing.
As the cement bound material normally cracks
transversely due to shrinkage and temperature
warping, the surfacing must be thickened to
provide insulation, to reduce the temperature
gradient in the roadbase, and to prolong the
period for crack development through the
surfacing.
In pre-cast block paving, the asphalt surfacing
is replaced by a layer of concrete blocks
bedded on a course of sand. This pavement
type is only used in areas of low speed traffic,
typically in parking areas, or when a contrasting
appearance is required for areas such as
median strips.
9.1.3
Road Deterloration
Generally, pavements gradually deteriorate with

time under the influences of environment and
traffic. The environmental deterioration can take
the form of hardening of the bitumen in the
surfacing which can lead to excessive
brittleness and cracking, or to salt damage of
thin surfaced roads built on or with salt-rich
materials. Poorly designed or maintained
drainage-can lead to weakening of pavement
layers or the foundation. which then deforms
under traffic loading.
Traffic-related
deterioration can take many forms including the
development of ruts, general unevenness of the
road surface, with a consequent loss of riding
quality, and cracking which can lead to pop-outs
and potholes.
Page 911
SECTION 9
Wearing Course (40mm layer of asphalt concrete, Gabbro aggregate)
Roadbase (Generally, asphalt concrete, Limestone aggregate 110 230mm thick

dependant on traffic. For traffic less than 5 million standard axles,
granular material can be used for part of this layer)
Sub-base (Granular layer, varying between 100 and 200mm
depending on subgrade strength)
Formation
1.1
.,,
,.-
v,.
1 ?
Figure 9.1
Typical Pavement Layers
Determiningwhen a pavement has "failed' or is

no longer providing the intended level of service
is not simple. Generally the deterioration is very
slow and variable. Criteria for "failure' can be
set such as rut depth, roughness, deflection or
even the level of maintenance expenditure or
total quantity of patching.
Occasionally, major deterioration can occur
over a relatively short period of time when, say,
a low quality, moisture susceptible sub-base
becomes wet due to surface cracking or a rise
in groundwater level. However, distress at the
surface of the pavement does not necessarily
indicate the structural failure of the road.
Surface cracking and rutting within the wearing
course material may be treated without the
need for major structural maintenance, as the
main structural layer of the road, the roadbase,
could be completely undamaged.
9.1.4
Variability in Materials and Road

Performance
Road pavement performance is a very variable

process due to a number of factors. Variations
in the thickness and quality of the pavement
layers and variations in the strength of the
foundation all contribute to this, even though
materials may comply with the relevant
specifications. Also, uncontrolled factors such
as the long term ageing of the bitumen cause
variations in performance.
The random nature of variations in each layer
should ensure that most deficiencies in
thickness or strength do not coincide, or very
January 1997
rarely so. The importance of good practice in

quarrying, material handling and stockpiling to
ensure this randomness and also to minimise
variations themselves cannot be over
emphasised.
Sometimes a road fails to carry traffic
satisfactorily to the end of its design life
because the traffic is considerably greater than
predicted. Proper axle load assessment and
reliable traffic forecasting are essential to
prevent this. However in some circumstances
this is very difficult and either a generous
contingency will have to be provided or the
traffic and/or pavement regularly monitored so
that strengthening can be carried out before the
pavement is seriously weakened.
9.2
TRAFFIC ASSESSMENT
9.2.1
Introduct~on
Pavement deterioration under trafficking is due

to both the magnitude of the wheel loads and
the number of times the load is applied. For
pavement design purposes, it is essential to
consider not only the number of vehicles that
will use the road over the design life but also
the axle loads of these vehicles. This is done
by converting each axle load to an equivalent
number of 'standard axlesQf 80 kN using an
empirical relationship and totalling these over
the life of the pavement. The conversion to
standard axles is described in more detail in
Clause 9.2.5. Light vehicles cause negligible
damage an axle load of 10 kN (1 tonne) has a
damaging effect of only 0.00024 standard axles
Page 912

. .
compared to the normal maximum axle load of

130 kN (13 tonnes) which has the effect of 6.45
standard 80 kN axles.
The pavement designs in this manual are
selected on the basis of the cumulative traffic to
be carried over the design life expressed in
standard axles. The determination of this
number is done in three stages:
1
The traffic for each class of vehicle

which is expected to use the proposed
road, both at opening and subsequently
over the design life, must be forecast
The axle loading of each class of

vehicle over the life of the road must be
estimated
The cumulative number of standard

axles to be carried over the design life
must be calculated from stages 1 and
2.
These stages are described below.

9.2.2
At the end of the 20 year design period, the

great majority of pavements will continue to be
used, but will probably require strengthening.
The precise works will be determined by
evaluation as described in Clause 9.6, but will
probably take the form of an overlay of 50 to
150rnm, with or without planing the existing
surfacing. Outside urban areas, with minimal
kerbing and ironware and generous shoulders
or verges, a raised road surface will not present
any significant problems. However, in urban
areas or adjacent to and under over-bridges,
raised surface levels could be difficult or
expensive to accommodate. In these areas, an
increased initial pavement thickness would
allow inlays to be used and thus avoid the need
for overlays and changes in level.
This is an uncertain process, particularly in a

country with a developing economy such as
Qatar. To forecast traffic growth, the following
three traffic categories must be considered.
Any one of these could be dominant or
insignificant, depending on the site.
Design Life
The design life for the majority of pavements

will normally be 20 years. In this period it
should not be necessary to either strengthen or
reconstruct the pavement provided that the
traffic volume and axle loads have been as
forecast. At the end of the design period the
pavement should still have sufficient integrity to
allow overlaying, rather than full reconstruction,
to extend the life for further service. However,
some surface deterioration, generally rutting or
cracking, will occur in this period. The ruts
could be caused by slow or stationary vehicles
(at junctions), high temperatures and over-rich
mixes (where the mix parameters have drifted
to high bitumen or low voids within the specified
limits) and could develop early in the pavement
life before the bitumen has aged and stiffened.
Cracking will normally arise (after 10 years) as
a result of ageing of the bitumen in the high
temperature environment. Depending on the
status of the road and the extent and degree of
surface deterioration, resurfacing by a thin
overlay (40mm) or inlay (planing off and
replacing the surfacing) may be necessary
within the design life.
There may be situations where the future traffic
loading may be very uncertain depending, say,
on the siting or timing of some major
development. In this case it may be prudent to
consider a shorter design period and make
provision for possible strengthening overlays
when plans are more definite. The CED should
be consulted in cases where a design period
different to 20 years appears appropriate.
January 1997
Normal traffic, which would pass along

the route even if no new pavement was
provided
Diverted traffic, which is attracted to-the

route because of the improved
pavement
Development traffic, which arises from

either
planned
or
unplanned
development along the road corridor.
(The latter type is sometimes termed
generated traffic).
Normal traffic can be assumed to continue to

grow according to current trends, either as a
fixed number of vehicles per year or as a fixed
percentage of the current total. Diverted traffic
can be considered from an economic
perspective. It can be assumed that all vehicles
which would save either time or money by
switching from an existing route to the new
pavement would choose to do so. Diverted
traffic is normally forecast to grow at the same
rate as the traffic on the road from which it has
been diverted. The quantity .of planned
development traffic can be estimated from the
details of policy plans. The quantity of
unplanned development traffic, sometimes
called generated traffic, will be far more difficult
to predict but will be influenced by the
availability of land for such development and by
experience from previous road projects.
Allowance must also be made for the
construction traffic which will be associated with
both types of development.
Page 913
SECTION 9
Traffic forecasting must differentiate between

light, medium and heavy goods vehicles as their
growth rates may be differed and their
pavement damaging effects are iery different.
Whilst most routes will have approximately
similar traffic in both directions over a period of
time, checks should be made for any directional
effects.
9.2.4
be factored up to obtain 24 hour totals

4
Tqe'.average of the six 24 hour counts

(total or vehicle class) in each direction
should be considered to be the oneway Average Daily Traffic (total or
vehicle class)
On important road schemes, the sixday counts should be repeated several
times throughout the year to ensure
accuracy in the ADT values.
Traffic Counts'
The requirement for counts of present traffic will

depend on the type of road project being
considered and the relative magnitude of the
three types of. traffic expected to use it.
Forecasting normal and diverted traffic will
require knowledge of the flows and vehicle
composition on existing roads running parallel
to, or in the vicinity of, the proposed road.
Obviously, development traffic cannot be
counted, but traffic resulting from planned
development should be quantifiable if the
general details of the planned residential,
commercial and industrial projects are known.
For most roads it is likely that there will be some
relevant traffic data available but this will
probably have to be augmented updated by
further counts.
.
Conventional traffic counts, to justify or to

geometrically design a road project, are usually
based on manual or automatic methods where
all vehicles are combined to produce a single
Average Daily Traffic (ADT) figure. The ADT is
defined as the total annual traffic summed for
both directions and divided by 363. However,
for pavement design purposes, i t is essential
that classified counts are carried out so that the
heavy goods vehicles which cause most of the
pavement damage can be clearly quantified.
The counting process must yield separate ADT
values for each vehicle class. Also, for
pavement design it is the traffic in one direction
or individual lane, rather than the two-way flow,
which is of interest.
Standard Axles
9.2.5
For pavement design purposes the damaging

effect of vehicle axles is expressed in terms of
a "standard axlen. This was originally defined
as one carrying 18,000 Ib (8,160 kg), in the
AASHTO road trial in the USA in 1956-8
(Croney and Croney, 1991). Subsequently this
load has been rationalised in SI units to 80 kN
(equivalent to 8,157 kg). In order to determine
the cumulative axle loads over the design life of
the pavement, it is necessary to convert the
each ,class of heavy vehicles that
-r'o"<d;,jo an equivalent number of
%-axles. Axle loads are related to
the standard axle using the following
relationship :
standard Axles = (Axle Load(kg))
8157
For example, axle loads of 5, 8, 10 and 13

tonnes ar. equivalent to 0.14, 1.00, 2.26 and
6.45 stan&d .axles,
.
respectively.
Manual classified counts should be carried out

using the Qatar standard 16 classes indicated
in Table 9.1. In order to ensure that the ADT
and
composition
percentages
are
representative of the yearly traffic, the following
method is suggested:
Traffic counts are performed on six

consecutive working days (excluding
Fridays), for both travel directions
11
kctic. Lorry
1+22+2
1.5 7.0
12
&
&tic.
1+22+22
2.0 7.0
Times of abnormal traffic activity should

be avoided such as public holidays, etc.
14
+2+22
2.0 7.0
+22+22
2.0 10.0
During the six days at least two counts

should be for a full 24 hours. Ttie
count totals for the other days should
January 1997
~orry
Trailer
15
Tredlef
Note: Relu elso la T.bh 6.1
Table 9.1 Qatar Standard Vehicle Classes

For each vehicle class, a representative number
Page 914

need to be weighed and the average number of
standard axles for that class determined. This
is then 'applied to all the vehicles of that class
for the design period. The values can vary
considerably depending on the proportions of
the various vehicle classes and the degree of
loading. On some routes, the loading is very
directional, eg the approach to a quarry may
have slmilar vehicle flows in both directions, but
empty lorries in one and fully laden in the other,
hence axle load surveys are essential.
At present, Qatar has no legal limits on either
axle or gross vehicle weights. A considerable
amount of overloading, relative to the designed
vehicle weights occurs. Local surveys have
found extreme cases of vehicles being loaded
to nearly twice their designed gross vehicle
weights. Overloading causes a big increase in
wear to the pavement. In the case of a 5-axle
articulated truck, this can increase from about 4
equivalent standard axles, for the designed
weight limit, to 160 for the overloaded case.
Obviously, not all vehicles will be overloaded to
this degree, but the average number of
equivalent standard axles per vehicle for each
traffic class will generally be higher than in
places where legal limits, related to the vehicle
design, are imposed and enforced.
An
indication of the likely range of average values
for Qatar in each of the classes is shown in
Table 9.1. (Classes 1 and 2, consisting of cars,
4-wheel drive vehicles, light pick-ups and taxis
cause negligible pavement damage and have
been omitted.) The wide ranges are due to the
varying proportions of loaded, part loaded and
empty vehicles and the extent of overloading.
The mix will vary with vehicle class and route.
Axle load surveys, using portable weighbridges,
should be carried out to determine the axle load
distribution of a sample of the heavy vehicles in
the vicinity of the road. Data collected from
these surveys can then be used to calculate the
mean number of standard axles for a typical
vehicle in each class. These values can then
be used In conjunction with traffic forecast to
determine the predicted cumulative standard
axles that the road will carry during its design
life. Alternatively, there may be data available
from the CED, who should be consulted on the
need for specific load surveys.
Axle loads can also be measured and counted
by weigh in motion (WIM) systems. These
involve the embedment of load sensitive strips
or pads, flush with the road surface, across the
wheel path. These systems are very attractive
because axle loads are measured while
vehicles travel at normal speeds. However,
WIM systems require careful, regular calibration
and the measurements are affected by the
SECTION 9
speed of the vehicles, the transverse position of
the vehicle wheel and the smoothness of the
road surface. In UK, trials of WIM systems
have shown substantial unexplained variations
in average vehicle loads between sites with
similar traffic. Moderate errors in weight
measurement will be converted to much larger
errors in the equivalent standard axle values. If
WIM systems are used, it is strongly
recommended that check weighing of a sample
of the heavy vehicles be carried out using
conventionalweighbridges, either permanent or
portable types. This is in addition to the
calibration already mentioned.
9.2.6
Determlnation
Standard Axles
of
Cumulative
In order to determine the cumulative "standard

axles' over the design life of the road, the
following procedure should be followed;
L
1.
'
~etehine
the daily traffic flow for each
dass of vehicle weighed using the
results of the traffic survey
2.
Determine the average daily onedirectional traffic flow for each class of
vehicle
3.
Make a forecast of the one-directional

traffic flow for each class of vehicle to
determine the total traffic in each class
that will travel over each lane during the
design life
4.
Determine the mean equivalence factor

for each class of vehicle and for each
direction from the results of the axle
load survey
5.
The products of the cumulative onedirectional traffic flows for each class of
vehicle over the design life of the road
and the mean equivalence factor for
that class should then be calculated
and added together to give the
cumulative "standard axle" loading for
each direction. The higher of the two
directional values should then be used
for design.
For dual carriageways it should be assumed

that the slow lane will carry all the heavy
vehicles unless local experience indicates
othewise or the one-way ADT traffic flow
exceeds 13000 vehicles per day. In the latter
. case 90% of the heavy traffic should be
assumed to travel on the slow lane. AH lanes of
the carriageway should be designed for the slow
lane traffic. Each carriageway can be designed
for a different number of standard axles.
SECTION 9
However, the differences would have to be at

least 50% before pavement thicknesses were
altered significantly. In pract!ce, the largest
number of standard axles in eitheruslow lane
would determine the design for all lanes.
9.2.7
S1:
S2:
S3:
Design Traff lc Classes
Accurate calculations of cumulative traffic are

difficult to make due to inaccuracies in the traffic
forecasts and average numbers of standard
axles for each vehicle type. Consequently the
pavement designs are provided as a set of
discrete thicknesses for defined ranges of traffic
rather than as a graph of thickness versus
cumulative standard axles. Each range of
cumulative axles is termed a class and these
are summarised in Table 9.2, expressed in
millions of standard axles (msa).
For
comparison, the pavement classes used in the
previous design manual are also shown. When
the forecast number of axles is considered fairly
reliable, and is within 10% of one of tCle class
boundaries, it is acceptable to use a design
based on the average of the adjacent classes.
Table 9.2 Design Traffic Classe!
e .zL,,
. --
9.3
PAVEMENT M A T E R I ~ L ~ SI . .~
9.3.1
Qatar Construction Speciflcatlon

(QCS)
The full details of the materials to be used in

pavement construction and the subgrade are
given in the QCS together with the applicable
test . methods, based mainly on British
Standards. Brief descriptions of these materials
are given below.
9.3.2
Accordingly, the present pavement designs

include three classes of subgrade defined by
CBR:
+;7
Subgrade
Qatar generally has high strength natural soils

consisting of weathered limestone or sands.
Historically, it has been possiblg to construct
~
earthworks, or at least the u p p e r . l a ~ r $using
material with a minimum soaked ~alifomia
Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 25% and the previous
pavement designs were based solely on this
strength. However it is becoming impractical or
expensive to always provide this standard. In
some locations, such as cuttings, a significantly
higher strength of in situ subgrade is possible.
2
2
15% and < 25%

25% and < 50%
50%
The CBR values are measured using the BS

1377 method; on soaked subgrade samples
statically compacted to 95% of the maximum
dry density (MDD), determined using the BS
1377 4.5 kg rammer method. There are also
grading and Atterberg Limit requirements,
detailed in the QCS. The in situ subgrade must
also be compacted to the same relative
compaction, namely 95% of MDD (4.5 kg
rammer).
The specified subgrade strengths must be
sustained for a depth of at least 300mm and the
material below this must have a CBR, at the in
situ.density, of at least 10%. This can be easily
confirmed using a simple hand operated
Dynamic Cone Penetrometer (Kleyn and
Savage, 1982), rather than the much more
l a b o U J i ~ ~ ~ i ~ recompacting
d:of
laboratory
sainpre f
saame'density.
Where the above conditions are not fulfilled,
either some of the subgrade material must be
replaced with higher quality material, or the
amount of cover (fill height) increased. The
necessary replacement or cover thickness can
be determined on the basis of providing the
same $iffness
&... .at formation level (top of the
earthwprk)' as. !or the standard CBR 25%
subgrid=. b a i l s for this procedure aie given
in the Annex to this section. The proposals for
these non-standardsubgrade situations must be
discussed with the CED.
9.3.3
Granular Material for Sub-base and

Roadbase
The same material is used for both layers and

may consist of either crushed stone or gravel, or
natural gravel, or a mixture of these. There are
requirementsfor aggregate hardness, durability,
cleanliness, grading, shape and strength, given
in the QCS. The principal requirement is for the
materialto achieve a CBR value of not less than
60% when compactedto 100% of the maximum
dry density (MDD) determined using the BS
1377 4.5kg rammer method. This material is
used as subLbase for all pavements, except the
concrete slab designs, in thicknesses ranging
from 100 to 200mm. depending on subgrade.
strength. The in situ sub-base must be
compacted to the same density as the CBR test.
namely 100% of MDD (4.5 kg rammer).
January 1997
--
Page 916
SECTION 9
9.3.4
Roadbase Asphalt Concrete
The standard form of pavement construction

uses a type MD1 asphalt concrete roadbase
between 100 and 230mm thick depending on
traffic loading. This material must comply with
a given grading envelope (maximum particle
size 37.5mm) and will be proportioned using the
Marshall Design method to meet the following
criteria:
Minimum Stability:
Maximum Flow:
Air Voids:
Voids Filled with Bitumen:
8 kN
4 mm
3to6%
60 to 75 %.
'The required grade of bitumen is 60170 Pen

with a binder content typically between 3.2 and
5.0%.
'The QCS specifies additional
requirements for particle shape, soundness,
particle strength, water absorption and abrasion
resistance.
The required grade of bitumen is SOU0 Pen with

a binder content typically between 4.0 and
5.0 %. Compaction requirements are the same
as for asphalt concrete roadbase and the laid
material should have voids of about 5 to 6 %
before trafficking.
9.3.7 Concrete for Rigld Pavements
Rigid construction is included for use in local

areas with a high risk of'rutting. It may be
adopted more widely in the future. Concrete
slab pavements require high quality concrete,
sometimes termed pavement quality concrete
(PQC), with a 28 day cube strength of 40N/mm2.
High quality mix constituents, good quality
control and thorough curing are necessary to
ensure that the required standard is achieved.
'
The criteria for compaction on th'e road will

result in average voids from 5 to 6 % in the laid
material before trafficking.
9.3.5
Cement Bound Material
This is used as sub-base in the concrete slab

pavements and as roadbase in flexible
composite pavements. A fairly wide grading
envelope is specified for the material which may
consist of, any or all of, sand, gravel or crushed
rock. This is mixed with cement either in-place
or in an off-road mixer. A modest cube strength
of 7.5 N/mm2at 7 days; is specified.
This material has not previously been much
used in Qatar, but is now included for use as
sub-base for concrete slab pavements and it
may also provide a cheaper roadbase. Limits
on grading, cleanliness and durability are given
in QCS. For both sub-base or roadbase use,
this material must be compacted to 95% of
MDD (4.5-kg rammer).
9.3.6
Wearing Course
A standard surfacing of MD4 asphalt concrete,

laid as a 40mm course, is used on all flexible
and flexible-composite designs. The nominal
maximum aggregate size is 14mm and the mix
proportions are determined in a similar manner
to the asphalt concrete road base, but with the
following difference.
Imported gabbro
aggregate must be used for the coarse fraction,
to provide adequate skid resistance and
resistance to polishing. This last requirement
raises the cost of the material considerably, and
justifies the thickness of only 4Omm.
In order to reduce the risk of cracking due to

imperfect curing or joint construction, reinforced
jointed slab construction has been adopted.
Longitudinal reinforcement to BS 4483 is
required at the rate of 600mm2/m width. The
reinforcement also reduces the slab thickness
compared to an un-reinforced slab and reduces
the number of transverse joints.
'The
reinforcement is placed with 50 to 60mm of
cover below the slab surface and maintaining a
minimum cover of 30mm below any longitudinal
joint sealing groove. Longitudinaljoints must be
provided to limit slab widths to less than 5.0m
for limestone aggregate. Most other aggregates
with higher coefficients of expansion must be
limited to 4.0m. Transverse expansion and
contraction joints must be installed alternately at
15m intervals and proper transitions provided
between sections of concrete and asphalt
construction. Details of these features, defied
from the UK Highway Construction Details
(DOT,1991), are provided in the QCS.
9.3.8
Precast Pavlng Blocks
These are manufactured from Portland Cement

concrete i n two thicknesses, 60 and 80mm.
The thickness to be used depends on the level
of traffic. The average compressive strength
must be not less than 40 N/mm2and individual
blocks not less than 35 N/mm2. Other
requirements, including preferred shapes and
dimensional tolerances are given in QCS.
The paving blocks are laid on a compacted
course of sand, normally in simple herring-bone
bond. The laying course sand may be either
natural sand or crushed rock fines, complying
with the grading envelope in Table 9.3. The
sand is laid so that after compaction it forms a
layer 30mm thick. After placement, the blocks
are compacted using a vibrating plate
compactor and finally, sand is vibrated into the
joints.
Page 9l7
SECTION 9
These pavements do not satisfy conventional
analytical strain criteria but have performed
satisfactorily in other areas of high
temperatures. The designs in Figure 9.3 are
based on those in Figure 9.2, but with some of
the asphalt concrete thickness replaced by
twice this thickness of granular roadbase. This
is in accordance with the structural number
concept of the AASHTO design method (1993)
in which the reduction in thickness of one layer
is compensated by increasing another, in
proportion to the material coefficients. In this
instance the granular layer (CBR 60%) has a
coefficient of 0.1 3 whilst 'the asphalt (stiffness
1.0 GPa) has one of 0.26.
Table 9.3 Sand Gradings for Block Paving

Full details of the laying procedure are given in
the QCS, based on BS 6717, Part 3.
9.4
DESIGN CHARTS
9.4.1
General
The designs for the various types of

construction are presented as a series of charts,
Figures 9.2to 9.6. Knowing the subgrade class
(refer Clause 9.3.2)and the traffic class (refer
Clauses 9.2.6and 9.2.7)the thicknesses of the
layers can be easily read for each pavement
type. Not all types of pavement are considered
appropriate for every traffic class.
Pavement construction should be constant
across all running lanes as the savings to be
made by reducing the roadbase thickness are
not great. In rural situations, where the hard
shoulderledge strip is not expected to have
heavy usage, its pavement thickness may be
reduced. In urban areas, where parking is
expected, a reduction of the pavement
construction for the hard shoulder is not
recommended.
The design requirements for staged
construction is dealt with in Clause 9.5.
9.4.2
Asphalt Concrete Roadbase

(Figure 9.2)
This type of construction will suit all classes of

traffic and is similar to past pavement practice in
Qatar.
The basis of these designs are
discussed in the Annex to this section.
9.4.3-
Asphalt and Granular Roadbase

(Figure 9.3)
This type of construction is restricted to roads

expected to carry no more than 5 million
standard axles and with only a small propottion
of heavily loaded vehicles.
January 1997
9.4.4
Flexible-Composite
(Figure 9.4)
Roadbase
This type of pavement has not previously been

used to any great extent in Qatar although it is
very common and successful in some
countries. The cement bound layer will crack
transversely soon after construction through a
combination of drying shrinkage and thermal
gradient warping. The successful performance
of this type of pavement depends on the
shrinkage of the cement bound roadbase being
small and the asphalt roadbase being tolerant
of the cracked roadbase. The low strength of
7.5 Nlmm2and the use of limestone, with a low
coefficient of thermal expansion, should result
in narrow roadbase cracks.
'The high
temperatures are likely to assist the asphalt
surfacing in resisting the development of
reflection cracks.
Thick asphalt surfacing will reduce the
development of cracking by insulating the
cement bound layer and reducing the
temperature gradient and warping stresses.
The material thicknesses shown in Figure 9.4
are based on UK practice, However, it is
probable that the asphalt surfacing thickness
couM be reduced in future designs, after some
experience of satisfactory performance is
obtained.
9.4.5
Reinforced Jointed Concrete Slabs

(Figure 9.5)
Rutting of conventional asphalt pavements at

the approaches to junctions or at roundabouts
is a significant problem in Qatar. It results from
the high ambient temperatures, inherent
propertiesof the asphalt concrete and high axle
loads. Although it may be possible to reduce
deformation by mix re-design, or by the use of
bitumen modifiers, there will be uncertainty
over performance and the increased stiffness
may could cause other problems in later life.
Page 918
QATARHIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

Concrete slab pavements at these problem
locations will provide guaranteed, rut-free
performance. Concrete pavements require
considerable attention to mix quality, placement,
joints and curing to be successful. Jointed
reinforced concrete slab construction has been
selected in preference to un-reinforcedslabs as
the reinforcement will provide more tolerance to
any workmanship deficiencies and will also
reduce the slab thickness and number of joints.
The designs shown are based on UK practice
(DOT, 1994) which is based on the work of
Mayhew and Harding (1987). The concrete slab
(40 N/mm2, 28 day cube strength) rests on a
cement bound sub-base (7.5 N/mm2, 7 day
minimum cube strength). This is to ensure that
there is a robust surface on which to erect side
forms and joint-assemblies, and that pumping of
sub-base or subgrade fines through joints is
minimised; Joint details and reinforcement
around openings shall be as shown in the UK
Highway Construction Details, Series C (DOT,
1993) or as specified by the CED. '
The UK un-reinforced slab designs agree

closely with USA practice (Portland Cement
Association, 1984). It has not been possible to
directly verify the reinforced slab designs as the
Portland Cement Association manual does not
cover this type.
If properly constructed, concrete pavements
should last longer than asphalt pavements and
5s cheaper to maintain because they should not
require resurfacing or re-texturingfor at least 30
years. However the joints will probably require
periodic resealing at 15 year intervals.
9.4.6
Precast Block Paving (Figure 9.6)
Block paving may be used for the construction

of car parks or parking bays, median strips and
verges, laybys and access roads. Selection of
the appropriate design will be on the basis of
both total traffic and the incidence of heavy
vehicles. Granular roadbase has been selected
as this will be a more practical material than
asphalt for working in small areas, which will
often be the case with this type of roadwork. In
addition, any fuel or oil spillage will not affect the
structural layers.
The designs are based on German practice
(Roads and Traffic Research Association, 1986)
and are only suitable for the stated levels and
types of traffic. Where block paving is required
for locations with substantial numbers of heavy
vehicles, such as ports or industrial areas, other
designs such as those of the British Ports
Association (1994) should be used. The
proposed designs for such situations should be
discussed with CED.
January 1997
Page 919
- .'
J'
"
Figure 9.2
January 1997
SECTION 9
Asphalt Concrete Roadbase Designs

Page 9/10
..
QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUALs-- "".
w-$#-J$$
SECTION 9
"
Traffic Classes
TI
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Standard Axles
(millions)
<1
1.2
2-5
5-10
10-20
20-50
greater than
15%
Layer definitions
Wearing Course (Asphalt Concrete MD4)
Notes
1. Standard Axles are 80 kN.

2. All thicknesses in millimetres.
Upper 'Oadbase
Lower Roadbase (Granular Base Material)
3. These designs are only to be used when the
proportion of goods vehicles, with equivalent

standard axles of 12 or more, does not exceed
5%of all vehicles.
Sub-base (Granular Material)

Subgrade (CBR at 95% of MDD
(BS 1377, 4.5Kg rammer, soaked))
Figure 9.3
January 1997
Asphalt and Granular Roadbase Designs
'
Page 9111
SECTION 9
Notes
Wearing Course (Asphalt Concrete MD4)
1. Standard A x k s a n 80 kN.
2. Ail thicknesses in mlilimetres.
Upper Roadbase (Asphalt Concrete M D l )

Lower Roadba8e (Cement-bound Material
cube strength of 7.5 Nlmm' at 7 days)
Subgmde (CBR at B5K of MDD
(BS 1377,4.5Kg rammer,soaked))
~igure-9.4
January 1997
3. The asphalt concrete inhibits the
development of reflection cracking.
4. A low strength Cement-Bound

Material has been selected to
minimire reflection cracking.
5. The coat of thir form of construction
Is simliiar to Asphalt Concrete
Roadbase, but could vary depending
on local circumstances.
Flexible-Composite Roadbase Designs
Page 9/12
..
..
QATAR'HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL .
Subgrade
Class
53
Same
as S1
Same
as S l
Same
as S l
,+-+>t,
-, * . 1 - t * <
SECTION 9
I;*-
Same .
as S1
CBR,
greater than
50%
Layer definitions
Notes

Concrata Slab (40 Nlmm' cube strength at28 days
wDth 600 mmzlm of longitudinal reinforcement 2. All thicknesses in milllmetres,
to 8s 4483)
3. Transverse joint spacing shall be not greater
Cement-bound Sub-base
than 15m.
(7.5 ~ l m m cube
'
strength at 7 days)
4. These pavement designs are intended for use
at junctions or other areas with a high risk
Subgrade (CBR at 95% of MDD
(BS 1377.4.5Kg rammer, soaked))
mtting.
5. The deslgn given for Class T31Sl provides the

minimum construction thicknesses to be used.
Figure 9.5
January 1997
Reinforced, Jointed Concrete Slab I3esigns
Page 9/13
Layer definitions
SECTION 9
Notes
Precast blocks (60 or 80mrn)

30mm sand laying course
2. All Ullcknesres in mlllirnetres.
Roadbase (Granular Material)
3. TO Traitlo Cksm lnciuda8 resid8nUal roads and

parking areas with minimrl heavy vehicka.
4. T I Traffic Chs8 Includes laybys, dual
Subgrade (CBR at 95% of MOD

(BS 1377,4.5Kg rammer, soaked))
Figure 9.6
January 1997
carriageway median strips and areas

with appmchbb heavy vehicles.
Precast Block Paving Designs
Page 9/14

9.5
'
9.5.1
SPECIAL PAVEMENT SECTIONS

Staged Construction (Single Layer
Construction)
Sometimes it is appropriate not to construct the

full pavement thickness at one time for one of
the following reasons:
Pavements for temporary roads can often be

constructed to lower standards than
conventional pavements because performance
expectations will be lower (deeper ruts or more
cracking will be tolerable). However, the
following should also be considered:
Design period
unpredictable
A road may initially be required to carry

only limited traffic.
After the
completion of related development
(other roads or industrial or residential
projects) traffic volumes will increase
A new road may carry construction
traffic in the first few years of its life
and thereafter normal traffic. The
application of the wearing course could
be delayed until after the construction
traffic has ceased to avoid rutting of
the final surfacing
An anticipated change to kaffic flow
patterns may require extensive
changes to road markings.
Assessments should be made in each case of
the traffic over the whole design life and in the
initial period. The sub-base would be designed
for the whole life but roadbase and surfacing
would be matched to the initial level of traffic.
The balance of the asphalt would be added in
due course.
However, other
considered:.
factors
must
also
be
Any ironware in the carriageway will

have to be lifted when the overlay is
applied
Kerbing; if present, must either -be
installed high or also raised when the
overlay is applied
Depending on the status of the road,
the initial top course of asphalt may
have to be a conventional wearing
course containing gabbro aggregate.
This will involve extra cost to provide
two, rather than one, asphalt courses
with superior aggregate
Sufficient overbridge headroom must
be provided to allow for the oueriay
thickness
The approaches to underbridges
should be constructed to full thickness
to avoid either overlaying the structure
or full depth reconstruction of the
.
approaches.
'
may
be
very
Design traffic may also be very

unpredictable
Savings may not be very substantial.
9.6
PAVEMENT EVALUATION
9.6.1
lntroduction
As the road network reaches maturity, there will

be fewer new roads to design but more existing
pavements to rehabilitate.
Increasingly
pavement engineers will be required to evaluate
existing pavements and devise appropriate
resurfacing or strengthening measures.
Pavements deteriorate in different ways and at
different rates depending on traffic, pavement
thickness, material quality, drainage etc. The
visible deterioration does not always give a
reliable indication of the underlying cause(s)
and some investigation is needed. A fourstage, highway pavement evaluation procedure
is outlined below:
1.
Routine Monitoring
2.
Detailed Survey
3.
Detailed Investigation (planning,

Execution and Interpretation)
4.
Interpretation and Remedial Works

Design.
9.6.2
Routine Monitoring
The objective of routine monitoring is to id en ti^

those parts of the road network which are
showing signs of surface or structural
deterioration and require further investigation
and possible maintenance. Routine monitoring
of most of the network should be carried out at
intervals of 2 to 4 years, depending on the age,
condition and importance of the road, and the
traffic usage. The monitoring will be by visual
surveys with written records of the condition
supplemented by photographs or video tapes.
Some indicative rut measurements should be
made. In rural areas the survey will normally be
carried out during a slow (20 kph) drive-through,
with occasional examinations on foot at
junctions, structures or any locations with
serious defects. In urban areas the surveys will
,
January 1997
Page 9115

be carried out mainly on foot, from the verges
or footways. The results of all Routine
Monitoring should be stored in the Pavement
Management
System
(PMS)
being
implemented by the CED in 1996.
9.6.3
Detailed Survey
Where any significant pavement deterioration

is discovered, a Detailed Survey should -be
carried out over the affected length and
adjacent area. The objectives of this survey
are to obtain a good description of the
deterioration (type, degree and extent) and an
indication of the likely causes. The survey will
consist of a more detailed visual survey carried
out on foot, including rut measurements. Nondestructive testing of these pavement lengths,
using either Benkelman Beams or a Falling
Weight Deflectometer (FWD), may also be
useful at this stage. Deflections can be used to
check if there is any change in pavement
stiffness between a sound and deteriorated
section and should assist in deciding whether
the deterioration is confined to surface layers or
affects the whole pavement structure. The
FWD will give more detailed structural
informationas it measures the deflections bowl
of the pavement in response to a dynamic load.
Using appropriate software, it is possible to
backcalculate the stiffnesses of the pavement
layers, provided that the thicknesses of these
are known. In order to produce consistent
measurements and layer stiffnesses, the
recommendations given in the FEHRL (1996)
publication should be followed. The stiffness of
asphalt layers are strongly influenced by
temperature and the results of all deflection
measurement must be corrected to a standard
temperature. To do this, temperatures in the
asphalt layers must be measured at the time of
test.
Where the deterioration is considered serious

or is worsening, strengthening or resurfacing
work will be necessary. However, a Detailed
Investigation will be required to provide further
information to decide precisely what work is
necessary. If the pavement condition is not too
serious, it may be appropriate to merely repeat
the Detailed Survey after, say, one year.
9.6.4
Detailed lnvestlgation
The objective of the Detailed Investigation is to

explain the pavement deterioration, including
the identification of the layer(s) responsible for
the deterioration and thus provide information
to enable any strengthening to be economically
designed. It will normally involve coring and
test-pitting of selected areas of the pavement
together with in situ and laboratory testing of
the pavement layers. If deflection testing has
January 1997
SECTION 9
not already been carried out at the Detailed
Survey stage, it should now be carried out.
'The investigation must be properly planned and
effort concentrated at locations to produce data
which will be relevant to explaining the
deterioration. Before planning the investigation,
as much background information as possible,
applicable to the length of interest, should be
assembled:
Original construction details, including
specifications
Local subgrade
conditions
and
drainage
Maintenance history
The results of any previous pavement
surveys or investigations
Past and current traffic flows and
composition.
Some or all of this information should be
available from the CED Pavement Management
System. If there are major omissions in this
information, then the Detailed Investigation may
need to be expanded to include traffic counts
and additional cores or test pits. Where
thicknesses are unknown, ground penetrating
radar may be of assistance but this technique
needs careful calibration against known
thicknesses for each type of pavement being
surveyed.
The standard investigation strategy is to
compare deteriorated and sound sections of
pavement (20 to lOOm in length) carrying
similar traffic and of similar construction (the
selection of such sections, itself, can sometimes
indicate a possible cause of deterioration)..
Appropriately sited cores andlor test pits should
reveal any differences in material qualities or
thicknesses which may explain the different
performance. Depending on the variation of
traffic and construction within the length of
interest, a number of pairs of comparison
sections may be necessary. Where available,
deflection and FWD data may be used to select
pairs of sections with high and low deflections.
However, adequate explanations for the
different stiffnesses are not always found. The
majority of cores or .pits should be in -the
deteriorated sections, sited right on the
deterioration (cracks, ruts etc) to determine
exactly which layers are affected. In the case of
cracking, it is important to know the depth of
crack propagation and for rutting, whether or not
this is present in both the asphalt and
underlying granular layers. To determine which
layers are contributing to a rut, or other
Page 9/16
SECTION 9
deformation, will require a set of three or more

cores, straddling the rut.
9.6.5
'The following points should be considered

when planning and executing the investigation:
The interpretation of the data from the

investigation must address the following issues:
The cores and test pits are

fundamental to the whole investigation
and should all be carefully examined
and logged by a competent materials
or pavementengineer. The core log
sheets should include a photograph
with a scale, full details of asphalt
thickness and condition, including
texture, segregation, voids, layer
bonding, width and depth of cracks,
stripping, soft or otherwise deleterious
aggregate, bleeding and any other
peculiarities
What is the nature, extent and degree

of the deterioration?
Granular layers (sub-base and

subgrade) can be rapidly and cheaply
assessed by in situ testing using either
a hand operated Dynamic Cone
Penetrometer (DCP) (Kleyn and
Savage, 1982)(Jones and Rolt, 1991)
or a portable dynamic plate bearing
tester (PDPBT) (Roads and Traffic
Research Association, 1992). The
DCP test can be carried out through a
core hole but the PDPBT will require a
test pit to expose an area of 0.5 by
0.5m.
Static plate bearing tests or in situ

California Bearing Ratio tests could
also be carried out in place of the DCP
or PDPBT but are slower, more costly
and technically no better than these
hand methods
Decisions on the number and type of
laboratory tests should be made after
the assessment of the field data.
Samples of suspect foundation
material should be obtained during the
excavation of the test pits, but not
necessarily tested. Decisions on what
laboratory tests should be carried out
would be made after the field data has
been reviewed
Density testing of sub-base or
subgrade layers will be helpful where
the strength of these layers is
unexpectedly low and low compaction
is suspected to be the cause. A
maximum
dry
density
value
(determined in the laboratory) will also
be necessary to determine relative
compaction.
January 1997
lnterpretatlon and
Rernedlal Works
Design
of
Is only the surfacing or the whole

pavement affected?
What has caused it?
What remedial treatment is needed?
Provided that the Detailed Survey has been
thorough and the Detailed Investigation has
been properly planned, the first two issues
should be answered by a proper presentation o f .
the survey/investigation data.
Answers on the causes could be very obvious
such as an under-designed pavement, poor
quality asphalt containing segregated aggregate
and voids, or soft and friable sub-base. In other
cases the causes may be more subtle requiring
detailed laboratory testing to identify. In
practice, interpretation should commence with
the completion of the Detailed Survey and
continue during the planning and execution of
the Detailed Investigation to ensure that
relevant and sufficient data is obtained to
answer the main questions.
Successful
interpretation leading to robust conclusions
depends strongly on having carried out the right
field work, sampling and testing in the first
place.
In addition to evaluating the existing pavement,
the future design traffic must be estimated
before deciding what thickness of overlay will be
required. The methods described in Clause 9.2
for new roads are appropriate. Normally,
pavement strengthening should be designed for
a 20 year life, subject to the comments made in
Clause 9.2.2. .
A possible method of determining overlay
thicknesses is to compare the existing
pavement thickness with that required to carry
the total of past and future traffic (AASHTO,
1993). The overlay will provide the difference in
thickness between the existing pavement.
Allowance should be made for any difference in
quality of existing material and the current QCS,
due either to deterioration or a lower original
specification. Defective or deteriorated wearing
course should be replaced before overlaying.
Roadbases with moderate deficiencies could be
retained but with a reduced allowance of
thickness.
Paae 9/17

In cases where reconstruction is proposed, this
should be designed in accordance with the
requirements of the rest of this section.
Granular sub-base is not subject to fatigue and,
provided that it complies with the current
specification, is unlikely to require replacement.
9.7
SECTION 9
PORTLAND CEMENT ASSOCIATION (1984).
Thickness design for concrete highway and
street pavements. Skokie, Illinois, USA.
ROAD RESEARCH LABORATORY (1970). A
guide to the structural design of pavements for
new roads. Road Note 29. HMSO, London.
REFERENCES
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE

HIGHWAY
AND
TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (1993). AASHTO Guide for design
of pavement structures. Washington, DC.
BRITISH PORTS ASSOCIATION (1994). The
structural design of heavy duty pavements for
ports and other industries, 2nd edition. London.
.. .
CRONEY D Qnd P CRONEY (1991). The

design and performance of road pavements,
2nd edition. McGraw Hill International,
Maidenhead, UK.
ROADS
AND
TRAFFIC
RESEARCH
ASSOCIATION (1992). Technical test
specification for soil and rock in road building,
Part B 8.3, Dynamic plate-load test using the
light falling-weight device. (In German.)
Cologne.
TRANSPORT and ROAD RESEARCH

LABORATORY (1990). A users manual for a
programto analyse dynamic cone penetrometer
data. TRRL Overseas Road Note 8.
Crowthorne: Transport and Road Research
Laboratory.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORT (1991).

Manual of contract documents for highway
works, Volume 3, Highway construction details,
HMSO, London.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORT (1994).
Design manual for roads and bridges, Volume
7, Pavement design and maintenance, HMSO,
London.
FEHRL FORUM OF EUROPEAN NATIONAL

HIGHWAY RESEARCH LABORATORIES
(1996). Harmonisation of the use of the falling
weight deflectometer on pavements, Part 1.
FEHRL Report No. 1996/1. Crowthome:
Transport and Road Research Laboratory.
JONES CR and J ROLT (1991). Operating
instrirctions for the TRL dynamic cone
penetrometer (2nd edition). TRLOverseas
Centre Information Note. Crowthome:
Transport Research Laboratory.
KLEYN, EG and PF SAVAGE (1982). The
application of the pavement DCP to determine
the bearing properties and performance of road
pavements. Proceedings of the International
Symposium on Bearing Capacity of Roads and
Alfields. Trondheim.
MAYHEW, HC and HM HARDING (1987).
Thickness design of concrete roads. Research
reporf 87. Crowthome: Transport and Road
Research Laboratory.
MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS of the
KINGDOM of SAClDlA ARABIA (1990).
Highway Design Manual. Riyadh.
January 1997
Paae 9118

ANNEX9A
9A.1
)"
SECTION 9
methods are sometimes used to extend the

empirical results to wider ranges of traffic or
layer thicknesses, of to slightly different
pavement types.
BASIS OF THE DESIGN

METHOD FOR ASPHALT
ROADBASE
DESIGN METHODS
The design documents produced from empirical

performance studies are usually in "catalogue"
format with the exception of the AASHTO
method in which traffic, pavement thickness and
material quality. are related by an empirical
equation.
Analytical and empirical methods can both be

used to determine the thicknesses of pavement
layers to carry a specified amount of traffic. In
the first, the materials to be used in the
pavement are characterised by their stiffnessesand fatigue laws, ie. the relationship between
strain and the number of load cycles to produce
failure. The pavement is then proportioned so
that strains at critical depths, due to standard
wheel loads, do not exceed permissible values
for the required number of load repetitions (the
horizontal strain at the base of the roadbase
and the vertical strain at the top of the
subgrade are normally considered to be the
critical criteria). The design documents
produced from analytical methods may consist
of either a detailed calculation procedure or an
easily read "catalogue" of diagrams or graphs
relating layer thicknesses to traffic and layer
properties.
In practice, design by either method is often

checked to some degree by the other.
9A.2
Conditions in Qatar differ from the temperate

environments, where both the analytical and
empirical methods have been most practised,
and need to be reflected in any design for local
use:
Qatar has a much hotter climate which
will greatly affect the stiffness of any
asphalt and will affect bitumen ageing
Subgrade strengths are generally high
due to the prevalent limestone and
sand, and many roads are constructed
on low embankments of good fill
material
Although the analytical method is technically

attractive, there are considerable practical
difficulties:
Determining stiffness values is
complicated. Asphalt stiffness varies
with temperature, rate of loading and
age of the bitumen. For unbound
materials, the stiffness varies with
moisture, stress history and confining
stress
'
There is no standardisation of fatigue

measurement and a wide variety of
tests are in use, hardly any of which
are compatible (Tangella et al, 1990).
Consequently, each analytical design
method has its own load cycles/$triin
relationship based on a specific fatigue
test method
The field evidence of fatigue failure, in
the manner assumed in the analytical
method, is not conclusive.
In the empirical method, the performance of
trial pavements is monitored to determine the
amount of traffic which can be carried before
the condition is considered unacceptable.
Sometimes the traffic is accelerated by
continually trafficking by heavy vehicles, as in
the AASHTO Road Trial, or occurs normally, as
in the trials carried out in the UK on public
roads. The latter method is the more reliable,
however, the trial results are only strictly
applicable to the trial conditions. Analytical
January 1997
DESIGN STRATEGY
A significant proportion of heavy

vehicles are overloaded causing
significantly more damage than the
same types of vehicle elsewhere.
The material standards in Qatar are simijar to

mainstream practice elsewhere.
9A.3
APPLICABLE METHODS
The first stage in determining asphalt roabase

pavement designs for Qatar was to review
established methods or "catalogues" which
could apply to the hot conditions, either because
they were empirically derived. from the
performance of pavements in a hot climate, or
allow the input of low stiffness values. The
methods reviewed are listed in Table 9A.1.
The methods all quantify cumulative traffic on
the basis of equivalent 80kN (or 8 tonne)
standard axles using a 4th power law. The first
three methods do not require specific
temperature or asphalt stiffness input but the
last three do.
Page 9119
SECTION 9
9A.4
SPECIFIC METHOD FOR QATAR
The second stage in determining asphalt

roadbase thicknesses was to set these slightly
greater than the 110 to 270mm values and then
adjust to ensure that the roadbase and
subgrade strains did not exceed permissible
values. The fatigue laws from the Austroads
manual were used for this because:
The manual reflects more recent
experience
Many Australian pavements are built in
a fairly hot climate
Table 9A.1 - Design methods
The Shell method, No. 5, gives temperature
data for Bahrain which is applicable to Qatar.
The weighted mean monthly air temperature is
given as 28C which results in an effective
pavement temperature of 40C for a 200mm
thickness of asphalt.
Two methods of
determining asphalt stiffnesses at this high
effective pavement temperature have been
considered:
The standard stiffness nomographs
(Van der Poel, 1954 and Bonnaure et
all 1977) indicate stiffnesses between 1
and 3 GPa for MD1 asphalt roadbase
Back calculation of falling weight
deflectometer data from Qatar indicates
an average roadbase stiffness of over 3
GPa for mature asphalt.
Similar
analysis of data from 18 month old
Malaysian pavements indicates asphalt
roadbase stiffness of 1.5 to 3.5 GPa at
40C.
These are appreciably higher than the values of
only 0.3 to 0.6 GPa indicated in the Shell
method, which are considered to be too low.
Partly as a consequence of these low
stiffnesses, the Shell method indicates much
greater pavement thicknesses compared to all
the other methods except for Saudia Arabia.
The satisfactory performance of roads in hot
environments with much thinner asphalt
roadbases than the Shell designs suggests that
the method is conservative for these conditions.
An asphalt roadbase stiffness of 1.0 GPa has
been used in the AASHTO and Austroads
methods. 'The South African, AASHTO and
TRL Overseas methods all indicated very
similar thicknesses of 110 to 270mm of asphalt
for 1 to 50 million standard axles. All the others,
in varying degrees, we& thicker:
January 1997
The Austroads manual produces

designs for hot climates which accord
.' reasonably well with performance.
-
The fatigue laws are:

Transverse strain at the bottom of the roadbase
PC,, = (6532)/(p)
of 1.0 GPa, and
for asphalt with a stiffness.

..
Vertical strain at the top of the subgrade
( p~ = microstrain and
repetitions. )
N = number of load
The layer stiffnesses and Poisson's ratios used

to determine the strains are shown in Table
9A.2.
Table 9A.2
(5% voids, 4% of 60170 Pen bitumen at a
temperature of 40C)
(1 GPa = 1 Gigapascal= 1x109 N/d and 1MPa
= 1 Megapascal= 1x1d N/H)
The standard approximate relationship for
subgrade stiffness, E (MPa) = 10 x CBR (%),
only applies to low strength material. The above
Page 9/20
SECTION 9
values are based on those determined either

from plate bearing tests or back analysis of
falling weight deflectometer data.
Capping material of greater strength may be

used. However, In determining the thickness,
higher stiffness v'alues'should be used with
great caution as the in situ stiffness is
dependent not just on the quality of the capping
but also on the stiffness of the underlying
material.
In all cases, asphalt fatigue was found to'be the

critical criterion.
9A.5
WEAK SUBGRADES
9A.6
In Clause 9.3.2, the minimum subgrade strength

included in the design charts was set at a CBR
of 15% at in situ density which is generally
achievable. However, in the small number of
cases where the in situ subgrade strength falls
below this, it will be necessary to provide a layer
of stronger material called "capping" between
the subgrade and the sub-base. The capping
will normally be either the 15% or 25% CBR
subgrade material used in the standard designs
and will have the same stiff nesses as above. In
cuts or where the road surface is close to
ground level, some of the subgrade will have to
be removed and replaced with capping. In fill
situations, the upper earthworks layers must be
constructed with the capping material. A
method of determining the necessary capping
thickness for either case may be based on the
surface stiffness at formation level, ie
immediately below the sub-base.
The minimum strength standard subgrade
(Class S1) consists of at least 0.3m thickness of
CBR 15% material (or stronger) resting on
material with a CBR of at least 10%. A 40kN
single wheel load at formation level will produce
a surface deflection of 1.49mm. The thickness
of the capping layer required for a weaker
subgrade will be that which produces the same
deflection for the same load. The thickness will
be determined by trial and error using an elastic
layer programme to model the stiff nesses of the
subgrade layers. For the cases of subgrade
CBR values of 7%. 5O/0, and 3%, the required
thicknesses of CBR 15% capping will be 0.5,
0.9 and 1.9m. For the weaker subgrades of
CBR 5% and 3% it will be more effective to use
the stronger CBR 25% capping in thicknesses
of 0.35 and 0.7m respectively. Other capping
thicknesses are possible depending on specific
strengths or stiffnesses, but for prabtical
reasons the thickness should not be less than
0.2m.
The stiffnesses and Poisson's ratio used in this
analysis are shown in Table 9A.3.
REFERENCES
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE

HIGHWAY
AND
TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (1993). AASHTO Guide for design
of pavement structures. Washington, DC.
AUSTROADS (1992). Pavement design - a
guide to the structural design of road
pavements. Sydney, Australia.
BONNAURE F, G GEST, G GRAVOIS and P
UGE (1977). A new method of predicting the
stiffness of asphalt' paving mixtures.
Proceedings of the Association of Asphalt
Paving Technologists, Vol. 46.
COUNCIL FOR SCIENTIFIC AND INDUSTRIAL
RESEARCH (CSIR) (1985). Structural design of
interurban and rural road pavements. Technical
recommendations for highways (TRH 4).
Pretoria, South Africa.
SHELL INTERNATIONAL PETROLEUM CO.
(1978). Shell Pavement Design Manual,
London.
TANGELLA SCSR, J CRAUS, JA DEACON and
CL MONlSMlTH (1990). Summary report on
fatigue response of asphalt mixtures. Strategic
Highway Research Program, Report SHRPAIIR-90-011. National Research Council,
Washington, DC, USA.
TRANSPORT and ROAD RESEARCH

LABORATORY (1993). A guide to the s t ~ t u r a l
design of bitumen-surfaced roads in tropical and
sub-tropical countries. Overseas Road Note 31,
fourth edition. Crowthome: Transport and Road
Research Laboratory.
VAN DER POEL C (1954). A general system
describing the visco-elastic properties of
bitumen and its relation to routine test data.
Journal of Applied Chemistry,' Vo1.4.
Table 9A.3
January 1997
Page 9/21

SECTION 10 ROADWAY LIGHTING
measured in terms of reduction in

personal injuries, fatalities, property
damage, and other costs to society.
More effective usage of the road and
the possible increase in its capacity are
also considered.
10.1.1 Reasons for Lighting
Highway lighting is provided to aid the safe and

orderly movement after dark of all road users,
both vehicular and pedestrian.
For the driver, properly designed lighting will
increase his range of vision, reveal hazards
more effectively, reduce fatigue and particularly
in the case of high-speed roads, increase the
traffic carrying capacity. Pedestrians will be
able to orientate themselves and to detect
vehicular and other hazards. From the police
point of view, crime directed against the person
and property .will be discouraged, whilst
sunreillance and recognition will be greatly
enhanced, particularly if good colour rendering
is provided.
10.1.2 Justification
In considering whether a road should be lit,

from an engineering point of view, the following
factors should be considered.
The nature of the road (eg. motorway
or mixed traffic road) as determined by
its geometry and also by its night traffic
accident rate.
The traffic intensity and composition
(eg. fast traffic only or mixed traffic).
10.1.3 Scope
This section of the Manual sets out the

performance requirements and standards which
shall be adopted for the design of lighting on all
types of highway in Qatar, except for those
footpaths which are separated from vehicular
routes.
10.1.4 Complementary Standards
This section of the Manual requires the use of

BS 5489 : Road Lighting : Parts 1-10 :1992.
10.2
10.2.1 Summary of Road Classifications i n

Qatar
Individual roads in the State of Qatar each fulfill

certain functions within the overall network. A
hierarchy exists which defines their various
roles and the position of a road within this
hierarchy is a measure of its national
importance. Route classificationis discussed at
the front of this manual. Table 10.1 shows the
relationship between the classification used in
this manual and the classification used by
Ministry of Electricity and Water, Street Lighting
Section.
The danger points and other special

situation, such as junctions, crossings
for cyclists and pedestrians and other
interruptions in driving continuity which
may present drivers with unexpected
situations.
It is particularly important to avoid
sudden changes in the visual field of
the drivers as far as determined by the
lighting and to allow drivers to prepare
themselves well in advance for
manoeuvres which suit the situation to
be met over the next stretch of road.
Factors such as traffic volume, speed,
road use during the night, night
accident rate, road geometry, and
general night visibility conditions are
important when considering highway
lighting.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Categoly
Description
Highway Class
(Refer Table 1)
Motorways or Express
Roads (eg Doha-Ruwais
Road, Doha Abu Sarnra
Road)
Class 'A'
Class 'C'
PI, P2
Ring and Radial Roads

Camrdal and Shopping
streets
82, TRI. TR2
Local Streets. Residential

Roads or Access Roads
Refer to Table 1.1 for full descriptions of the Highway
Classification.
Table 10.1
Road Classifications in Qatar

for Roadway Lighting
Justification for lighting is also based

on the economics of lighting as
compared to the cost of not lighting.
Economic returns for lighting are
January 1997
Page 10/1
QATAR HIGKAlAY DESIGN MANUAL

10.2.2
SECTION 10
Lighting Performance
Recommendations
Minimum designed performance levels for the

various classes of road are given in Table 10.2.
Table 10.2
:.
Lighting Requirements
Traffic Routes
for
For slip roads and shoulders on Class 'A' and

Class '6' roads, maintained average luminance
values. of 2.0 and 1.25 respectively will be
acceptable, but the other parameters should
remain unaltered.
10.2.3 Limitation of Glare and "Light

.
Poiiutlon"
Disability Glare
Disability glare, defined and discussed in BS
5489 : Part 1, reduces the contrast between
objects and their background, so that their
visibility is decreased. An object that is just
visible (that is at the threshold of visibility) when
there is no disability glare will, in the presence of
disability glare, merge into the background. The
percentage by which the background luminance
has to be increased to render the object just
visible again is known as the threshold
increment (TI). This provides a notional
measure of disability glare from installations.
The value of the TI depends on the light
.distribution from the luminaire between 70' and
90' in elevation in the vertical plane at which the
luminaire is observed, usually within 10" of
azimuth of the transverse axis of the luminaire.
It also depends on the road luminance, the
layout of the luminaires, the mounting height and
the observer position.
Discomfort Glare
Control of the TI within the limits recommended
in Table 10.2 will generally ensure that
discomfort glare, defined in BS 5489 : Part 1, will
be adequately controlled.
Light Pollution
Another effect of lighting is 'sky glow' which
occurs when upward stray light is reflected back
to earth. Although some sky glow from major
conurbations is unavoidable, special care
should be taken when designing road lighting in
areas where little exterior lighting exists, to limit
the amount of upward or stray light. Such areas
should be considered to be environmentally
sensitive at night and special light control
lanterns specified. As well as hindering
astronomers, many people feel that this form of
light pollution diminishes the aesthetic
properties and value of the dark night scene.
10.3
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
10.3.1
Decisions Prior t o Design
Arrangement and Mounting Height

Lantem arrangement and mounting height shall
be in accordance with the options set out in BS
5489 : Part 2 within the local geometric,
maintenanceand environmental constraints that
apply. Greater mounting heights shall be
considered, particularly for wider carriageways.
Limitation of Glare
The performance requirements of Clause 10.2
shall be met by the selection of lanterns as
described in BS 5489 : Part 2.
In order to limit the glare factor on roads Class
'A' or 'B' where the surrounds are dark, lanterns
must be flat glass type with a distinct cut-off
limiting the visual aspect of the light source to
an angle of 30" from the horizontal. Lanterns
will be mounted at a minimum height of 12
metres from the road surface.
For Class 'C'roads where the surrounds are
mostly bright, the mounting height will be a
minimum 10 metres and either cut-off lanterns
or lanterns having a prismatic controller will be
permitted.
Class '0'roads where the decorative and
aesthetic aspect dominates (e.g. Pole top
lanterns) should use diffusers to eliminate both
discomfort and disability glare. The mounting
height for such lanterns shall be from 3 to 8m.
Overhang
Overhang shall be in accordance with the
options set out in BS 5489 : Part 2. Bracket
projection generally shall be as small as
possible in order to minimise vibration effects
on both the lamp and the column itself.
For aesthetic reasons, the bracket arm is
usually limited to one quarter of the column
height (ie. H/4), as longer arms can give the
impression that the column is top heavy.
January 1997
Page 1012

(including service roads) constructed at
different levels.
The Light Source

In order to conserve energy and achieve high
efficiency, Qatar has standardised on high
pressure sodium lamps for Class 'A' and '6'
roads and high or low pressure sodium lamps for
Class 'C' roads. Class 'D' roads may be lit with
sodium, high pressure mercury, metal halide or
linear compact fluorescent.
The presence and location of existing road

furniture and service utilities such as power
distribution lines, telecommunications, and
various underground services may impose
certain constraints on the lighting layout.
Malntenance Factor
Maintenance factors, as defined in BS 5489 :
Part 2, shall be taken for designs from Table 4 of
that Standard.
The location and form of major intersections,

median openings and other traffic facilities such
as pedestrian crossings and bus stops must
also be considered.
The necessity for lantern cleaning at more

frequent intervals than lamp changing will be
avoided if a minimum degree of ingress
protection rating of IP65 is specified.
Thus the road lighting designer must be

completely familiar with the section of road to
be lit and equally important, he should have a
good understanding of traffic operations that
occur particularly during night time. It is only
with this knowledge that he can arrange the
lighting layout to best meet the many controls
and demands of individual sites and achieve
the maximum lighting effectiveness at
reasonable cost.'
Road Surface"
Design tables based on the 'representative
British road surface' as given in Table 3 of BS
5489 : Part 2 may be used.
'
However a more economical lighting design is

possible if a concrete road surface is to be
provided. If at a later stage the concrete surface
may be overlaid with bituminous material then
the lighting shall be designed for this initially.
Where design calculations are carried out by
computer, a range of characteristic road surface
reflection tables may be input from Publication
CIE No. 30-2 :Calculation and Measurement of
Luminance and Illuminance in Road Lighting.
Most proprietary lighting. calculation programs
will contain data files for one or more of these
standard road surfaces.
10.3.2
Standard Lighting Geometries for

. Different Road Profiles
Road authorities are primarily concerned with

road lighting for its accident reducing potential.
However, these benefits can be seriously
diminished if insufficient attention is given to
reducing the hazard created by lighting poles
near the roadway.
Whilst the development and application of
geometric standards for roads and streets has
reduced the variation in roadway layout for
various classes of roads, the road lighting
designer is nevertheless confronted with a large
number of road layout features and conditions
which will influence the lighting design.
Divided or Dual Carriageway Roads
'This type of roadway layout is most common for
high volume urban and rural artetial roads.
Such roads may involve cross sections with
service roads on one or both sides of the main
carriageways, a great range of median and outer
separator widths and often with carriageways
January 1997
The general lighting arrangement will of course

be dependant on the roadway width, luminaires
available and the desired mounting height in
accordance with the design rules and
procedures as set out in BS 5489 : Parts 2 and
10. However, a choice of several layouts will
usually be available to the designer.
On dual camageway roads any of the following
arrangements of luminaires. may be
appropriate:
a)
Single Sided Arrangement.
Single sided arrangement on each carriageway

with luminaires mounted on the right hand side.
In some cases the mounting height possible
even with special brackets will be inadequate
for the width of carriageway and an alternative
arrangement will be required.
b)
Opposite Arrangement.
On dual caniageway roads, an opposite

arrangement involvingpoles mounted along the
right (footpath) side of each carriageway may
be appropriate where the carriageways are not
too wide and the median is narrow.
C)
Twin Central.
This arrangement provides the designer with

the greatest flexibility in locating luminaires but
requires the minimum median width to be at
least 1.8m and preferably wider. The choice of
mounting height is flexible, as clearances to
overhead distribution lines will generally not be
a problem.
Page 1013

This layout can be considered the most suitable
for dual carriageway arterial roads, particularly
those with carriageway widths greater than 10m,
because of the following advantages:
The number of poles can be minimised
by selecting the highest practical
mounting height.
The installation cost is often lower than

other layouts because of less
underground cabling and only one row
of poles.
-.
This layout provides excellent route

guidance.
It is often feasible to install guard fences
at hazardous locations where vehicle
collisions with poles become a problem.
Undivided Roads
Undivided roads form the major length of urban
traffic routes. They are usually bordered by
relatively narrow verges and footpaths which
may contain overhead power distribution lines.
On these roads the designer is often confronted
with constraints such as clearance of power
distribution lines, location of underground
services, location of driveways and commercial
entrances and often the presence of trees etc.
which will make an optimum layout difficult to
achieve.
In general, single sided arrangements will rarely
be practical and depending on the width to be lit
and mounting height available, a staggered or
opposite arrangement must be selected.
On wide undivided roads (and sometimes on
dual carriageway roads) there is a tendency by
lighting designers to locate the luminaires well
out over the carriageway, in an attempt to
achieve a single sided arrangement. Such
layouts are generally unsatisfactory because of
the 'flash' produced as vehicles pass directly
under the luminaires and more importantly, the
verge and footpath area is often poorly lit as a
result of the overhang exceeding H/4, refer to
Clause 10.3.1 Overhang.
Curves
BS 5489 : Part 2 sets out the requirements for
spacing luminaires around curves. This usually
calls for the luminaires to be located on the
outside edge of the curve which is in conflict with
normal road safety requirements to avoid
locating obstructions at such locations.
It is suggested that unless the curve is quite
sharp (which would be unusual on a traffiC route
of reasonable standard) the designer should
January 1997
forgo the use of the sighting gauge and simply

close up the spacing slightly to raise the
general ambient light level to compensate.
It should be remembered that true silhouette
vision against the road pavement as
background will generally not be achieved on
curves and drivers will be seeing by either
direct vision or by silhouette vision against
fences, buildings and trees, etc. along the
verges.
Crests
The designer will generally follow normal 'evengrade' procedureswhen crests are encountered
on the section of road to be lit. However, if the
crest is relatively sharp, as might exist where
the road overpasses another road,
consideration should be given to the use of cutoff rather than semi-cut-off luminaires. Often
this should involve only one or two luminaires at
the top of the crest.
10.3.3 Llghtlng Columns as Hazards
Road accidents involving fixed objects beside

the roadway are a considerable concern to
everyone involved with roads and traffic.
Table 1 of BS 5489 : Part 1 recommends
minimum clearances between columns and
edge of carriageway for a range of design
speeds.
,'
10.3.4 Typical
Lighting
Junctions
Layouts
at
Junctions are particularly important elements of

the road system both from the point of view of
efficient traffic operation and of road safety.
The latter is evidenced by the fact that at least
60% of casualty accidents in urban areas occur
at these locations.
It is especially important, therefore, that the
lighting standard at junctions be at least as
good and preferably somewhat better than that
on the intersecting roads. In addition, the
importance of minimising the number of poles
and/or locating them clear of vulnerable areas
cannot be overstressed.
BS 5489 : Part 3 makes specific
recommendations in respect to the positioning
of key luminaires at simple intersections and
the engineer should conform with these
requirements as far as practical.
The large variety of channelization layouts,
each designed to meet the specific site and
traffic conditions at any particular location,
makes it difficult to set down standard luminaire
arrangements. However, some rules relating to
Page 1014
SECXI~NIO
#

luminaire arrangement can be formulated to
guide the lighting designer in the achievement of
good design practice:
At the outset, the engineer must
recognise that seeing by silhouette
vision is unlikely to occur at junctions
and as a reslitlt, the layout should aim at
illuminating the conflict area and the
objects in and around it, such -as
pedestrians, cars, kerbed islands,
pavement markings and signs etc. so
that they are seen by direct vision
At .roundabouts in the small approach

splitter islands, on the central island
opposite entry roadways and on the
right
hand
side
immediately
downstream of an entry point to a
roundabout.
Figures 10.1 to 10.6 show typical lighting
layouts recommended for standard junction
designs in Qatar.
The level of Clluniination and its

uniformity should be such that the layout
of the islands and the various
carriageways and turning roadways are
clearly
discernable
by
drivers
approaching on the intersecting roads
and negotiatingthe required movements
within the junction
Luminaires must be placed to provide

the best possible illumination of
pedestrian crossing areas
The luminaire layout as seen in

.
perspective should not confuse but

enhance the route of through traffic. .A
good layout will provide r o ~ ~guidance
te
to lead traffic through the junction
Care should be taken to ensure that
points where traffic streams merge and
diverge are well lit
The number of lighting poles near the
conflict area should be minimised.
Where traffic signals are installed or
being installed, joint sharing of the
pedestals should be achieved wherever
possible. Where large channelizing
islands exist, consideration sho~~ld
be
given to the use of high mast flood
lighting techniques to reduce the
number of poles around the junction.
It is very important to avoid locating poles:

Close to the approach ends of narrow
residual medians and median islands
In the nose area of islands where traffic
streams diverge
In areas where the poles might obstruct
the sight lines of drivers waiting to enter
or cross another traffic stream
In the vulnerable areas along the
outside of curved slip roads
January 1997
Note: S = design column spacing on the main road.
Figure 10.1
Typical Layout for TJunction .
S E W N 10
--
A2
-----------------------------------------
A1
Note: S = design column spacing on the main road.
Figure 10.2
=..-
Typical Lighting for Staggered Junction
Figure 10.3
Typical Lighting for U-Turn Facility
Figure 10.4
Typical Lighting for Large

Roundabout
January 1997
Figure 10.5
Typical Lighting for Small

Roundabout
Page 1016
SECTION10
turn will be governed by the load rating of
individual lighting units in the circuit.
Pederuian Crorrlng
--------
-------
10.5.3
&
Equal dlrbncer of
not mom than 1Om
(a) Staggered
Pederuian Crorrhg
--------
------Equal dkbncer of
not more than 15m
(b) Opposite
Figure 10.6
10.4
Typical Luminaire Positions

Adjacent to a Pedestrian
Crossing
a
SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
Detailed specification for the supply, installation

and testing of equipment will be found in the
QCS.
The recommendationsfor lighting columns are
to be based on a windage of up to 100kph and
in accordance with the weight of the fitting or
fittings installed and the length of the bracket
used.
10.5
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
10.5.1
Supply
Cable runs will be of a maximum length which

will permit a voltage drop of not more than 30V
per phase (i.e. a single phase voltage at any
column of 21OV). A ring main to reduce voltage
drop by looping every alternate column in each
direction will be permitted.
Cabling between columns will be to a maximum
of 25mm24 core PVC armoured cable and will
be looped into each column by means of an
approved street lighting cutout fitted with an
HRC fuse of a size appropriate to the load of
the light sources plus control gear losses.
Consideration must be taken of the fact that the
starting load for some light sources can be in
excess of 100% of the normal running load.
On 3 phase systems every column of a row of 3
will be connected to a different phase thereby
ensuring a balance throughout the installation.
10.5.4
Ducts
Cables crossing roads or structures will be run

through PVC ducts of 150mm diameter only.
Unless ducts terminate at cabinets, mounting
posts or columns, their ends shall be marked
with approved marker blocks or location posts
so that their location can be clearly identified
without exploratory excavation.
On completion of an installation, 'as-built'
drawings showing all cable routes and duct
locations will be provided and submitted to
MEW for records.
Prior to any installation of street lighting,

application must be made to the MEW together
with a design drawing and specifications. The
Planning Section of MEW will, after the
approval of the design by the Street Lighting
Section, allocate the points of supply.
MEW will allocate a 3 phase and neutral 415V
50Hz supply either directly from an existing
11kVl415V MV substation panel or more usually
from an MV feeder to a street lighting feeder
pillar.
10.5.2
Cables
10.5.5
Earthing Systems
The wire armouring of the cables shall be used

as an earth conductor (circuit protective
conductor). The armour from each incoming
cable shall be bonded together by means of an
approved earth bonding clip to which a 6mm2
PVC insulated wire shall also be fixed leading
from the earthing stud provided in the column.
Earthing shall be terminated at the nearest
MEW supply point by bonding to the MEW
substation earthing point.
Feeder Pillars
Feeder Pillars will be placed at the nearest point

to the main supply so.urce.
Frequencyof feeder pillars will depend u on the
maximum length of run of the 25mm cable
consistent with permitted voltage drop, which In
January 1997
Page 1OR
QATAR' HIGHWAY ~ZESIGNMANUAL

10.5.6
Safety Standards
1
Engineer's Responsibiiities
In order to promote safe working practices for
both construction and maintenance, the design
engineer shall carry out Risk Assessments for
any activities which may endanger personnel or
property, including the following where relevant:
Working at height
Use of mobile elevating working
platforms
Storage and use of liquid propane gas
sto;age and use of highly flammable
liquids
Use of lifting equipment

Use of hand tools
Use of compressors and pneumatic
8
power tools
Use of portable electrical equipment
Electrical work up to 415 volts
Installinglreplacing luminaires
Electrical testing and commissioning
Disposal of discharge and fjuorescent

lamps
Disposal of waste materials
Work in the vicinity of underground
services
Work in the vicinity of overhead electric
cables
Work in and with excavations
Roadworks
10.6
On most lighting installations, the maintenance

vehicle will stand on the carriageway directly
underneath the luminaire, thus reducing the
trafficable width available during maintenance
operations.
Where the mounting height is 12.5m or less and
the EPV can be positioned directly beneath the
luminaire, outrigging stabilizers may not be
required.
In other situations, the use of
stabilizers will be necessary and will further
considerably reduce the trafficked width
available.
slingini of loads
Most road lighting maintenance is carried out

using elevating platformvehicles (EPV). These
are available in various sizes to service up to
about 21m mounting height, but are expensive
to purchase or hire.
Minor demolition and breaking out of

services.
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
10.6.1 Design lmplicatlons

It is often important to consider the implications
of the lighting maintenance operation during the
planning and design of a road lighting
installation. This is particularly so in respect to
lighting on motorways and other high traffic
volume andfor high speed roadways.
January 1997
Depending on the nature of the road in question

and the traffic demands, it will be necessary to
implement appropriate traffic control measures
and possibly even schedule the maintenance
work to periods of low traffic flow.
These arrangements can be both inconvenient
and costly and the alternatives available should
be properly evaluated. The alternatives may
involve a different luminaire arrangement at a
lower mounting height, the use of hinged poles
(which are now available at relatively little
additional cost) or the use of a fewer number of
greater mounting height columns with luminaire
lowering gear (high masts).
10.6.2
Quality of Equipment
When comparing costs of alternative items of

equipment, the "whole life' cost ,of the
installation should be considered rather than
just the initial construction cost. It will often be
found that more expensive, high quality
equipment requiring less maintenance attention
will be cheaper in the long run, as well as
causing less inconvenience to the road user in
terms of obstruction to the highway during
maintenance operations. There may also be
safety benefits in using high quality equipment.
Guidance on luminaire maintenance factors is
given in Table 4 of BS 5489 : Part 2.
10.6.3
Inventory and Fault,Reports
In order to obtain the most cost effective service

from a lighting installation, adequate procedures
for the reporting and logging of faults, and the
planning of maintenance programmes need to
be established.
An essential requirement for these activitles is
the provision of an accurate, comprehensive,
easily accessible inventory system, nowadays
Page 1018

usually installed on a desk-top computer or PC
network. A large amount of manual survey and
logging work is involved initially, but this will be
repaid within a fairly short time by
improvements in efficiency of management.
It is of great benefit when logging fault reports,
which may often originate from persons with no
technical knowledge, to be able instantly to view
details of the installation on a visual display
screen.
The frequency
electrical safety.
of
inspection . for
It will normally be found that lantern cleaning,

which is a costly, labour-intensive activity, can
be restricted to coincide with the lampchanging
operation if a luminaire with enclosure
protection to at least IP65 is installed.
10.6.5 Frequency of Inspections
It is recommended that visual, structural and
10.6.4 Cleaning and Lamp Replacement
It is essential that cleaning and lamp

replacement routines should be closely followed
to maintain the installation.
Maintenance
programmes should include lamp replacement,
luminaire cleaning, renewal of failed parts,
checking of gaskets and optical components,
lubrication, painting and night inspections.
Apart from the deterioration of luminaire parts,
which can be corrected by cleaning, there is
also a longer term deterioration which is
permanent and cumulative. Restoration of
photometric performance may, therefore,
require replacement of optical systems or even
the whole luminaire.
Site tests should be
carried out at intervals of not more than five
years to check that performance is acceptable.
The procedure according to which lamps are
replaced is a matter of local policy, cost and
lamp type used. The cost of replacing lamps
on demand should be compared with that of
group replacement. In making the comparison,
the following factors are among those that
mechanical inspections of street lighting

equipment should be undertaken annually with
full electrical testing every five years.
10.6.6 Hours of Operation
Road lighting is required during all the hours of

darkness, independently of traffic flow' and
should normally be in full operation from about
30 min after sunset to about 30 min before
sunrise.
Questions of local policy are outside the scope
of this guide, which deals only with technical
matters. However, it should be noted that
lighting serves emergency services, public
security and pedestrians as well as drivers and
that extinguishing lighting during the hours of
darkness is detrimental to these interests.
The practice of extinguishing certain luminaires
when the traffic flow is small does not fulfil the
lighting needs of vehicular traffic and may
increase the likelihood of collision with columns.
The shape of the lamp survival curve

for its environment
The lamp lumen depreciation curve
Ease of access, e.g. extent of signing
and coning required
Interference with traffic
The required frequency of patrolling for
outages
The frequency of need for cleaning of
luminaires
The overall proportion of outages that
can be tolerated
The grouping of outages that can be
tolerated
January 1997
Page 1019
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A SURVEYS
A2
A1
Survey in Qatar is controlled by the Ministry of

Municipal Affairs & Agriculture (MMAA) and the
Centre for Geographic lnformation Systems
(CGIS) who obtain, update and keep the
current survey data, and set the criteria by
which survey data is recorded and presented.
INTRODUCTION
Survey is a specific discipline, the results of

which are utilised for a great many purposes
from planning to construction.
With regard ,to road design, the purpose of
. ,.
survey is twofold.
Firstly, it is required to establish the roadway line
within the context of existing land ownership or
planning requirements, thus fixing the available
corridors for the roadway and associated
utilities.
Secondly, it is required to identify elements
which exist within and adjacent to a corridor in
order that a satisfactory road design can be
affected.
To complete this function it is important that the
survey contractor provides all the information
the engineer needs and that the engineer makes
full use of all the survey information available.
Survey work in Qatar is controlled by its own
comprehensive specifications and regulations.
As such, this appendix is not intended as a
survey manual but as an aid to the highway
engineer, to enable the production of
comprehensive designs whilst having due
regard for existing and proposed site features.
SURVEY IN QATAR
The Qatar Survey Manual, issued in 1989 by

the Ministry of Industry & Public Works,
(subsequently replaced by the Ministry of
Municipal Affairs and Agriculture) and
amending circulars, deal principally with
cadastral,
control,
engineering
and
hydrographic survey. This includes the
specifications,
accuracy and working
procedures to be used when undertaking these
types of survey relating to the Qatar National
Grid (horizontal position) and Qatar National
Height Datum (level).
In addition to survey controlled by the MMAA,
the Centre for GIs produces and maintains the
Geographic Information System(GIS) for Qatar.
For convenience, this appendix lists the various
survey bodies that offer services and functions
useful to the highway engineer.
The
organizations are illustrated in Figure A1. Each
organization operates its own specific
procedures and methods that should be
adhered to if interfacing with it.
Items specifically covered are:

a
Government bodies controlling survey

within Qatar
Survey information useful to the

highway engineer that is currently
available from each organization
Survey information that should be

collected for use on road design
projects
Procedures required by the Civil
Engineering Department for survey
work associated with road design
projects.
Survey during road construction is not covered

within this appendix. However, the general
requirements of as-built surveys are discussed.
I-nvuanr
1007
Paao A l l
Centre
for
GIs
APPENDIX A
Ministry of Municipal
Affairs & Agriculture
Planning
Department
u
Mapping &
Positioning - - - - - - - - Section
Land
lnformatlon
Centre
General
Survey
Section
Civil
Engineering
Department
--
Highway
Design
Section
CED
Survey
Unit
Figure A1
January 1997
MMANCGIS Survey Related Organizations
Page A12

A2.1
Centre for GIS

Mapping and
Positioning Services
The Centre of GIs was established in 1990 with

the target of setting up, operating and
maintaining a Geographic Information System
for Qatar.
The Geographic information System is an easily
accessible digital library of all surface ,and
subsurface features in Qatar. It is therefore an
important tool for planning and co-ordinating all
developments in Qatar.
Because of the link GIs naturally forms with all
bodies associated with development, each
government discipline that encompasses
construction of new features includes a GIs coordinator. inL'addition, the Centre for GIs
employs survey teams who check and collect
new features for inclusion within the digital
database.
Functions of the Centre for GIs useful to the
highway engineer are listed below.
Topographical Database
The digital topographical mapping database is
available at nominal scales of 1:500,000,
1:200,000, 1:50,000, 1:10,000 and 1:I000
(urban areas only).
The 1:10,000 and 1:1000 high resolution
databases are stereo-compiled from aerial
photography and form Qatar's GIs Digital Base
Map Database (DBMD).
The larger scale digital mapping was created by
digitizing existing maps.
-
The DBMD is constantly updated sheet by sheet

from aerial and ground observations.
1:1000 mapping has an accuracy of

*500mm which is acceptable for most
studies and concept road design and is
useful as a back-drop for illustration of
areas adjacent to the route under
consideration
1:10,000 mapping has an accuracy of
A3m which is suitable for location plans
and diagrams.
1:50,000 mapping has an accuracy of
d 5 m and is suitable for presentationstyle diagrams.
APPENDIX A
National Control and Benchmarks
'The 1' 4" order survey control points and
benchmarks situated around Qatar provide coordinate and level information for the entire
country. A greater density of control is given in
the urban areas.
Orthoimagery
Orthoimagery comprises digital aerial
photography that is assembled to form a visual
picture of the landscape. It has an accuracy of
i5OOmm with a greater resolution in urban
areas. The digital orthoimagery database is not
generally made available due to the amount of
information contained within the files (typically
6OMBIsheet).
1:1000 orthoimagery is available for
urban areas of Doha, Wakrah and
Dukhan. This is useful for engineering
studies and as a check on field data
1:10,000 orthoimagery is available for
the whole of Qatar. This is useful for
engineering
studies,
particularly
relating to the identificationof drainage
catchments and wadi locations.
Digital Elevation Model
The digital elevation model consists of
accurately recorded spot heights for the whole
of Qatar.
Levels are related to the Qatar National Height
Datum and quoted to two decimal places.
Satellite Imagery
Available in digital format and posters for the
whole of Qatar.
Satellite imagery is not
generally used in highway design but is useful
for specific studies because additional
information that is not available on the digital
mapping or orthoimagery is presented.
Aerlal Photography
The earliest black and white photography taken
in 1947 is still available.
Complete
photographic cover of Qatar dates from 1977
and colour photography is generally available
dating from 1980.
Aerial photography for the whole of Qatar is
presented at scales of approximately 1:40,000
and is useful for route and development
planning and engineering studies.
Wadi
conditions, areas of high water table and
flooding are clearly identifiable from the aerial
photography.
Page A13
APPENDIX A
Old Mapping
Early map series are available on film or paper
sheets from archives.
The mapping was
produced from aerial photography taken during
1971, 1973, 1977, 1980 and 1987. Scales of
1:200,000, 1:100,000, 1:50,000, 1:20,000,
1:10,000, 1:5,000, 1:2000, 1:1000 and 1500
have been prepared, though not all areas of
Qatar are covered by each scale. The engineer
should refer to the Qatar Survey Manual for
further details of coverage and series.
Approval of Survey Companies

The GSS is responsible for the approval of
private survey companies who can access
cadastral information and undertake cadastral
survey work for private or government bodies.
Approval of Corridor lntersectlon Points
For new corridor alignments the calculation of
corridor intersection points and curve
parameters shall be made by the highway
engineer or surveyor based on adjacent
cadastral information.
Old mapping is useful for identifying features

such as sink holes, shore lines and low areas
since covered by development.
Where there is no existing adjacent cadastral

information, corridor IP's and curve parameters
shall be computed from Planning Department
policy plans. Existing site features such as
walls, pylons, posts etc may be used to define
boundaries reflected on the policy plans. The
computed corridor IP's and curve parameters
shall, in this instance, be reported for the
approval of the General Survey Section.
Companies that are approved for cadastral
survey work by the General Survey Section
shall be employed to compute and report these
points.
Global Positioning System (GPS)

The global positioning system provides position
and level of any place in the world from satellitegenerated'location information. A minimum of
3 satellites need to be operational over the
locality. GPS equipment may be small enough
to be hand-held. Varying levels of' horizontal
and vertical accuracy are available, depending
on the number of satellites read and the
occupation time at the station.
The Centre for GIs broadcasts VHF correction
information for use with GPS equipment within
Qatar to provide real time outputs.
GPS has much use in route finding and strip
levei surveys in areas where more accurate
control is not available. However, in Qatar
where accurate control is widespread across the
whole country, its uses are limited by the cost
required to achieve the accuracy necessary for
highway design.
A2.2
Land Information Centre

Survey Section (GSS)
- General
The Land Information Centre was created in

1994 and incorporates the General Survey
Section.
Functions of the General Survey section useful
to the highway engineer are listed below.
Cadastral Database
The GSS maintains a database of registered coordinates relating to land ownership boundaries
for the whole of Qatar. The information is
available in the form of co-ordinated points in
text files.
Highway engineers are reminded that road

alignments shall be developed in accordance
with the relevant sections of the QHDM.
Alignments are therefore not defined by the
corridor centreline (Refer to Section 5).
A2.3
Planning Department
The Planning Department is responsible for the

co-ordination of all land planning in Qatar
including the outline approval of private
developments.
Functions of the planning department useful to
the highway engineer are listed below.
Policy Plans
The Planning Department can provide current
policy plans illustrating information regarding
land use allocation for the whole of Qatar.
Policy plans are available at scales of 1:1000
for urban areas and 1:2000 for rural areas.
Paper copies of policy plans are available
illustrating the up-to-date land use planning.
Digital copies of the policy plans are updated
every three months, and are also made
available for general use.
Cadastral information shall be used by the road

designer for the production of road corridor and
network plans and in the computation of road
intersection points and centrelines.
January 1997
Page A14

A2.4
CED Survey Unit
The CED Survey Unit operates exclusively for

the Roads Division. Its main activities are listed
below :
Topographical surveys for in-house
design work
Setting out for grading schemes
undertaken by the Direct Labour
Organisation.
Functions of the CED Survey Unit useful to the
highway engineer are listed below.
Road Intersection Points
The CED Survey Unit maintains a database of
road intersection points.
APPENDIX A
A3.2
'
Services Surveys
Services survey shall be undertaken utilising

electronic radio-detection methods. Line and
level of existing services apparatus shall be
recorded on services survey plans.
Services survey drawings shall be prepared at
1:500 scale for urban areas on A1 sheets and
in digital format. Scales for use in rural areas
should be chosen to reflect the amount of detail
required. Layer numbering, line types and
symbols shall be in accordance with the Civil
Engineering Department standard.
The
horizontalaccuracy of the services surveyed by
electronic radio-detection shall be to 250mm,
with vertical accuracy to *100mm. Where
services are located by trial pits they shall be
surveyed to an accuracy of k5mm horizontally
and vertically.
IP's computed by the highway engineer from

cadastral information shall be submitted to the
CED Survey Unit for review.
Location of services lines are to be

determined by the co-ordinate of points
along the lines.
Topographical surveys for CED Roads projects
are subject to CED Survey Unit review and
approval.
Co-ordinates may be derived from

measuring:
a)
As-built Surveys
As-built drawings are prepared by contractors
with the assistance of supervising consultants
and private survey companies. They are
recorded in digital and map sheet form and are
archived in the CED Prime Document Storage.
b)
C)
Level shall be recorded on the survey

plans to national datum at specific
points along utility routes. Points shall
be levelled and recorded at bends,
'junctions and at 25m intervals along
straights.
As-built surveys are reviewed by CED Survey

Unit on an ad hoc basis as required.
A3
SURVEY WORK PROCEDURES
In order to maintain consistency between

projects, specific procedures are to be followed
in surveying, recording and presenting survey
information for highway design projects.
Typical survey requirements for highway design
projects are listed below.
A3.1
The topographical survey shall cover the full

extent of the works to be designed and include
tie-ins to all existing features.
Survey data recorded shall be sufficient to
enable preparation of survey drawings and shall
be prepared in accordance with the specification
given in A5.
January 1997
anglehearing and distance

from known control points.
offset and chainage from
knownJco-ordinated lines (eg.
road centreline)
distances from 2 or more
known points.
All radio-detection survey operators shall be

approved by the Civil Engineering Department
prior to commencement of the services survey.
The results of radio-detection surveys shall be
corroborated by manual excavation of trial
holes at selected sites in accordance with
service authority procedures.
A3.3
As-built Surveys
On completion of construction, as-built survey

drawings shall be produced by the project
contractor. ;
As-built utility information shall be collected
during site works by the contractor and
recorded in digital format for line and level by

the supervising consultant.
All as-built
information shall be collected in a digital format
compatible with CED's highway design and
draughting software.
. .
APPENDIX A
For road corridors, cross section levels to the

edge of the reservation or agreed extent shall
be taken at 25m intervals.
Preparatlon of Survey Data
A5.2
As-built survey drawings of principal alignments
and visible features shall cover all of the works
installed under the contract including utilities,
services and all finished alignments and levels,
both above ground and subsurface.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the

data observed as survey plans in the following
format:.
As-built surveys shall be undertaken by

companies approved by the General Survey
Section and shall be in the format approved by
the Civil Engineering Department.
The
construction contract is not normally considered
complete until the as-built surveys have been
submitted to CED and approved.
Topographical survey drawings shall

be produced at 1:500 scale for urban
areas. Larger scales of 1:200 or 1:I
00
shall be used for areas requiring
greater detail such as major junctions.
In rural areas, where few features are
present, the survey drawings shall be
produced at 1:1000 scale or as
otherwise agreed
A.4
APPROVED SURVEY COMPANIES

Surveys plans shall be contoured at
0.5m vertical intervals. Additional spot
levels shall be indicated at lqw and
high points and across flat areas
without contours
The General Survey Section is responsible for

the approval of survey companies in Qatar for
cadastial survey work.
Companies undertakirrg topographical survey
work for road designs shall also be from the
GSS approved survey company list.
A5
A.5.1
Levels at 25m intervals shall be

indicated on the survey drawings. In
larger open areas a grid of levels at
25m centres can be used
SPECIFICATION FOR
TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
Features t o be Observed
In addition, the data collected and survey

procedures used shall be submitted in the
following format:
The survey contractor shall undertake a detailed

topographical survey of the subject areas. The
following features shall be observed:
Building extents (including overhangs,
walls, fences, gates and entrances)
Kerbs, bitmac edges, tracks, footpaths
and parking areas
Service postslpoles (eg. telephone,
electricity, lighting, signals)
Road signs (street names, traffic) and
billboards
Manholes, gullies, hydrants, culverts,
service boxes and markers
Overhead and buried cablesnines
Trees, plant boxes, landscaping limits
Water channels, culverts
Surface type changes (eg. between
natural ground and concrete paving)
Slopes, escarpments
Spot levels at every 25m and at:
a. Gates and entrances
b. 'Services covers, gullies, culverts
c. Isolated high and low points
d. Abrupt grade changes.
January 1997
AutoCADe .DWG or .DXF plot file of

the topographical maps
Printout of Easting, Northing, Level,
and Code of all points
Comma-delimited DOS text file of

points containing:
a. . Point Number
b. Easting
c. Northing
d. Level
e. Code
Printout of raw data
topographical survey
for
the
meld data, computations and

new
control
descriptions ' for
stations~benchmarks
. Job
Report describing the work

undertaken which includes:
a. Location and project limits
b. Dates of survey
Page A16

c.
d.
APPENDIX A
~ e t h o d sand instruments used

Details about new control
pointslbenchmarks,
where
established.
For multi-sheet drawings, sheet limits

shall be plotted with the current sheet
highlighted.
5.
All digital data shall be submitted on 3.5" floppy

disks.
Survey Drawing
The Contractor shall comply with the following

specifications:
All surveyed features shall be plotted.

Lines shall be labelled when not
specifically identified in the Legend,
(Table A5.4). Point features shall be
represented by standard symbols and
annotated accordingly.
Survey works shall be tied to the Qatar

National Grid and Height Datum or the
QNDDSco-ordinate system.
North point symbol and grid coordinates shall be plotted such that no
part of the drawing is written over.
Establishment of new control stations

and benchmarks shall be in accordance
with Section 2 of the "Qatar Survey
Manual". Levelling closure errors must
be better than 15mm JK, where K is the
length of the level route in km.
Traverses
shall
have relative
accuracies of 1125,000 or better
Eastings, northings and levels of detail
points shall be within 10mm accuracy
For multi-sheet drawings, match lines

and appropriate notes for adjoining
sheets shall be provided.
A5.3
Specifications
Topographical maps shall be of the

format shown in Figure A5.1 and shall
contain the following information:
Layers shall be used in the preparation

of digital drawings. Each layer shall
contain only one feature type and shall
be appropriately named in accordance
with the typical layering given in Table
A5.5
A5.4
Checklng and Verification
All works and resulting survey data shall be

subject to the checking and approval of the
CED Survey Unit.
Contractor's name, project reference

number, surveyor's name, dates of
survey, sheet contents, drawing
number, plan scale.
2.. Notes
Details relevant to the survey work

done (eg. reference system, datum,
methods and equipment used).
3.
Legend
Listing of line types, symbols and codes

used and corresponding descriptions.
Tables A5.1, A5.2 and A5.3 list
standards for CED survey drawings
while Table A5.4 is a typical legend
listing.
4.
Location/Sheet Index Map
Drawing (typically at scale 1:10,000)

showing the area surveyed, name of
major roadslstreets, grid markers, coordinates and north point symbol.
Paae A n
-cE
0
N
c
.
Y)
r'
(Edge of maprhrrt (841mm. x 584mm.)
(SURVEY DRAWING)
5'
('Nert Ilnr* (0.2mm. lhlcknrrr)
Bordrr @.5mm. thltknrrr)
2Omm. (mh.)
,2Omm. (mln.)
5mm.
I,
/
6mm.
I,
#
...
E E
Y) ul
E E
(PROJECT
DETAILS)
(NOTES)
(LEGEND)
1OOmm. x 100mm.
(LOCATION I
SHEET INDEX
..
5, z
c
.
-E
Line
-----------------
...................
-.-.-.-.-
Use
Description
Solid line
Standing kerb line, step, planter, concrete

paving, SIS limit and other features not
othewise listed.
Solid line, 0.25m
Cadastral plot boundary
Solid line, 0.35m
Building line
Two solid lines
Wall (line separation equals thickness of wall
Short dashes
Edge of bitmac, flush kerb, change of surface
Short dashes, 0.35rn
Building overhang
Dots
Toplbottom of bank, change of grade
Solid line and slash
Picket fence, railing, crash barrier
Dash-dot
Road Centreline
-----------------
APPENDIX A
-------
Long dash-short dash Overhead cablelline
.-..-..-..-..-
Long dash-dot-dot
Underground cablelline
All lines are 0.2mm, thick unless othewise specified
.
Table A5.1
L
- Survey Map Line Types
Use
Description
Symbol
Scaled size
Gate (length equals gate width)
Box, 1.2mm.square
UIG cabielduct marker, services and fire

hydrant covers not more than O.5m.square
Circle,
9mm'diameter
Borehole, gully and circular MH cover not

more than 0.5m. diameter
Solid circle,l.2mm.diam. Bollard, marker post not more than 0.5m.

Solid box,1.2mm.square diameter
Triangle, 1.2mm.sides
Triangular MH, sides not more than 0.5m.
Solid circle, 2mm.diam.
Services poctlpole (electricity, telephone, street

lighting, traffic signal); road sign and
sign board supported by single post
Solid box, 2mm.square
Electricity junctionltraffic controller box and

telephone booth not more than 1m.square
Double triangle, 1.2mm. Survey control or benchmark
Scaled size
Palm tree
Scaled size
Tree, general
To be drawn using 0.2mm.pen

Notes: 1. Features exceeding prescribed dimensions shall be surveyed as polygons and plotted
with solid lines O.2mm. thick.
2. Signs supported by more than 1 post shall be plotted as solid lines 0.2mm. thick.
'
i-
Table A5.2
- Survey Map Symbols
January 1997
Pane A19
APPENDIX A
Annotation
Description
Bollard
BH
Borehole
CB
Cadastral boundary
EP
Electricity post
FH
Fire hydrant
Gully
GV
IC
JB
LP
MH
MHQ
MHS
MP
PB
Gas valve
Inspection chamber
Electricity junction box
Lamp post
Manhole; type unknown
Q-Tel manhole
Sewerage manhole
Marker post
Post box
Pipe culvert
RS
S/S
Electricity sub-station
SB
Sign board
PC
PPB
Pedestrian push button pole

Road sign (street name)
SC
Stopcock
SM
Underground service marker
SV
Sluice valve
TCB
Traffic controller box
TEL
Telephone booth
TP
Telephone post
TSP
Traffic lightlsignal post
TS
Traffic sign post
WT
Water tank
WV
Water valve
Notes: 1. Annotations shall be plotted alongside corresponding symbol, line or polygon in

the drawing area and listed with appropriate description in the legend section.
2. The following features shall be additionally annotated with heights:
-Top and bottom steps
-MH covers
-Gullies
-Pipe culverts
-Gates and entrances
Table A5.3 Survey Map Annotations

January 1997
Page All 0
APPENDIX A
LEGEND:
Kerb line, unless othewise specified.
(Level taken at the channel)
Cadastral plot boundary
Building line
Wall
Edge of bitmac, unless otherwise specified
Buildlng overhang
Toplbottom of bank
---------------
.--------.-.-_-_
.................
-.-.-.-.-------
-..-..-..-..w
...
BH
CB
EP
FH
G
GV
IC
JB
LP
MH
MHQ
MHS
MP
PB
PC
PPB
RS
S/S
SB
SC
SM
SV
TCB
TEL
TP
TSP
TS
WT
WV
14.55
Picket fence, railing, crash barrier

Road centreline
Overhead cablenine
Underground cableAine
Gate
Survey control or benchmark
Palm tree
Tree, general
Bollard
Borehole
Cadastral boundary
Electricity post
Fire hydrant
Gully
Gas valve
Inspection chamber
Electricity junction box
Lamp post
Manhole; type unknown
Q-Tel manhole
Sewerage manhole
Marker post
Post box
Pipe culvert
Pedestrian push button pole
Road sign (street name)
Electricity sub-station
Sign board
Stopcock
Underground service marker
Sluice valve
Traffic controller box
Telephone booth
Telephone post
Traffic lighvsignal post
Traffic sign post
Water tank
Water valve
Spot height
Table A5.4 Typical Survey Map Legend

Januarv 1997
Page A l l 1
APPENDIX A
DESCRIPTION1 FEATURES COVERED
LAYER NAME
BUILDING
Buildings, houses, shops, bus shelters and corresponding levels
CADASTRL
Cadastral points and boundaries
CONTROLS
Control stations and bench marks
EX-ROAD
Kerb lines, edge of bitmac, islands and corresponding levels
EX-WORKS
Excavations, boreholes, temporary construction fences
GATES
Gates and threshold lev?ls
IMPROVEM
Man-made features and corresponding levels not related to specific layer

-
e.g. steps, gardens, drinking fountains, private plant boxes, etc.

NATURAL
Trees, waterways, vegetation limits
SERVICES
, corresponding levels,
Electricity, water, telephone and other s e ~ c e sand
includes :manholes, gullies, hydrants, inspection chambers, valves,
electricity and telephone poles and lines, electricity sub-stations,
junction boxes, postboxes, culverts, ducts, pipelines, services markers
SPOT-HT
Spot heights and levels not related to specific layer
ST-FURNI
Lamp posts, street name posts, sign boards, marker posts,

public plant boxes; and corresponding levels
TRAFFIC
Bollards, traffic signal posts, vehicle detectors, pedestriantroad

markings, crash barriers, railings; and corresponding levels
WALLS
Property walls and fences, and corresponding levels
CONTOUR 1
Major contour line
CONTOUR 2
Minor contour line
DESC-TXT
Labels and annotations not related to specific layer
GRIDSDAT
Map grid lines and coordinates
MATCHDAT
Match lines and match line symbols and texts
PLANFORM
Drawing margins, legend, title boxes, location map, riotes
ROAD-DES
Designed road IPS,center lines and reservations
Table A5.5 - Typical Layers for Topographical Survey Drawings
January 1997
Page A112

APPENDIXB
B1
APPENDIX B
GUIDANCE NOTES TO PREPARE A BRIEF FOR GEOTECHNICAL SITE

INVESTIGATIONS
INTRODUCTION
This Appendix primarily is to assist the CED

Engineer in the preparation of a brief f.or a
geotechnical site investigation.
'The guidelines within this Appendix provide a
checklist of items to be considered in the
process of preparing a brief. A flow diagram
identifying the main points is shown in Figure
61.
Select Route
...
Locate Junctions
Locale Structures
I
WalkoverlDrhre
Sites
Data Review
Review Structure
Locations
Each of the items listed in Figure 61 is

discussed in the following sections.
The approach to preparing a brief for concept or
detailed design is the same. However, the
type of information required and size of
investigationvaries. The different requirements
of both concept and detailed design are
identified in the text.
It is essential that all works and specifications
comply with the most up to date veisions of the
CED approved documentation and procedures.
B2
INI'I'IAL CONSIDERATIONS
Before preparing a geotechnical brief the

Engineer must consider the following:
L
Route Selection
In Qatar it is often the case that the route
corridors are predetermined by the Planning
Department. However, the engineer should
review the selected route following good
practice and guidance given in the Qatar
Highway Design Manual. The engineer should
at this stage be confident that it is feasible to
produce a compliant road design within the
route corridor provided.
Locate Junctlons
The junction locations are likely to be dictated
by one or more of the following:
Decide on the
Information
Required to
Enable Design
Select the lnvestigation Procedures

Required to ProvMe the Informtbn lo
Enable Design
Existing or proposed routes

Existing or proposed developments
such as villas, shops or petrol stations
Service equipment such as electricity
pylons, substations, pumping stations,
cables or pipelines
Geotechnical conditions.
Review the Scale

and Quantify the
investigation
Investigation Brief
Figure 81
January 1997
The geotechnical investigation may reveal

ground conditions which result in moving the
junction or changing the design. Junctions
often involve some form of structure, for
example, a full grade separated interchange or
an ornamental structure in the middle of a
roundabout. So the geotechnical information is
quite likely to have a bearing on junction
location.
Preparing a Geotechnical Brief
Page BI1

Locate Structures
The types of typical structures to be found on
highway works are:
Bridges
Embankments
Cuttings
Traffic Signals, Signs and Lighting
Box Culverts
APPENDIX B
63
PREPARATION OF THE BRIEF
Following the initial considerations (refer

Section B2), the engineer must then decide on
the information required in the design process.
Details of the various methods of investigation
and testing listed below are discussed in
Section 64.
83.1
Geotechnlcal Investigation Works
The following investigation works may be

required:
Underpasses
Desk Study
Ornamental Structures such as Arches

and
Feature
Structures
in
Roundabouts.
GeotechnicalWalkover
Before preparing a geotechnicai brief the

engineer should have a full understanding of
the outline design and be able to identify the
type, approximate location and scale of the
structures to be built. These are important
factor: in defining and quantifying the site
Investigation, as most of the investigation will
be concentrated at the location of the
structures.
WalkoverIDrlve Slte
Having determined the route and location of the
junctions and structures, the engineer should
then visit the site. The site should be walked
over or driven through, depending on the scale
of the project. The purpose of the site visit is to
get a visual impression of the route, locate the
junctions and structures and identify any
obvious anomalies which may have a bearing
on the project. For example a drive through a
site may identify lush green vegetation in low
areas indicating possible groundwater. This
may require additional site investigation to
confirm the problem. The site investigation
report should identify such topographic features
and, as a result of the testing, advise of any
problems relating to the design and of any
difficulties which may arise during the
construction period.
Data Review
Following the site visit, the Engineer should
review the site notes and, if necessary, amend
the design accordingly. Any problem areas
should be highlighted and these notes referred
to when preparing the site investigation brief.
The location of structures should be reviewed
against the site visit notes so that if a potential
problem exists, either the location is changed,
the design of the structure is modified or the
site investigation brief increased to cover any
additional investigation works.
January 1997
Trial Pits
Boreholes
Samples
Field Tests
Laboratory Tests.
'
Each of the above works is described in Section

64 of this Appendix.
Schedules for Geotechnlcal lnvestlgations
The following tables quantify typical
geotechnical investigations for the following
conditions:
Roads - Feasibility Stage, Table 81
Roads - Detailed Stage, Table 62
Structures - Detailed Stage, Table 84.
Structures Feasibility Stage, Table 83
'The schedules give advice on the frequency of

different methods of investigations. These
notes are merely guidelines to be used in the
preparation of a brief. Each site investigation
brief should be considered on its own meriis,
taking into account the purpose of the
investigation, stage in the design process, scale
and design of the project and its location.
Page B E
APPENDIX B
Road
Description
Notes
Dual 2-3 Lane

Single 2 Lane
Trial Pits Trial pits should be located at 1OOOm spacing.

The trial pits should not all tie located solely along the
centreline but should be spread over the width of bath
carriageways or the corridor. Trial pits should be
concentrated at identifiable problem areas. Trial pits
would typically be up to 2.5m deep.
It is important to ensure that the proposed

road does not interfere with the hydrology of
the area. Note should be made of any
groundwater in the trial pit and any
evidence of collecting water in the area
such as evaporation salts or green grass in
low areas.
Boreholes These may be considered necessary if the

desk study reveals a problematic area. Borehole,
quantities and locations should be reviewed by a
Geotechnical Engineer, however, the investigation should
be concentrated In the problematic area.
Laboratory Testfngr Testing should be undertaken of
samples at each trial pit and borehole. This frequency
should be reviewedby the Geotechnical Engineer on site
and the scope reduced or increased as necessary.
Table B1
In built up, urban areas, special attention

should be given to locating the trial pits to
avoid services such as electricity, water or
Q-Tel.
.- Schedule
.
of Geotechnical Investigationsfor Roads at Feasibility Stage
Road
Description
Notes
Dual 2-3 Lane

Single 2 Lane
T& Pits. Trial pits should be located at 500m spacing.

The trial pits should not all be located solely along the
centreline but should be spread over the width of both
carriageways. Trial pits would typically be up to 2.5m
deep.
It is important to ensure that the proposed

road does not interfere with the hydrology of
the area. Note should be made of any
groundwater in the trial pits and any
evidence of collecting water in the area
such as evaporation salts or lush green
grass in low areas.
Boreholes
Boreholes should be located at 1km
intervals. If the desk study reveals that consistent rock
and soil conditions are to be expected, the number of
boreholes may be reduced to suit.
Permeability Tests: Falling head, or constant head
permeabilitytests undertaken in boreholes locatedat 1krn
intervals or in areas of differing ground conditions where
surface water from the highway will require collection and
discharge.
In built up, urban areas, special attention

should be given to locating the trial pits to
avoid senrices such as electricityyfuater or
Q-Tel.
Dynamic Cone Penetraffon Tests: Where the desk study

or walkover survey reveals that soil conditions such as
sabkah or alluvium are present, then DCP testing should
be considered in these areas, typically at 2Wm centres.
Laboratory Testing Testing should be undertaken of
samples at each trial pit and borehole. This frequency
should be reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer on site
and the scope reduced or increased as necessary.
Table 62
Januarv 1997
Schedule of Geotechnical Investigationsfor Roads at Detail Stage
Paae 813
APPENDIX B
Structure
Description
Notes
Interchange
Boreholes At least one borehole to be located at each

proposedabutment position.. The borehole should locate
rock head and petrate 5m into rock. Where rock is not
present, the borehole should extend a minimum of 1.5
times the width of a shallow foundation. If piled
foundations are anticipated, the borehole should extend
to rock plus 5m.. A local geotechnical expert can advise
on anticipated depths for various locations in Qatar.
Groundwater shall be recorded if present. If groundwater
is likely to be a problem, it is recommended that the water
level Is monitored over a period to allow for seasonal
variation.
Trial pits alone are not sufficient for major

structures.
Structures in the urban location may have

the benefit of other geotechnical
investigations carried out In the vicinity and
so the scope of investigation works may be
reduced.
Trial Pits It is advisable that trial pits be located on

selected slip roads and tests undertaken to determine the
parameters required to design the earthworks, see
Embankment below. Trial Pits would typically be up to
2.5m deep.
Box Culvert
Trial Pits: At least one trial pit to be located at the

proposed culvert position. Trial Pits would typically be up
to 2.5m deep.
Usually in rural locations, it is important to

review topography and hydrology to locate
the culvert.
Embankment
/Cutting
Boreholes For embankments/cuttings 2.5m highldeep

or greater, at least one borehole to be located at the
proposed embankmenVcutting position. If the
embankmentjcutting is very long, boreholes should be
located every kllometre. Boreholes shwM extend at least
3m beneath the level of the bottom of the proposed
ernbankmentkuthg. Borehdes should identify rock head
and record groundwater if present. Standard penetration
tests are usually recommended to determine hardness.
Ifthe cutting Is deep, the engineer should

consider the stability of the slopes.
Boreholes should therefore be staggered
across the cutting and not just follow the
road centreline. Laboratory tests should
identify parameters for slope stability and
settlement to verify that it is possible for an
embankmentlcutting to be built
Trial Pits. For embankmenwcuttings less than 2.5m

high, at least one trial pit to be located at the proposed
position. Trial Pits would typically be up to 2.5m deep.
For cuttings, Investigations should extend a minimum of
2m below cutting base level, or to rock. As such, trial pits
may only provide informationregarding the material to be
excavated.
Special
Structures
Table B3
January 1997
Site investigations for special structures such as

ornamental arches, roundabout centre pieces, gantries or
cantilevers for traffic signs will require individual
consideration depending on the size of the structure and
its location.
Schedule of Geotechnical Investigations for Structures at Feasibility Stage
Page 614
IStructure
1 Description
-
Interchange
APPENDIX B
I Notes
-
p
-
--
-- -
---
1
-
Trial pits alone are not considered sufficient

for major structures.
Boreholes At least four boreholes to be located at the

site of a typical Interchange In addition to those taken
along the main carriageway through the interchange.
Structures In the urban location may have

the benefit of other goetechnlcal
investigations carried out In the vicinity and
so the scope of lnvestlgation works may be
reduced.
Boreholes should locate rock head and typically penetrate

5m Into rock or 5m below formation level, whichever Is the
deeper. Groundwater shall be recorded if present. If
groundwater is likely to be a problem, it is recommended
that the water ievel is monitored over a period to allow for
seasonal variation.
Depth of borehole to extend 5m below

depth of proposed foundation.
Plate Bearing Tests Test to be carried out at foundation

locations on the advice of the
level for all fou~~dation
geotechnical expert.
Permeability Tests: Falling head or constant head
permeability tests to be undertaken in boreholes.
Necessaryh e r e surface water from highways will require
collection and discharge.
.
Tiial Pits: It is advisable that trial pits be located on each
slip road and tests undertaken to determine the
parameters required to design the earthworks, see
Embankment below. Trial Pits would typically be up to
2.5m deep.
Box Culvert
Usualiy In rural locations, It Is Important to

review topography and hydrology to locate
the culvert.
Trial Pits: At least one trial pit to be located at the

pmposed culvert position. Trial Pits would typically be up
to 2.5m deep.
Plate Bearing Tests.Test to be carried out at foundation
level for all foundation locations on the advice of the
geotechnical expert.
Boreholes Depending on the findings of the Feasibility
Investigation It may be necessary to locate a borehde at
the culvert position. Boreholes would typically be
extended to 3m below the foundation level.
p
Embankment
/Cuttings
Laboratorytests should identify parameters

for slope stabiri to vedfy that It is possible
for an ernbankmentlcutting to be built (Bulk
Density determink air/water voids, Shear
Strength determines bearing capacity).
Borehdes For embankmentsfcuttings 2.5m highldeep

or greater, at least one borehole to be located at the
proposed embankment/cutting position. if the
ernbankment/cutting Is very long, boreholes should be
located every kilometre.
Borehdesshould typically extend at least 3m beneath the
level of the bottom of the proposed embankment/cut'ng.
Borehdes should Identify rock head and reoord
groundwater if present. Standard penetration tests are
usually recommended to determine relative density.
Trial Pits For embankments/cuttings less than 2.5m
high, at least one trial pit to be located at the proposed
position. Trial Pits would typically be up to 2.5m deep.
Smal
Structures
Site Investigations for special structures such as

ornamental arches, roundabout centre pieces, gantries or
cantilevers for traffic signs will require individual
consideration depending on the size of the structure and
its location.
Note :The choice of borehole depth should be at least to the depth of the extent of the pressure bulb set up by the foundation.
'
The final decision on whether to continue the borehole further should be made by the geotechnical engineer on site.
Table I34
Schedule of Geotechnical Investigations for Structures at Design Stage
Notes
1
Whilst detail design information is not usually required at the early stages, it is better to provide
as much geotechnical information as possible, as early as possible.
Care should be taken when locating boreholes and trial pits, to ensure that sekices are not
damaged during the investigation. This is palticularly important in the urban situatlon.

Field Tests
83.2
83.3
Field tests to determine the density, bearing or

shear strength of in situ material are very
valuable as they can be carried out without
disturbing the soil.
Whilst each testing programme must be tailored
to suit the particular site investigation, Table 85
gives guidelines on the frequency of testing for
the most commonly used tests.
Test
Frequency
Atterberg
Limits
Plasticity Index,
liquid limits
2 tests per
trial pit
borehole
Particle Size
Distribution
Used in grading
and classification
of material
2 tests per
trial pit
borehole
California
Bearing Ratio
Used for pavement

design. Shall be
carried out in
accordance with
QCS.
2 tests per
trial pit
/borehole
Chemical
Tests
pH, Sulphate &

Chloride. Used to
check compatibility
of materials and
aggressiveness of
ground and water
on concrete
structures.
1 tests per
trial pit
/borehole
I test per
borehole with
regular
monitoring
Dry Density /
Moisture
Content
Relationship
Essentialfor slope
stability in
embankments/
cutting
2 tests per
trial pit
borehole
ground bearing
structure
Moisture
Content and
Density
Essential for all

testing regimes
relates sample to
liquid and plastic
limits
2 tests per
trial pit
/borehole
Measures shear
strength of soft soiis
If cohesive
soils. Im
intervals
throughout
depth of
borehole
Triaxial
Determines shear
strength for
cohesive soils
if suitable
samples
recovered
Gives shear stress

of soil
If suitable
samples
recovered
Determines ground
bearing pressure
(for rock only)
2 tests at
selected
boreholes
Frequency
throughout
depth of
Gives shear stress of

soil
..
California
Bearing Ratio
In situ used as a
guide for pavement
design. QHDM uses
laboratory CBR for
design.
Standpipe
Plezometer
Monitoring water
levels
Shear Vane
.
Test
,
Permeability
Test
In Situ
Density Test
If cohesive
soils. 1m
intervals
throughout
depth of
borehde
'2 tests per
trial pit
/borehole
Used to determine
permeability rates for
soakaway design
3 test per
borehole
soils
soils. 1m
intervals
throughout
depth of
Note: Tests shol d also be included at changes of strata.
Table 65
Laboratory testing will be required on the

samples taken. Table B6 lists the most
commonly used laboratory tests and gives
guidelines on the frequency of testing. The
tests are discussed in Section B4.
Notes
Standard
Penetration
Test
Laboratory Tests
Test
Notes
Unconfined
Compression
Test
APPENDIX 8
Schedule for Field Tests
Compression
Test
Unconfined
Compression
Test
Point Load
Test
Table B6
Schedule for Laboratory Tests
It may not be necessary to carry out all the

testing listed in Table B6. The engineer
responsible for preparing the brief may decide
to reduce the scope depending on the
information he needs for the design.
The testing frequency given in Table 65 is

shown as a guideline. It is common practice for
the schedule to be revised by the geotechnical
engineer responsible for the site investigation as
the investigation proceeds.
January 1997
Page B/6

84
ENGINEERING CONSIDERATIONS
84.1
Methods of lnvestlgation
When discussing the procedure for

investigation, referencewas made to borings as
a means of investigation. This is perhaps the
most common method of site exploration, but
certainly not the only one. BS 5930: 1981 Code
of Practice for site investigations provides
details of investigation methods to assess
ground conditions for construction purposes.
Considering new works, from very small to very
large contracts, a general guide to exploration
would be as follows:
Small works trial pits up to 3.0m deep
Mediumlo large scale works borings

up to 30m deep, typically 20m
Very large scale works (e.g. grade
separation and dams) a combination
of deep borings and pits.
It must be noted that the above is only a guide,

the detailed methods of exploration would
depend on the type of construction and site
involved.
Where rock is expected, borings of various
types should be used unless a number of pits
would prove more economical. In soils, the
normal method of exploration is by boring holes
(unless the loads expected are small, then
shallow pits will provide adequate samples for
testing).
The cost of setting up drilling rigs on site varies
from area to area depending on transportation
costs.
Before an estimate can be established for site
investigation work, the number of boreholes
and types of test must be determined. This will
be dependant on how much information is
already available.
84.1.1 Trial Plts
This is the cheapest form of exploration in

shallow depths (e.g. up to 3m).
Above 3
metres deep, the cost increases rapidly
compared with boring. The main advantage is
that soils and rocks can be exposed and
examined in situ. This method shows changes
in strata much more clearly than by borings.
The pits are dug out either by local labour or by
a small tractor-mounted excavator. The plan
size of a pit depends on method of excavation,
APPENDIX B
but approximately 1.2 x 1.2 m should be dug.
Holes should be kept well clear of the position
of actual foundations, but should be in the
vicinity of important structures such as heavilyloaded walls or columns.
Problems occur in water-bearing soils,
particularlysands, and therefore the economies
of shoring and pumping pits may outweigh the
savings gained against specialist borings. In
dry conditions, these pits are particularly
valuable since they allow hand-cut samples to
be taken, thereby minimising the disturbance of
the sample and maximising the conditions for
accurate testing.
Deeper trial pits may be used in the
investigation of rock fissures or to explore
layers of weak rock which cannot be removed
intact in normal boring operations. Such deep
pits are costly to construct and would be used
only in large scale exploration.
Trial pits are often the best method of exploring
back filled areas and sites overlain by variable
natural deposits.
84.1.2 Boreholes
This type of exploration can be achieved by

various methods:
Hand or mechanical auger borings are
relatively cheap methods of sub-surface
exploration of soils which 'will stand
unsupported. Hollow stem augers can be used
to support soils in borings. Holes can be sunk
to depths up to 30 metres provided there are no
obstructions such as boulders. The diameter of
the borehole is usually >100mm. This allows
soil sampling tubes to be used without difficulty.
The mechanical auger is used in gravelly soil,
which involves the use of a casing to prevent
collapse of the boring.
percussive boring is a method which can be
carried out in all types of soils, because the
borehole is lined with a thick-walled steel
casing. The boring is achieved by using open
ended shells in cohesive soils and clack valves
in cohesionless soils.
Other tools include chi.sel bits for breaking up
boulders. All the tools and sampling tubes are
attached to sectioned rods.
If the walls of the borehole require support, the

borehole is lined as the hole is bored and the
section linings screwed together and driven as
the hole deepens.
Percussion boring is the oldest method of
boring, in which the formation is broken up by
repeated blows from a bit or chisel. Water-is
added to the hole as the work proceeds and the
resulting debris is removed at intervals by shell,
auger or pressure washing. Samples from this
type of boring are inevitably disturbed. A new
system using a compressed air hammer
provides a quick method of boring for
permeability tests. This method does not
facilitate core sampling.
Rotary coring, which is used for the exploration
of rocks, can 60divided into two categories:
Core Drilling
Core drilling is a process designed to recover
continuous cores of rock.
Water or
compressed air is jetted down the hole through
hollow rods and returns up 'the annular space
carrying rock cuttings from the coring bit. For
hard rock cores, the crown of the drill is usually
tipped with industrial diamonds. The continuous
cores are laid in wooden core boxes in depth
order.
APPENDIX B.
In boring operations, it is common practice to
obtain 'bulk' disturbed samples in order to
obtain sufficient sample for compaction and
CBR tests, together with full gradings if the soil
is granular in nature.
This is particularly
applicable if the bore is penetrating a proposed
cutting.
Undisturbed samples: these are samples

removed by methods which preserve, so far as
practicable, the natural structure and properties
of 'the material. Samples in this category are
easily obtained in rock and clay, but difficult in
certain other soils. Table B1.I show the
method employed for obtaining samples.
SAMPLING METHODS
Disturbed
Hand samples
Auger samples
Shell samples
Undisturbed
Hand samples
Core samples
Disturbed
Sludge samples from

percussion or rotary drills
Undisturbed
Hand samples, cores
Soil
Rocks
Table B1.l
84.2
Sampling Methods
Testing
Mud-rotary Drilling
In mud-rotary drilling, a mud-laden fluid is
pumped in a continuous stream down hollow
drilling rods to the rotating bit. The bit is kept in
contact with the face of the boring and the fluid
carries the debris up the annular space
between the rods and the sides of the hole. A
steel casing to the hole is not necessary. The
cores are obtained by the use of coring tools.
This type of drilling is not normally used for site
investigation work.
For any particular location, the engineer must

first establish the depth and classification of
each strata of subsurface material and
compare this with what was envisaged. To do
this, a range of tests will be required.
Cone Penetration Tests

Where a significant thickness of unconsolidated
overburden is know to exist, Static 'Dutch' Cone
Penetration tests could be conducted to a
suitably agreed depth. Methods and equipment
in accordance with BS 5930.
842.1 in Sltu Testing
64.1-3 Samples
Having completed the tests and reviewed the

results, the engineer should consider whether
the investigation has confirmed his initial
assumptions or whether if has introduced new
problems.
Tests to obtain the density or shear strength of

soils in situ are very valuable since they can be
carried out without disturbing the soil. Such
tests are particularly valuable in sands and
silts. The main tests are:
'Standard penetration
There are two types of sample.

Disturbedsamples: these are samples removed
from boreholes with augers or other equipment
which interfere with the natural structure of the
material. Such samples are useful for visual
grading and determining moisture content, and
in some cases for laboratory testing. Samples
are placed in airtight jars with identifying labels.
Unconfined compression
California Bearing Ratio (CBR)
Monitoring water levels
Plate bearing test

a
Shear vane test
In situ density test
Permeability test.
Standard Penetration Test

As with all penetration tests, this consists of
measuring the resistance of the soil ta
penetration under dynamic loading. This
particular test is made by driving a 35mm
(internal diameter) split spoon sampler into the
soil at the bottom of a borehole. The sampler,
suspended on rods, is first driven 150mm into
the soil by a falling standard weight (63.5 kg
falling through a distance of 760mm). The
sampler is then driven a further 300mm and the
number of blows needed to achieve this is
recorded as the 'N' value. The test is used to
establish the relative density of soil, and for
particular soils to design foundations and gauge
settlement
Callfornla Bearing Ratio Test
This test may be used in the design of flexible
pavements and can be carried out on site. The
test shows the load-penetration of soils relative
to a standard crushed stone sample. The test
is normally carried out on soil at least 1m below
ground level (i.e. below the level of any
seasonal moisture fluctuation) using a lorry to
obtain the necessary reaction load through a
screw jack.
The in situ CBR test provides a different result
to that obtained in the laboratory under similar
conditions of density etc. Road design is
normally carried out based on the laboratory
CBR only.
standpipe Piezometer
Monitoring of water levels is carried out by the
use of piezometers. If a borehole is to be
constructed to obtain soil information, then
unless circumstances dictate otherwise, it
should be utilised in order to monitor the
fluctuation in ground water level. This may be
carried out for several years depending on the
time scale of the project. Such information will
be invaluable in the future once general trends
have been established.
Plate Bearing Test.
This type of test was once very popular and is
still used on large engineering projects as a
means of providing in situ data on the
behaviour of soils or rocks at foundation level.
The procedure consists of excavating a pit to
the level of the proposed foundation and then
loading a steel or cast iron plate (usually 600 x
600mm in size) on the bottom of the pit. The
APPENDIX B
load can be'applied in either of two ways; the
first by loading it with increments of kentledge
(concrete blocks or steel billets); the second by
means of a hydraulic jack bearing against a
heavily loaded beam.
Failure is traditionally assumed when the
settlement reaches a depth equal to 10%
(some engineers say 15%) of the breadth of the
loading plate, this should be verified by plotting
a time/load/settlement graph. The safe load
(qs) should be taken as one-third of that load
which causes failure or the failure load divided
by the project factor of safety. For most
structures, a generally accepted maximum
allowable settlement is 25mm. Terzaghi & Peck
have proposed a relationship which enables
allowable bearing pressure to be calculated
based on a chosen allowable settlement and
the loadlsettlement results obtained from a
plate bearing test.
The plate bearing test is useful in stony soils
where undisturbed sampling is difficult.
However, care should be taken to ensure
enough tests are taken to be representative
where soils may be variable across a site.
The plate bearing test data can also be used to
calculate a soils modulus of subgrade reaction.
One disadvantage of this test is the lack of
simulation of 'bulb pressuren. The bulb
pressure from a test of this nature is usually far
smaller than the bulb pressure from the actual
foundation. This could lead to error in
detecting settlement of a lower weak stratum.
Shear Vane Test
'This test measures the shear strength of soft
cohesive soils in situ. The vane is pushed into
the soil and rotated by hand at a constant rate.
The amount of torque necessary for rotation is
measured by a spring balance on top of the
rods and the shear strength of the soil is
calculated.
In Sltu Density Test

Typically sand replacement or nuclear density
tests are undertaken in the field. These
provide the field density of soils and are useful
in assessing compaction and settlement.
.
Permeability Test
This test enables the permeability of the soil or
bedrock to be ascertained. The most common
type of permeability test undertaken in Qatar is
the falling head test to BS 5930. However, the
type of test and the number per borehole
should be agreed with the Civil Engineering
Department.
Page 619

Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Test
This test utilities a hand held drop hammer
penetrometer which records cone penetration
resistance versus number of blows. Graphical
plots of results enable equivalent in situ CBR
values of the ground to be determined.
(Typically used for depths up to 2.0m). Refer to
the TRL specification for DCPT equipment and
CBR correlation relationship.
Other Tests
Other. in situ tests include the
penetrometer and hand shear vane.
84.2.2
hand
Laboratory Testing
Laboratory testing is undertaken to establish

the following characteristics of soils:
Identification and classification
Measurement of engineering properties
-.
Chemical content.
Identification and Classification

This analysis involves a number of individual
tests, such as:
. . Visual examination
Moisture content
Liquid and plastic limits
Particle size distribution.
Visual Examinations: made to note the colour,

texture and consistency of disturbed and
undisturbed samples, these being used later to
describe the soil in the engineer's reports.
Molsture Content: important in all soil
samples, since it helps to arrange a programme
of testing (by relating samples to liquid and
plastic limits) so that no doubtful sample will be
overlooked. The higher the natural moisture
content of the soil, the greater will be its
compressibility.
Liquid and Plastic Llmit Tests: made on
cohesive soils for classification purposes and
for assessing their compressibility. The liquid
limit (LL) (BS 1377 Test 3 and 4) determines
the amount of moisture content necessary to
cause the material to flow or move readily
under a given number of vibrations, whereas
the plastic limit (PL) is determined by rolling out
a 4 mm diameter thread of soil and noting the
moisture content which will allow the thread to
be rolled out still further until it breaks up due to
drying. When both liquid and plastic limits are
known, the Plasticity lndex can be established
(Plasticity index = LL-PL).
January 1997
APPENDIX B
Particle Size Distribution: of particular
importance when assessing problems of
excavation in permeable soils below the water
table. It is also useful for assessing the value
of non-cohesive soils for use as aggregates
and construction materials. The first part of the
test is achieved by sifting dried samples
through BS 410 sieves. In the case of cohesive
soils, a wet analysis is used, employing a
hydrometer. The range of particle sizes is
compared with a standard chart. PSD is also
useful for identification purposes and
assessment of material suitable for use as fill.
Measurement of Engineering Properties
The foregoing tests give some indication of the
engineering properties of a soil or rock, but
there are also specific tests which yield more
definite information relating to:
Bulk density of soil

Shear strength of soil
Consolidation of soil
Laboratory CBR
Laboratory compaction
Point load testing
Unconfined compression
(+deformation modulus)
testing
Bulk Density: the weight of material per unit

volume, including the weight of air or water in
the voids. This information is essential in the
design of retaining works, where the weight of
a stratum is an important factor (e.g. stability of
slopes, formation of earth dams, earth pressure
of retaining walls etc). Dry density (weight of
solids per unit volume) is used for the
determination of optimum compaction in earth
dams, embankments and other soil structures,
and in the laboratory CBR test.
Typically cone-cutter and 'sand replacement
tests are carried out to determine bulk density.
Shear Strength: can be used directly to
calculate a soil's bearing capacity and also to
calculate the pressure on supports in
excavations. There are several tests available
for ascertaining shear strength, but the most
popular is the triaxial compression test. Triaxial
compression tests are suitable for cohesive
soils only. Where cohesionless soils have to
be tested, the shear box test is used. A
sample of soil is subjected to a standard load
under which a horizontalforce is applied to the
lower half of the box until the sample shears.
- .
Page BI10

The Triaxial Compression Test can be carried
out using any of three different methods:
Undrained
Consolidated undrained
Drained.
In principle, the test consists of subjecting a
cylindrical sample of undisturbed soil (75 mm
long x 38 mm diameter) to lateral hydraulic
pressure in addition to a vertical load. This is
achieved by placing the sample in a specially
designed plastic cylinder which is subsequently
filled with water. Both vertical and lateral loads
can be increased as required in order to
simulate the in situ stresses. Measurement of
the forces needed to shear the sample is used
in the calculation of bearing capacity. In the
undrained triaxial test (often referred to as the
quick test) the sample, encased in a rubber
sheath, is capped with non-porous end plates to
prevent the pore water escaping and allow axial
loading of the ends. Three tests are carried
out, one each on three samples (all cut from the
same large sample ), each being subjected to a
higher hydraulic lateral pressure before axial
loading is applied. The results are then plotted
in the form of Mohr's circles.
The consolidated undrained triaxial test allows
the sample to drain while applying the hydraulic
pressure, thereby allowing the sample to
consolidate. After consolidation the sample is
stressed without further drainage.
In the drained test, the axial load is applied so
slowly that the pore water can drain off .without
building up any pressure in the sample. The
drainage continues throughout the test and the
amount of water drained off. is measured. In
both cases, where drainage is achieved, the
water passes through porous discs at the ends
of the sample and then through ducts in the
apparatus.
The consolidated undrained test and the
drained test have particular application to the
behaviour of soil in earth dams and
embankments, and also to stability problems in
general.
Consolldatlon test: used to calculate the
magnitude and rate of consolidation of a
particular soil. This is very important in
calculating the movement of soil under
foundations. The apparatus used is called an
'Oedometer'. The test consists of placing a
cylindrical sample (75 mm diameter x 18 mm
thick) in a metal ringand capping with porous
discs. The sample is placed in a water-filled
APPENDIX B
tray and subjected to load. The load is
increased every 24 hours and a timesettlement curve is plotted. Again, this is only
suitable for cohesive soils.
Laboratory CBR: shows the load-penetration
of soils relative to a standard crushed stone,
(see Clause 84.1.3). The test is carried w t in
a controlled laboratory situation and is of great
importance as it is laboratory CBR values that
are referred to in QCS and Section 9 Pavement
of QHDM, and which construction materials
and subgrade should meet.
Laboratory Compaction: provides the
optimum moisture content for a soil sample.
Successive samples of soil are progressively
wetted and compacted in a mould. The'dry
densitylmoisture content of these successive
samples is then plotted to find the optimum
moisture content. Typically, the Proctor test is
carried out (in accordance with BS 1377)
though the modified AASHTO and vibrating
hammer techniques are also commonly used.
The value of optimum moisture for the soil is
useful for preparing a soil prior to site
compaction in order to ensure minimum
compactive effort and specification compliance.
Results achieved are also used in other
laboratory tests such as the CBR test.
Point Load Testing on Rock: involves the
determination of failure strength of rock core
samples either by loading axially, diametrically
or irregularly. Refer to BS 1377 or ISRM
(International Society for Rock Mechanics).
Unconfined Compression Testlng (plus
measurement of Deformation Modulus on
Rock): involves measurement of failure
strength and deformation characteristic of
prepared samples. This test can be used either
in the site laboratory or in the field, since the
apparatus is very portable. This method is
therefore particularly useful where a large
number of samples are required to be tested.
Rock samples 75mm long and 38mm diameter
are placed in the apparatus and an axial load
applied. The sample is sheared under load
and the shear stress is automatically recorded
on a chart fixed to the apparatus. Refer to BS
1377.
Sedlmentatlon ~ e s t :used to assess whether
material is a silt or a clay. Refer to BS 1377.
Laboratory Permeablllty: used to determine
permeability of reconstituted samples, eg.
subgrade or roadbase materials.
Page 8/11

Minlature Shear Vane: carried out on borehole
samples of cohesive material. Commonly used
when samples are not suitable for other testing.
Chemlcal Content: a chemical analysis of
soils, rocks and groundwater is carried out to
assess the effects, if any, which their
composition might have on any material to be
used in the proposed works. The tests mainly
cover sulphate and chloride content and p H
value, although bacteriological analysis .may
also be
-- required for works in tidal mud flats.
...
84.3
'
Earthworks
Earth moving for roads takes place over a

relatively narrow band of terrain and a balance
of cut and fill is often difficult to achieve.
Constraints to the profile are imposed by the
need to provide.requiredclearances for bridges
under or over existing roads or to cross them at
their existing level.
Earthworks should be designed to provide an
adequate safety factor for shear fdlure and to
ensure that any deformation is within
acceptable limits. The information required
before the cross section of the embankment
can be-designedincludes:
.'
Ultimate width of top of embankment

including median, shoulder and verge
APPENDIX 8
shall all be in accordance with the Qatar
Construction Specification.
'
-.'.
The Ground Investigation Report should

identify the rock horizon for areas of cut, should
suggest methods of excavating the material,
and should identify whether the material is
likely to be suitable for use as a fill material.
84.4
Retalnlng Structures
~here'sufficientland width is not available to

accommodate the full width of the base of the
embankment, the provision of earth retaining
structures has to be considered. Below is a list
of some of the different types of earth retaining
structures commonly used.
Gravity walls in mass concrete,
brickwork or stone masonry
Reinforced
concrete
counterforVbuttress
walls,
Diaphragm walls
Piling walls
Crib walls
Gabions
Reinforced earth walls.
Loading on top of embankment

Geotechnical properties of foundation
and fill materials
Reservation width
Special considerations, eg. tidal area,
sound barriers, services etc.
In the design of approach embankments to
bridges
and
other
structures,
the
superstructures, substructures and associated
earthworks should be designed as a whole and
not individually. For further reference on
earthworks refer to British Standard 6031, Code
of Practice for Earthworks. The road design
should attempt to minimise earthworks. The
aim should be to balance cut and fill
requirements, allowing for rejection of
unsuitable material, bulking and compaction
factors. This will avoid having to dispose of, or
, obtain large quantities of material.
All imported fill material for a CED scheme

must be provided using the services of the
Qatar National Transport Office. The selection
of such material and its placing and compaction
January 1997
Gravity Walls
Gravity walls are suitable if the soil in the lower
part of the cutting can be cut back steeply to a
temporary slope to allow the wall to be
constructed. Any space between the back of
the wall and the temporary slope is then
backfilled.
Reinforced Concrete Walls
Reinforced concrete walls are suitable if the
soil in the lower part of the cutting can be cut
back steeply to a temporary slope to allow the
wall to be constructed. Any space between the
back of the wall and the temporary slope is
then backfilled. Alternatively, these walls can
be constructed in a timbered trench, the soil in
front of the wall being removed after completing
the retaining structure.
Diaphram Walls
Diaphragm walls, continuous bored pile walls
and secant bored piles are suitable for weak,
unstable or heavily water-bearing soils where a
temporary steep slope cannot be formed or
where construction in a trench would cause
problems of support or loss of ground.
Page 8/12
QATAR HIGHW~YDESIGN MANUAL

Piling Walls
Steel sheet piling may be used as a permanent
retaining wall if consideration is given to some
measure of protection against corrosion where
a very long life is required. Usually, however,
sheet piling is used as a temporary support
during the construction period.
'.'
. .
APPENDIX B
84.5
Geosynthetlcs
Geosynthetics are extremely versatile and may

be used in the following instances:
Reinforcement for subgrade and subbase materials in roads
Crib Walls
Precast concrete block walls or crib walls are a
form of gravity section and may be economical
for sites where suitable broken rock or gravel is
available as a fill material for the cribs.
Line drainage facilities, eg. wrapping

aggregate around soakaways to
prevent loss of fine materials, to
separate materials of different grade or
placed behind a retaining wall to act as
a drainage medium
Gablon Walls
Gabions are suitable for sites where broken
rock, boulders or large gravel are available for
filling the wire mesh baskets and where space
is available to arrange the baskets in tiers to
form a stepped-back retaining wall. A very long
life is not possible with gabion walls, but plastic-,
covered galvanised wire mesh can provide
many years of useful support. The flexibility of
a gabion retaining wall is advantageous for
sites where appreciable deformation of a slope
may occur as a result of stress relief.
Reinforcement for soil slopes (cutting

or embankment)
Gabions are particularly suitable for

construction in conditions where earth slopes
are temporarily or permanently flooded and
subjected to scour from flowing water.
Reinforced Earth Walls

Reinforcedearth retaining walls can be formed
in the lower part of a cutting slope by
excavating at the toe to form a temporary steep
slope, then replacing the excavated soil in
compacted layers of essentially granular
material, each layer being reinfqrced by
horizontal metal or plastic ties (refer to Clause
85.3). The steeply inclined face of the retaining
wall is protected by metal, reinforced concrete
or plastic cladding elements. Reinforcedearth
retaining walls have the advantage of flexibility
and are suitable for soil conditions where
appreciable forward movement or heaving of a
cutting is anticipated as a consequence of
stress relief.
Consideration may also be given to the use of
ground anchors or rock b'olts. Information on
methods of design and construction of the
above types of wall can be found in the British
Standard publications, BS 8002 Code of
Practice for Earth Retaining Structures and BS
8004 Code of Practice for Foundations.
In all cases and for all types of retaining walls
attention should be given to drainage at the
back of the wall in order to prevent hydrostatic
pressure on the retaining structure and to avoid
a general rise in pore pressure in the soil or
rock mass behind the wall.
Januarv 1997
Provide a capillary barrier against

rising ground moisture.
In all cases the engineer shall refer to the
manufacturers technical literature and check
the suitability of a geosynthetic for the particular
application.
There are a'number of different trade names of
geosynthetics.available and the usage and
design of such materials is dealt with within
their own respective technical literature.
B5
SAMPLE PRO FORMA . FOR

QUANTIFYING . GEOTECHNICAL
SITE INVESTIGATIONS
The following five pages show a sample pro

forma Bill of Quantities to be used when
quantifying a site investigation (with notes).
The testing programme shown may be reduced
or expanding according to the type of
investigation required.
It is important to identify each element of work
required in a schedule in as much detail as
possible. This serves two purposes. Firstly, it
acts as a checklist and enables the engineer to
list precisely the requirements of the brief.
Secondly, a detailed list with item descriptions
enables the brief to be priced by the tenderers
on an even basis and reduces the probability of
hidden extra costs.
The pro forma has been split into three
sections with notes:
Fieldwork
Laboratory work
Reporting.
'APPENDIX B

9
I
I
*$
Scope Of Works for Geotechnical Investigation

Project Code
'is.
A.
..
Project Title
SECTION 1 FIELDWORK
Ref
F1
Notes
Item Descrlption
WalkoverJDesk
Study
-#.
Including all permits, and reporting.

Available data from existing geotechnical
mapping and any other sources shall be
combined with a geological walkover survey
of the site. The combined silrvey shall
identify such areas as rock outcrop,
sabkah, water courses, water collection
areas etc. The results are to be marked on
topographical plans of 1:2000 scale or
1:500 scale as directed. One copy of the
results are to be submitted to the Engineer
as part of the Site lnvestigation Report
(refer R1).
Qty
Unit
Item
Item
Rate
(QR)
Total
(QR)
F2
Boreholes
F2.1
Mobilisation
All items associated with all mobilisationfor

bore oles including location of boreholes.
The f,
approximate location of all boreholes,
trial pits and surface samples shall be
indicated on the contract drawings. The
precise positions shall be agreed with the
Engineer prior to commencement on site.
Nr
F2.2a
Drilling of Boreholes
Light cable percussion and rotary core

drilling to 20m, including hand dig for
services as required, liaison with utilities,
moves between boreholes, photograpQs,
bdrefble logs, reinstatement of boreholes
and reporting. The Cor~tractorshall provide
full information on the strata and the
engineering properties of all soils and rock
encountered. See Notes 5,7,8, 9, 14.
F2.2b
Additional Drilling
Additional drilling depth rate per m below

20m b.g.1.
F2.3
SPT in Borehole
In situ SPTs shall be made on all

cohesionless and non-cemented strata, in
accordance with QCS Section 3 Part 4 Soil
Sampling.
Nr
F2.4
Standpipe in
Borehole
Installation and monitoring of standpipe in

borehole.
Nr
F2.5a
Rotary OpenDrilling
Rotary open drilling 100mm diameter,

including collection and logging of chipping
samples to depths of 30m b.g.l., including
reinstatement.
Nr
F2.5b
Additional Drilling
Additional rotary open drilling depth, rate

per m below 30m b.g.1.
Rate
-r
Rate'
m
-
F2.6
PermeabilityTest in
Borehole
January 1997
Falling head test to BS 5930.
Nr
Page 8/14
-.

Ref
i
f
?
I,?
Item Description
Notes
Qty
Unit
Item
F3
Trial Pits
F3.1
Mobilisation
All items associated with mobilisation for

trial pits.
F3.2a
Excavation of Trial
Pit
Hand Excavation
Excavation to 1.2m, including liaison with

utilities, moves between trial pits,
photographs, trial pit logs and reporting.
See Notes 6,7,8, 9,14.
Nr
F3.2b
Excavation of Trial
Pit
Machine Excavation
Excavation to 3.0m including liaison with

utilities, moves between trial pits,
photographs, trial pit logs and reporting.
See Notes 6,7,8, 9,14.
Nr
F3.3
Reinstatement of
Trial Pit
Trial pits shall be backfilled and compacted

in accordance with QCS. All materials shall
comply with QCS.
Nr
F3.4
Soakaway and
permeabilityTest
See Note 17.
Nr
Pavement Coring
F4.7
DCP testing in unconsolidated material to a

depth of 2m or until resistance to penetrate
is such that for 30 blows less than 5mm
penetration is achieved. The DCP plot and
profile shall be provided at each location.
Plate Bearing Test
Test to .be carried out at foundation or

formation level. Plate to be approximately
600mm sq, loading details to be suitable for
project requirements. Contractor to supply
reaction load.
Shear Vane Test
Test shall be in soft sensitive clays. Vane

to consist of four blades 75mm x 150mm.
In Situ Density Test
Tests shall be by core cutter, sand

replacement or nuclear density metre as
appropriate to the soil type.
In Situ CBR
Tests in accordance with BS 5930.
January 1997
DCP testing in accordance with TRL

Information Note at core locations shall be
carried out immediately upon completion of
coring and the hole is then sponged dry. A
profile of the bearing capacity to a depth of
800mm below the road surface or until
resistance to penetrate is such that for 30
blows less than 5mm of penetration is
achieved. The DCP plot and profile shall
be provided at each location. See Note 10.
-
1 1
Total
(QR)
Cores shall not be less than 150 mm

diameter and shall be taken through the full
thickness of the asphalt pavement, such
that the underlying, unbound material is
exposed.
All core holes shall be backfilled with fine
cold asphalt mixture or similar approved,
placed and compacted in layers using a
suitable tamper such as a plate attached to
vibrating hammer. Backfilling shall take
place immediately upon completion of
testing.
Dynamic Cone
Penetrometer Testing
Rate
(QR)
I F4 1 Additional Methods
Dynamic Cone
Penetrometer Testing
on Pavements
APPENDIX B
Page BM5

.
APPENDIX B
SECTION 2 LABORATORY WORK
Item Description
Ref
Notes
Qty
Unit
L1
Atterberg Limits
See Note 12.
Nr
L2
Particle Size
Distribution
See Note 12.
Nr
L3
CBR
See Note 12.
Nr
L4
Chemical Tests
pH, sulphate and Chloride. See Note 12.
Nr
L5
Dry Density / Moisture

Content Relationship
See Note 12.
Nr
L6
Moisture Content and

Density
See Note 12.
Nr
L7
TtiaxialTest
See Note 12.
Nr
L8 .
Point Load Test in

Rock : - -
See Note 12.
Nr
L9
Unconfined
CompressionTest
(with Modulus of
Deformation on Rock)
See Note 12.
Nr
L10
SedimentationTest
See Note 12.
Nr
Laboratory
PermeabilityTest
See Note 12.
Nr
Miniature Shear Vane

Test
See Note 12.
Nr
L11
.
L12
Rate
(QR)
Total
(QR)
SECTlON 3 REPORTING
Site Investigation
Report
R1
Comprehensive factual and interpretative

Geotechnical
Report,
including
photographs, the number of copies to be as
specified. See Note 13.
Item
.*
NOTES
1
2
These notes apply to Field Work, Laboratory Work and Reporting.. It is assumed that the rates
for the above items include for the requirements of these notes.
The purpose of a geotechnical investigation is to provide infomiation to determine parameters
sufficient for concept or detailed design, as required. The investigations should enable the
Consultant to advise the Engineer on the requirements necessary for further investigation work
that wiil enable quantificationof the project.
All works shall be carried out in accordance with QCS Section 3 Ground Investigation.
The Contractor shall exercise the greatest possible cam to ensure that both field and laboratory
work are of the highest quality.
The measurement of the depth of the trial pits and boreholes shall be taken from the level at
which the pit or bore enters the ground. The positions of all boreholes and trial pits shall be
recorded to within an accuracy of 1m together with the ground levels to the nearest 50mm.
related to the Qatar National Datum (referto QCS Section 3). This-informationshall be recorded
on the plans and submitted to the Engineer as part of the Report.
I*
C-
January 1997
Page B/16
APPENDIX B
rial pits shall be excavated to rock level or otherwise to the limit of the mechanical excavator,
nominally a depth of 2.5 m. The depth of boreholes may be varied by the Engineer subject to
the strata encountered on site. Bed rock in boreholes shall be proved for a minimum depth of
5m. In cuttings remote from structural foundations, the depth of boreholes shall be 3m below
proposed formation level.
All excavations shall be logged by a fully qualified geotechnical engineer or engineering

geologist and such logs shall form part of the Report. Refer to QCS Section 3 Clause 1.6.7.
8
,
The equipment used for excavation, bodng, sampling and testing shall be subjected to the
approval of the Engineer. Under no circumstances shall water be used to assist boring through
clay.
If any object, natural or artificial, obstructs either setting up or progress of excavating and boring
the matter shall be reported to the Engineers Representative, who may direct the excavation or
borehole to another location to avoid the obstacle.
10
DCP testing shall be in accordance with the UK Transport Research Laboratory (TRL)
InformationNote, Operating Instructions for the TRL Dynamic Cone Penetrometer, 1991.
.. .
Analysis of the DCP reading shall be made using the latest version of the TRL DCP computer
programme based on the following relationship between penetration resistance and estimated
in situ CBR:
Log,
(CBR) = 2.48 1.057 Log,, (Strength)
It should be noted that this formula may not be applicable to Qatar conditions and results
obtained should be treated with caution.
The analysis shall account for the effect of water used in the coring process on the aggregate
layers.
11
All rotary core samples shall be retained for a period of six months at the offices of the
Contractor for the purpose of inspection. All core samples shall be colour photographed and
postcard size prints inserted in each copy of the report. Photographs are to be taken at a
distance from core samples to enable a detailed study of the core.
Small disturbed samples shall be taken at changes of strata and at approximately 1.Om intervals
within each type of material.
Bulk disturbed samples of at least 80 kg weight shall be taken in cohesive materials as directed
by the Engineer at a change of strata and not greater than 1.Om intervals within each type of
material. One small disturbed sample shall be taken between each two successive bulk
disturbed samples. The samples shall be sealed, transported, protected and stored such that
no change in moisture content and soil structure occurs.
Surface samples shall be bulk disturbed samples of at least 80 kg weight and these shall be
taken in accordance with the recommendations given in BS 5930.
Samples of groundwater of at least one litre shall be taken, and the level at which water is struck
and standing water levels shall be observed and recorded
12
All laboratory testing shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant procedures given in BS
1377: 1990, Testing of Soils, save that the method for both compaction tests and recompaction
of samples of the CBR test, which shall be in accordance with Central Materials Laboratory
method of test CML 12-97 and CML 10-97.
Soil and groundwater samples shall be analysed for the following :
..
sulphates
chlorides
pH
grading 1 classification (as appropriate)
APPENDIX B
For each trial pit and borehole, soil samples shall be tested at each change in strata, with a
minimum of 2 tests in the overburden above the rock.
Detailed engineering logs shall be submitted, in accordance with QCS Section 3.
13
The Contractor shall submit daily allocation sheets and preliminary logs and test results in
accordance with QCS Section 3 Clauses 1.6.1, 1.4.1 and 1.4.3.
As soon as possible after the completion of the Laboratory Testing, the Contractor shall submit
5 copies of his factual and interpretative report, prepared in accordance with QCS Section 3
Clause 1.4.5.
14
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to safeguard all existing on-site services.
The Contractor will be held liable for any damage to such services which may be attributable to
his negligence. Refer to QCS Section 3 Clause 1.6.6.
15
The Contractor will be expected to carry out the on-site works expeditiously and in one visit.
16
The Contractor shall give a minimum of 48 hours notice, in writing, to the Engineer, before he
commences any work on site.
The Contractor is to carry out the works to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer, and is to work
in such a way that no inconvenience is caused to other contractors, statutory undertakers or the
general public who may be in the locality.
. ..
r
--
i,.
The responsibility for obtaining Road Opening Permits and the like shall be upon the Consultant,
who shall adhere to all the requirements of any authority.
The Consultant shall allow in his fee submission for all requirements of QCS Section 3 Clause
1.6.1 including hand excavation to determine the presence of utility lines prior to the
commencement of mechanical excavation.
<
17
18
In selected trial pits, the Consultant shall undertake tests to determine the suitability of the
substrata to dissipate water. The results of these tests shall be reported and utilised in the
design of stormwater soakaways, positive drainage systems or water ground relief systems. The
design of soakaways shall be in accordance the current CEO design practice and BRE Digest
365, modified as appropriate for local conditions.
The location of utility lines encountered in the excavation shall be logged and their condition
noted. When trial pits are specified in the Project Brief for utilities location and condition
surveys, the Consultant shall ensure that a representative of each utility company is present to
confirm the responsibility of the apparatus encountered.
January 1997
Paae 811 8
-L

Qatar Highway Design Manual - 1997 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Qatar Highway Design Manual - 1997 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QATAR GENERAL PETROLEUM CORPORATION

Introduction by H.E. Minister for Municipal Affairs and Agriculture

The State of Qatar is witnessing rapid

Therefore, the initiative of the Civil

ALI %IN SAEED AL KflAYAREEN

MINISTER OF MUNICIPAL AFFAIRS AND AGRICULTURE

Introduction by H.E. the Undersecretary of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs

The Road Network represents the arteries j

Therefore, "the information that should be

ALI BIN SAAD AL KWARI

JjM )*L.1 4 1 ;41L.

Introduction by the Director of Civil Engineering Department

This is the second issue of the Qatar + U S

The Civil Engineering Department while

ALI BIN NASSER RL THAN1

Qatar Highway Design Manual

Qatar Highway Design Manual

2nd Edition (Rev 0 )

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

Section 6 Copyright Acknowledgement

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

The Highway Network

CROSS SECTIONAL ELEMENTS

9TAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

Selection of Junction Type.

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

Recommended Practice ...................................

APPENDIX B GUIDANCE NOTES TO PREPARE A BRIEF FOR GEOTECHNICAL

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED

AADT(Average Annual Daily Trafflc) Total

Acceleration Lane A speed change lane to

Auxiliary Lane The portion of the carnageway

Axle Load The total load transmitted by all

Berm (1) A raised and elongated area of earth

Braking Distance 'The distance required to

Broken Back Curve An arrangement of

Buffer Zone (Buffer Strip) - Land adjacent to

Callfornla Bearing Ratio (CBR) The ratio of

Camber (1) A slight arch designed or built into

Capillary Break Layer The layer of specified

Catchment Area feeding rainfall to a specific

Centreline (1) For a two-lane highway the

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

Crash Barrier See Safety Fence

Culvert A closed conduit, other than a bridge,

Diamond Interchange A four-leg interchange

Embankment A raised earth structure on

QATAR HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL

Emergency Flood Area (EFA) - Area set aside

ESA (Equlvalent Standard Axle) The effect

Fencing Item placed next to the road to define

Gutter - A paved and generally shallow

Headwall A vertical or inclined wall at the end

Hlghway see Road.

Foreslope - The slope from the edge of the

Horizontal Alignment - Horizontal geometry of

Formation - Graded surface above subgrade or

Horizontal Curve - A circular curve or transition